ANNLX 5 020 827 Ex Libris C. K. OGDEN AN IN JAPANESE BY CLAY MACCAULEY, A. M. PRESIDENT OF SENSHIN OAKUIN (SCHOOL FOR ADVANCED LEARNINd) TOKYO, TAPAN. YOKOHAMA, SHANGHAI, HONGKONG, SINGAPORE. KELLY AND WALSH, LTD. 189(5. 1'BISTEn AT TTIF. SlTUKISHA, T0KY<\ JAPAN. TO CHARLES CARROLL EVERETT, D. D. DEAN OF THE DIVINITY FACULTY OF HABVAED UNTVBKSITY, THIS MANUAL, AN ATTEMPT TO OPEN A WAY INTO KNOWLEDGE AND USE OF THE JAPANESE LANGUAGE, IS GRATEFULLY INSCRIBED. There is, perhaps, nothing more marvellous in the world than the identity of language through att generations. Words become obsolete. New words spring into being; languages and dialects share the fate of the nations and tribes that speak them. Att changes affect the fundamental principles and identity of language no more than the falling and budding leaves affect the structure and identity of the oak. CHABLES CAHBOLL EVERETT. PREFACE. The work here made public, although from its size seemingly pretending much, will I hope be judged by students as being exactly what its title professes for it, " An Introductory Course " in the Japanese language. It is a manual for beginners, not a treatise for advanced scholars. Yet, it is not a mere primer. As far as it goes, it is an attempt at a thorough exposition of its subject. It is intended for adult minds, and demands patient study. Above all, the aim held constantly in view in its preparation has been the practical mastery of the beginnings of a correct reading, writing and speaking of the language common in polite social intercourse in Japan. This aim makes necessary an apparently slow advance for the student ; but I believe that the way here opened, if faithfully followed, will leave but little for the learner to unlearn, and will in the end secure for him the most rapid real progress. In the composition of the book, I have not hesitated to appropriate to its use whatever fit materials have been made available by the work of competent expositors of the Japanese language ; but I have acknowledged direct quotation, and, for the rest, have presumed to shape in my own way the products of others' studies. In one important relation, however, I have allowed myself to oner an independent contribution to the grammatical study of Japanese. I have attempted to introduce some symmetry into, and therewith to avoid a certain n PREFACE. existing confusion in, the naming of the four primary verbal variations that have been accepted by Western grammarians as the forms with which an ordinary study of the Japanese verb should begin. I have felt at liberty to do this since the names for these forms are still under discussion, and, especially, since the changes I have made are not radically subversive of approved usage. The second section, " The Elements of Grammar," has been given a place in the manual not as a gram- mar with the ordinary pretence of the name, but as a preliminary explication of some of the most noticeable embarrassing differences that separate Japanese from English speech. A thorough grammatical study of the Japanese language, for reasons set forth in the chapter " On Method in Acquiring Japanese," does not come within the range covered by the book. A like qualification should also be applied to the " Notes on the Conversations." These notes are few and are quite elementary. They accompany only the first five con- versations, and are intended merely to clear out of the student's path the most prominent and crippling ob- stacles to his use of the method commended in the chapter devoted to Method. The third section, " Practice in the Colloquial," may attract the attention of some scholars of Japanese on account of the comparativaly free use in it of per- sonal pronouns, that is to say, a use of them much more frequent than was characteristic of social speech in Japan in former years. But a change in this direc- tion is noticeably taking place in the intercourse of the younger generation of the Japanese people, along with PREFACE. m their increasing familiarity with, and use of, the lan- guages of the "West. Among the works used in the preparation of the manual, I make public acknowledgment of indebtedness to Dr. J. J. Hoffmann's, " Japanese Grammar ; " to Mr. W. G. Aston's, " Grammar of the Japanese "Written Language," and to his grammar of the " Spoken Lan- guage ; " to Rev. William Imbrie's " English- Japanese Etymology ; " to Professor Rudolf Lange's " Lehrbuch der Japanischen Umgangssprache ; " and to Dr. J. H. Hepburn's " Japanese-English Dictionary ; " also to the English grammatical writings of Professor "W. D. "Whitney. Besides, I wish to make particular men- tion of Professor Basil Hall Chamberlain's, " Hand- book of Colloquial Japanese," which I have freely used. I commend Prof. Chamberlain's book to stud- ents of this manual as a rich storehouse for them of practical grammatical exposition and illustration. Personally, I am under obligation to several friends and helpers. To Professor Chamberlain, and to Dr. KarlFlorenz,Iowe profitable suggestions ; to Rev. Arthur Lloyd, M. A. and to Mr. "W. B. Mason, I am indebted for generous assistance in the reading of proofs of the English text. The Japanese text has been carefully read in proof by Mr. Iwao Hasunuma, Mr. Saichiro Kanda, and Mr. Hisato Kikuchi. The Japanese text of section third, "Practice in the Colloquial," is a rendering into a polite yet familiar colloquial of the English given on the pages opposite. This rendering was made by Mr. Saichiro Kanda and Mr. Iwao Hasu- numa ; but chiefly by Mr. Hasunuma, under whose work and supervision the whole rendering received its final rv PREFACE. form. To all these gentlemen my grateful acknowledg- ment is due. My thanks are also owing to the Shueisha, for the excellent typography of the book, in which, when the great difficulties attendant upon type-com- position in the English language in Japan, and upon an unusual arrangement of Japanese syllabics and words are considered, comparatively few errors appear. With the hope that this manual, however imperfectly its aim has been followed, may be helpful to those who shall accept the course of study it opens, I submit it to the indulgent judgment of its students, and of the friends of the Japanese language. C. MAcC. SENSHIN GAKUIN. TOKYO, JAPAN. May, 1896. TABLE OF CONTENTS. The numerals refer lo paragraphs, unless otherwise specified. GENERAL INTRODUCTION, (pp. 1-19). I. The Colloquial of Tokyo, as Source of the Prospective Japanese Language. II. Parallel between Tudor English and Meiji Japanese. III. Beginnings of the History of Writing in Japan. IV. Effect of the Incoming of Buddhism upon Literature in Japan. V. Use of Chinese Ideographs in the Japanese Sentence. VI. Origins of the Kana Syllabaries. VII. The Kama Classics of the Tenth and Eleventh Centuries. VIII. Literary Degeneracy following the Political Revolu- tion of the Twelfth Century. IX. Separation between the Colloquial and the Written Languages. X. Literary Revival under the Tokugawa Shogunate. Age of Genroku. XI. The Mito School of Historians. The Genroku Novelists. XII. The Standard Written Language. XIII. Language during the Meiji Age. The Written Language. XIV. Influences operating to dignify Colloquial Japanese. XV. Probable Merging of the " Written Language " into the Colloquial. XVI. The Kana as Basis for the Future Medium of Literary Ezpression. XVII. The Service this Manual may render to a Student of the Japanese Language. XVIII. SPECIAL SUGGESTIONS FOE USING THIS MANUAL. SECTION FIRST. THE SYLLABARY : WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. CHAPTER I. THE KATAKANA, 1. The Katakana, general remarks, 1 : table of the Katakana syllabary, I. CHAPTER II. THE SEPARATE KANA SYLLABLES, 2-22. Division of the syllabary into two parts : VOWEL SYLLABLES, and CONSONANT SYLLABLES. vi TABLE OF CONTENTS. I. VOWEL SYLLABLES, how pronounced, 2. Distinguished from true vowels, 2. note. II. CONSONANT SYLLABLES, how pronounced, K series, 3 ; G series, 4 ; peculiarities of pronunciation of consonantal elements in G series, 5 ; S series, 6 ; Z series, 7 ; soft shi and su, 8 ; T series, 9 ; D series, 10 ; N series, 11 ; peculiarity of pronunciation of the n syllabic before certain labials, 12 ; H or SPIRANT series, 13 ; B series, 14 ; P series, 15 ; M series, 16 ; T series, 17 ; on yi, and ye, 18 ; K. series, 19 ; equivalents for L syllables, 20; W series, 21 ; special note on too, id ice, and wu, 22. CHAPTER III. THE SYLLABLES AS AFFECTED BY JUXTAPOSITION. Modifications in pronunciation caused by juxtaposition, 23-57. I. VARIATIONS OF VOWEL SOUNDS, 23-34. Vowel syllables as a rule but slightly affected, 24 ; vowel elements of consonant syllables, how affected, 25-34 ; variations of vowel element a, 26 ; vowel element i, 27 ; vowel element M, 28 ; vowel element e, 29 ; vowel element o, 30. Illustrations of the modifications of the vowel sounds, 31-34 ; round, flat, long, and short vowel sounds, 33 ; rapid and silenced sounds, 34. II. CHANGES IN VOWEL SYLLABLES, 35 41. Vowel syllables when doubled, how affected, 35 ; unlike vowel syl- lables juxtaposed, how changed, 36-41 ; a with e, or o, 37 ; i preceding other vowel syllables, 38 ; u and o preceding other vowel syllables, 39 ; a and o how changed, 40 ; pronunciation of e u, 41. III. CHANGES IN JUXTAPOSED VOWEL AND CONSONANT SYLLABLES, 42-48. "When vowel syllables precede consonant syllables, especially of the H, or Spirant, series, 42 ; general rule, 42, note ; when consonant syl- lables precede vowel syllables, 43; consonantal syllables in e with vowel syllable , 44 ; consonantal syllables preceding syllables of H series, 45; special remark on /tctt as terminal of verbs, 46 ; when /tew does not lose its spirant quality, 47 ; special note on change in pro- nunciation of fwu, 48. TABLE OF CONTENTS. TO IV. CHANGES IN CONSONANT SYLLABLES, 49-57. General effect of juxtaposition of consonant syllables, 49 ; coalescent sounds, 50 ; rapid or suppressed sounds, 51 ; terminal u sound, 52 ; tsu preceding ch sound, 53 ; ku followed by a k syllabic. 54 ; tsu preceding syllables of K, S, T, P series, 55 ; t.m as sign of doubling a syllable, 55, note ; ku and gv. before wa, 56 ; M and i of the K, H, S and T series, 57 ; general note, 57. CHAPTER IV. PUNCTUATION, GRAPHIC SIGNS, AND ACCENT. 58-81. I. PUNCTUATION, 58-66. Japanese writing as a rule is a continuous succession of syllabic characters, 58 ; recent attempts at punctuation, 58 ; marks commonly used, 59 ; headline, 60 ; period, 61 ; emphasis, 62 ; subordinate period, or comma, 63 ; secondary emphasis, 64 ; degrees of emphasis, 64 ; ex- clamation, 65 ; interrogation, 66. II. GRAPHIC SIGNS, 67-74. Special signs required, (57; coupler of syllables for persons' and places, 68; main subsections, 69; chief subdivisions, 70 ; quotation, 71 ; abbreviation, 72 ; parenthesis, 73 ; repetition of a syDable, 74 ; special printers' marks, 74. III. ACCENT, 75-80. Not prominent in Japanese speech, 75 ; words of two syllables, 76 ; words of three syllables, 77 ; words of three and more syllables, 78 ; accent always on long syllables, 79 ; differences of accent show differ- ences of meaning in like written words, 80. IV. MARKS FOB TRANSLITERATION, 81. Vowel marks, 81, long, 81 ; a ; short, or suppressed 81, b; n sound, 81, c; mark of accent, 81, d. vm TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER V. NUMERALS, 82-90. Japanese enumeration is complex and difficult, 82. Cardinal enu- meration from one to ten, how made, 83-84 ; from ten to one hundred, 85 ; higher numbers, 86 ; year number, 87 ; day, month and year, 88 ; abbre- viation of numerals in speech, 89; Japanese and Chinese cardinals, when used, 90. CHAPTER VI. THE HIRAGANA, 91-93. General remarks, 91 ; Transition from Katakana to Hiragana, 91 a ; illustrative proverbs as written in Katakana, 91, b ; table of standard Hiragana syllabary, 92 ; transcription of the illustrative proverbs from Katakana into Hiragana, 93 ; comparative study of Hiragana syllables in ten groups, 93, a k. SECTION SECOND. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. CHAPTER I. CLASSES OF WORDS, 94-95. The general division of Japanese language into Na, Kotoba and Teniwoha, here grouped into two classes, 94-95 ; first class containing the Na and Teniwoha, 94 ; second class, the Kotoba or Hataraki-kotoba, 95 ; note on meaning and use of Hataraki-kotoba, 95. CHAPTER II. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN SPEECH, 96-102. General order of words in the sentence, 93. Exception to the re- gular order, 96. Fundamental law governing relations of words, 97. Coordinated nouns, and forms of succeedant verbs and adjectives, 98. Manner of quotation, 99. Interrogation, 100. Order of expressions of time and place, 101. Omission*of final verbs and adjectives, 102. TABLE OF CONTENTS. EC CHAPTER, III. WESTERN GRAMMAR IN JAPANESE SPEECH, 103-280. THE ARTICLE, 103. Equivalents for the definite article, 103. II. THE NOUN, 104-122. 1. NUMBER : equivalent for, singular, 104, a ; plural, 104, b and c. 2. GENDER : difference expressed by form, and by prefix, but dif- ference chiefly ignored, 105. 3. CASE : shown often by suffixes, 106. 4. CLASSES OF NOUNS. Simple, 108. Derivative, 109-116 ; abstract in sa, 1 10 ; in koto, 111-112 ; concrete, 113; diminutive, 114 ; augmentative, 115 ; verbal, 110. Compound, 117-122 ; noun with noun, 118 ; noun with preceding adjective, 119; noun with verb preceding, 120 ; noun with verb following, 121 ; two verbal forms, 122. III. THE PEONOUN, 123-131. 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS, equivalents of, 123. 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, expressed by particle no with personal pronouns, 124. 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, substantive, 126 ; adjective, 127 ; phrase equivalents, 128. 4. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS, substantive, 129. 5. RELATIVE PRONOUNS, verbal forms, 130. 6. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, interrogatives with particles, 131, negative, 131, note. IV. THE VERB, 132-207. 1. CLASSES OF VERBS, 132-133. Transitive and intransitive, 132 ; terminal differences, 133. 2. NUMBEE AND PERSON, 134-136. No formal distinction of number or person, 134 ; equivalents for, 135-136. x TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. TENSE, 136-137. Inflection shows time, as present or past, and each tense as certain or probable, 136 ; future how shown, 136, a ; indefinite tense form, 137. 4. MODE, 138. Indicative, subjunctive, imperative, 138. Subjunctive in two forms, conditional and concessive, 138, a and 6. 5. ADJECTIVAL VEKB FORMS, 139. Gerund, 139, a ; desiderative, 139, b. 6. PROCESS OF INFLECTION, 140-158. Verbal Root, 140 ; four primary verbal variations as points of de- parture in studying inflection, 141 ; names proposed for these four variations, 142 ; STEMS OF INFLECTION, the name adopted, 143. The Main Stem, how marked, 144; its function in inflection, 145; its use when several verbs occur in the same sentence, 146 ; as sub- stantive, and in compounds, 147. The Negative Stem, how marked, 148; its function in inflection' 149-50 ; in second conjugation, main stem and negative stem the same, 150. The Certain Present Stem, its function in inflections, 151 ; how marked, 152 ; it names the verb, 153 ; it determines, in connection with the main stem, the conjugations, 154 ; its use as substantive, and as adjective, 155. Th Conditional Stem, its function in inflection, and how marked, 156. Summary of signs for stems of inflection, 157-58. 7. GBOUPINaS IN INFLECTION : CONJUGATION, 159-171. Two Conjugations, 159. first Conjugation, how determined, 160-61 ; euphonic changes in first TABLE OF CONTENTS. xi conjugation, 162-G9 ; main stem in fcj, 163 ; in i or mi, 165 ; in chi, 166 ; in ri, 167 ; in i or hi, 168-69. Second Conjugation, how determined, 170 ; two variations of inflection for second conjugation, in e or in i, 171. 8. PARADIGMS OF THE \'EBB, 172-197. Table of Stem Signs for the two conjugations, 172. Main Stem inflections in the first conjugation, 173-74 ; function of main stem in polite inflection, 175 ; second conjugation, main stem inflection forms, 176; note on main stem in second conjugation, 177. Negative Stem inflection forms, first conjugation, 178-79 ; second con- jugation, 180. Certain Present Stem inflection forms , first conjugation, 181-82 ; second conjugation, 183. Conditional Stem inflection forms, first conjugation, 184-85 ; second conjugation, 186. Paradigm for first conjugation, 187 ; for second conjugation, 198. Polite form of verbal inflection, in masu, 189-95 ; peculiarities in inflection of mnsu, 190-93; paradigm of Naoshi-mnsu, 194-95. Paradigms of the two irregular verbs kurv, and sum, 196-97. 9. PHBASE VERBS, 198-207. Phrase verbs, definition, 198 ; classes, passive, potential, causative, 198. Passive voice phrases, 199 ; how formed, 200 ; passives " actives in disguise," '201 ; conjugation is in first form, second conjugation, 202. Potential voice phrases, 203 ; potentials, from first conjugation verbs, 204 ; from second conjugation verbs, 205. Causative voice phrases, 206 ; note on causatives of kv.ru and sum, 207. V. THE ADJECTIVE, 208-225. Equivalents of adjectives are without number, gender or true com- parison, 208 ; verbal and adverbal equivalents of adjectives, 209. COMPARISON, how shown, 210-13; comparative degree, 211-12; superlative, 213. xn TABLE OF CONTENTS. INFLECTION, mood and tense, positive and negative, 214-19 ; simple adjective, how formed, 215 ; note on terminal ki, 216 ; adverbial form, 217 ; note on terminal ku, 218 ; table of inflection for adjectives, 219. ADJECTIVAL, WOEDS AND PHRASES, 220-25 ; nouns with no and na, 221 ; nouns followed by rashii, 222 ; verbal forms as adjectives, 223 ; phrase adjectives, 224 ; desideraftve verbal form, 225. VI. THE ADVEKB, 226-235. EQUIVALENTS OF ADVEEBS, chiefly adjectives, verbs, nouns in com- bination with particles, 226 ; true adverbs are few, 227 ; adjectival form in ku, 228 ; nouns with ni, 229 ; some reduplicated words with to become adverbial, 230; gertmdial adverbs, 231 ; onomatopes, 232. KESPONSIVES, 233. VII. THE PARTICLES (TENTWOHA), 234-280. Teniwoha, why so called and their uses, 234; particles, generally suffixes, equivalents of prepositions, therefore called postpositions, 235 ; groups of particles, four, CASE SIGNS, POSTPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS, 236. 1. CASE SIGNS, 237-248 Case signs, what, 237 ; ' 7:0 Hatsu-Ke, or the " First Note of the Law," with an English paraphrase, line for line, of the hymn on op- posite pages, pp. 524-531. TABLE OF CONTENTS. XT NOTES ON THE CONVERSATIONS, (pp. 532-560). First Conversation, pp. 532-545; Second, pp. 545-549; Third, pp. i4)-555; Fourth, pp. 555-557; Fifth, pp. 557-559; Notes on 2iori w> lfatsu-ne, pp. 559-560. GENERAL INDEX, pp. 561-567. ERRATA, pp. 568-569. AN INTRODUCTORY COURSE IN JAPANESE. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. Ecery existing form of human speech is a body of arbitrary and conven- tional signs for thought, handed down by tradition from one generation to another, no individual in any generation receiving or transmitting the whole body, but the sum of the separate givings and takings being effective to keep it in existence v:ithout essential loss. Yet the process of traditional transmis- sion always has been, is now, and 'mil ever continue to be, in all parts of the world, an imperfect one: no language remains or can remain, the same during a long period of time. Growth and change make the life of language, as Viey are everywhere else the inseparable accompaniment and sign of life. WILLIAM DWIGHT WHITNEY, AN INTRODUCTORY COURSE IN JAPANESE. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. This manual is named, " An Introductory Course in Japanese." The title really descriptive of the book would be, A Progressive Course in Reading, Writing and Speaking the Polite Dialect of Tokyo in Japan, con- ducted by means of the two Japanese Syllabaries, the Katakana and the Hiragana. I. The Tokyo Colloquial (is Source of the pros- pective Japanese Lfinyuaf/e. But the shorter title is, after all, not very far a misnomer. The signs of the times, as the present writer sees them, indicate the rise of colloquial Japanese to the dignity of being distinctively the language of Japan. The signs of the times also point to the polite form of the dialect of Tokyo, as the instrument of chief effect in shaping the development of the colloquial towards its culmina- tion as the literary, scientific, official as well as popular, language of the whole people. Indeed, the Tokyo dialect is already so much the standard of the Japanese spoken language, that, in using it, a speaker can be understood by ordinarily educated persons in any part of the empire ; a fact not true of the user of any other 2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. of the many dialects of the people. Besides, the Tokyo dialect is now the standard language for instruction in the thousands of the public schools, the medium for the debates in Parliament, the means of communication from the lecture platform and in the columns of the popular newspapers, magazines and books with which daily the printing press teems. Within one generation, that is since the Imperial Restoration of 1868, this greater revolution, this change in the expression of the Japanese intellectual life, has been begun and has been directed into the course it will in all probability take. II. Parallel between Tudor English and Jllefji Japanese* The Japanese language at the pres- ent time seems to be passing through a period very like that through which the English language passed in the Fifteenth Century, soon after the " Wars of the Roses " and the strengthening of the power of England's king by the establishment of the royal House of Tudor. In the fall of the Shogunate and the accompanying arousing of the people from their feudal lethargy ; in the breaking down of the barriers erected about the empire ; in the restoration of the Emperor to a real sovereignty ; and in the removal of the Imperial throne to Tokyo, a general national transformation was initiated. In the course of this change language has been radically affected. As, before the wars of Lancaster and York, among the numerous dialects of England, that of Kent and Surrey had a slight lead, and, over them all, Latin reigned as the language of the clergy and the learned, so, in Japan, before the Restoration, the dialect of Kyoto had a little precedence over the other dialects of the people, and the Chinese language controlled whatever GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 3 literature the priests and scholars put forth. The parallel see ins to have followed the further progress of events in both countries. By the victory of the Tudor House in England the power of the nobles decreased. The barons were deprived of their armed retainers. Com- merce began to be of great importance. The artisans' guilds were weakened. Trade and traders grew in popular esteem and increased in wealth. The Caxton printing press, the first in England, was then set up. Its publications were distributed throughout the king- dom, becoming thereby the main channels for Modern English, of which the Midland, or London, colloquial was the fountain-head. The full parallel has not yet been drawn, but, in large part, England's Fifteenth Cent- ury history has been repeated in Japan, in the present age of Meiji. Events look prophetic of a substantial re- petition in Japan of the remaining events of the English Renaissance. As Latin fell into disuse in England, ex- cept as a treasury of words for service in the maturing colloquial there, so has Chinese fallen in Japan. As the dialect of Kent gave way to that of London, so has the dialect of Kyoto yielded to the colloquial of Tokyo. The rest will probably come to pass in good time. The matured Tokyo colloquial seems destined to become the dominant force directing the language, literary, scien- tific, official and social, of Great Japan, in a not very distant future. in. Beginnings of the History of Writing in Japan. A glance at linguistic history in Japan, especially the history of written speech, will interest, and will probably be of some use to, the student of this manual. As far as is known, the Japanese 4 GENEKAL INTRODUCTION. people of prehistoric times were not a writing people. They used a language of course, but they had no means of communication with one another other than that of spoken speech. Certainly, there are no remains of written Japanese elating earlier than at some time late in the first seven Christian cen- turies. Tradition reports, that at about the opening of the Christian era, under the Emperor Sujin's reign, a regular intercourse between Japan and Korea began ; that, as Chinese literature had already become widely known in Korea, many Korean immigrants into Japan and Japanese travellers returning from Korea, brought with them a knowledge of Chinese writing. Japanese tradition affirms positively, that towards the close of the Third Century, the Emperor O jin's son was placed under the care of a Chinese tutor and was taught the Chinese Classics. About a hundred years afterwards, at the opening of the Fifth Century, it is claimed that national records were made by a body of historiographers, adepts in Chinese writing. As the Sixth Century opened, large numbers of scholars, men of science, teachers of literature, physicians and the like, came into Japan from Korea and took important posi- tions under the Government. So far as there was any literature in Japan then, they were its creators and guides. No attempt was made to express in writing the language of the country. IV. Effect of the Incoming of Buddhism ttpon Literature in Japan. It was at the middle of the Sixth Century that Buddhism gained a per- manent position in Japan. With its priests, came in full energy the varied influences of Chinese civilization. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 5 The life of the Japanese people rapidly changed under the working of the new forces. Chinese literature and the Buddhistic creed set in motion a radical national transformation. In art and in industry, the people were advanced to a position never before reached by them. Before long there were Imperial officers, appointed especially to care for education. Public schools were opened. At Kyoto, a university was organized. The topics of the course of education, however, were in the main those of China, taught in the language of China. Education did not have for its object much beyond the training of candidates for public office. Culture meant, cliiefly, knowledge of the Chinese Classics. But, through the extended education, a large number of the Japanese people became skilled writers of Chinese. V. Use of Chinese Ideographs in the Japanese Sentence. Then it was that a new movement in writ- ing was made, which, in time, became an influence of very great importance in the development of the Japan- ese language. In the Seventh and Eighth Centuries, numbers of writers attempted to express the meanings of Japanese words by the use of synonymous Chinese characters, arranged sometimes in the Chinese, some- times in the Japanese, order of speech. With Chinese ideographs so manipulated, the two great repositories of ancient Japanese historical tradition, the Kojiki, 712 A. D., and the Nihongi, 720 A. D., were composed. But, the task of giving Chinese equivalents for Japanese words was a labor of immense difficulty. So then, as the needs of literary expression rapidly became greater, Japanese writers gradually began to use the Chinese ideographs, without much reference to their Chinese 6 GENEKAL INTRODUCTION. meanings. They used them chiefly for their phonetic values. The Man-yosM, a collection of poems appearing about the middle of the Eighth Century, shows the way over which the transition that was made from the old Chinese writing to writing by means of what are now known as the Kana syllabaries, passed. In the Man-yb- shii the Chinese characters were written in full, but, in the main, their phonetic values for rendering the Japan- ese words were considered. VI. Origins of the Kana Syllabaries. But this device for expressing the Japanese language did not last long. The work of writing down the selected Chinese ideographs was too difficult for common use. Gradually, consequently, only the main strokes of the ideographs were copied. At length only simple rem- nants of the original Chinese characters were left, to be written as representatives of Japanese syllables. In this way, at last, the first Japanese syllabary came into being, the KataTcana, the remnants of forty-seven Chinese square characters, which had been chosen as the signs with which to represent Japanese sounds and words. The Katakana is said to have been perfected in 757 A. D., by a scholar and statesman of the Xara Era, Kibi no Makibi. The other syllabary, the Hiragana, is said to have been perfected by the marvellous priest Kobo Daishi, 834 A. D., soon after the opening of the new age for Japan which followed the transfer of the Imperial throne from Nara to Kyoto, in 794 A. D. The Hiragana consists of abbreviations of quite a large num- ber of cursive forms of Chinese characters. The Hiragana syllabics are not so simple to read and not so easy to write as the syllabics of the Katakana, but, as the cursive GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 7 Chinese ideographs had become the scholarly script of the Japanese in the Seventh and Eighth Centuries, the prestige of these ideographs was transmitted to the Ktma formed from them. That prestige has remained to the present day, making the Hirogana much more popular than the simpler Kaiakana, when Kana sylla- bles are needed in writing the Japanese language. VH. The Kana Classics of tlie Tenth and Eleventh Centuries. When the Tenth Century opened, the Japanese people thus had, at last, been pro- Tided in the two syllabaries with fairly adequate instru- ments for writing their own language. But, strangely, even then the homage yet paid to Chinese learning pre- vented the adoption of the syllabaries as the national means for literary expression. Many writers, like whom are some men even of the present day, ambitious to be esteemed scholars in eminence, continued to use Chinese ideographs and Chinese words. The Kana were accepted chief!}* by women, and were relegated by men to a second- ary place in literature. As it turned out, however, through the Tenth, and during the first part of the Elev- enth Centuries, while the Kyoto Court was becoming degenerate through luxury and effeminacy, a succession of female writers, writing with the Kana, appeared, whose works, for example, the Genji Monogatari of Murasaki Shikibu and the HJakura no Soshi of Sei Shonagon, were of such excellence that they are now valued as standards for the study of pure Japanese. These works embody the native language spoken by the refined and Court circles of the time in which they were written. -Especially is the Genji Monogatari a classic of the Japanese cultured colloquial used at the close of the Tenth Centurv. 8 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. VIII. Literary Degeneracy following the Political Revolution of the Twelfth Century. But the promise tlieii made for the Kana and for the spoken language of Japan did not reach fulfilment. A. great political revolution occured in the Twelfth Cen- tury, which, for hundreds of years afterwards, almost wholly put a stop to the development of literature; which, certainly, effectually checked the growth of any literature in the language and writing of the people. Japan became a battle field for great clans struggling for supremacy under the Emperor. With the military ascendency everywhere, letters, as a popular accomplish- ment, decayed. What literature came into being was created and directed almost exclusively by priests who were then, and for a long time afterwards, the only guardians of learning and letters in the empire. What- ever of general or popular interest had been aroused in letters during the preceding three centuries died away. The people were burdened with the overhard tasks of war. Literature remained in the care of the priests. But the studies of the priests were chiefly in Chinese. They added Chinese words and phrases, in large numbers, to the language as written. They neglected the colloqui- al of the country more and more. In fact, they made of Japanese literature, what has been styled an " almost unreadable chaos of mixed Chinese and Japanese." IX. Separation between the Colloquial and the Written Lanfjuaae. It was in this way, and during this period of civil wars, that the gulf, wliich in after centuries l&y, and down to the present day has lain, between the so called " Written Language " and the popular speech, or " Colloquial," was opened. This GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 9 separation between the two forms of expression grew wider as the centuries passed. The Colloquial, for literary use, became increasingly neglected and degrad- ed. The language as written, grew more and more an alien thing to the warriors and to the peasants who con- stituted an enormous majority of the population of the war-stricken empire. X. Literary Revival under tJie ToUuyawa Sfiof/iuuitc. Aye of Genroku. No change for the better for Japanese literature took place until towards the close of the Seventeenth Century. A hundred years previously the whole empire had lapsed into a state almost anarchic. Feudal Germany was not more completely disintegrated. But, with the close of the Sixteenth Century, arose the mighty Tokugawa Shogunate, under which political recovery speedily took place. Then, following the political prosperity under the fifth of the Tokugawa Shoguns, a period of literary revival and achievement was started, so vigorous and rich in its way that it is now called the golden age of Japanese literature, the age of Genroku, (1688-1703.) However, the Geuroku period would better be named, as it has been named, the "golden era of Chinese literature." That revival was not so much a revival of Japanese literature and the furtherance in literature of the popular language, as the study of the profound and admirable Chinese literature of the Confucian school of the Sung dynasty ; a dynasty which had fallen before the Mongol Kublai, in the Thirteenth Century. The great leyasu, the founder of the Tokugawa dynasty, had been a munificent patron of literature. He did much to save valuable ancient books from destruction during the 10 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. wars he waged. When the power of leyasu was fully established, many of the subdued daimyos became patrons of literature. " Clan" schools were established in many places. Learning was rapidly rehabilitated out- side the priest classes. The successors of leyasu in the Shogunate, followed the example set by their leader. A sort of university at Yedo (now Tokyo) received gradu- ates from the clan schools. Private schools also were organized for the education of the children of the artisan and peasant classes. History, the Chinese Clas- sics, poetry and the art of composition, were the topics of study in the higher schools. The Kana and some Chinese writing, reading and primary mathematics, occupied the children of the common classes. XI. The Mito School of Historians. The Gei'iroku Novelists. The two events of the Seven- teenth and Eighteenth Centuries, however, which most bore upon the course of affairs leading up to the present political and social condition of the Japanese people, and have mainly opened the way for the writing of such a book as this, were the achievements of the school of historians gathered under the patronage of the Prince of Mito, grandson of leyasu, and the complete amalgama- tion, at last, of Chinese words and Japanese linguistic forms into a standard literary language. The influence of the historical school of Mito, though a revival and popularization of the ancient records, of Japanese im- perialism, of the Shinto religion and of the old Japan- ese literature, was to prepare the way for the complete breaking up of the Shogunate in the present century. The further effect of the work of the writers coming for- ward in the literary revival, especially the novelists GENEBAL INTRODUCTION. 11 was to do away wholly with foreign forms of expression in literature, and to make a really representative, or standard, Japanese literary language. In the Four- teenth Century, Urabe Kenko, author of Tsure-zure-gusa, " Weeds of Idleness," had produced for literature, in the form first spoken of, a work which yet remains a classic of almost pure old Japanese. It was a work in which Chinese words were, in fact, set into Japanese forms of speech, without violence to the Japanese modes of ex- pression. At the close of the Eighteenth Century, the novelist Bakiii, chief among many writers whose works were widely read and exercised a powerful popular in- fluence, perfected this endeavor to make a wholly suc- cessful incorporation of Chinese words into the Japanese sentence. At about the same time the old Japanese Classics underwent a radical critical investigation and comment, under the study of such men as Kamo Mabu- chi, Motoori Nobunaga, Hida Harumitsu and others. These scholars did great service in helping onward the elaboration of what has long been known as the stand- ard Written Language of Japan. XII. The Standard Written Language. Thus it came about, that at the opening of the Modern Era in Japan there was in existence, recognized at last, a stand- ard Written Language. It was a language which in form was purely Japanese. The Chinese elements in it did not affect its idioms or construction. Its Chinese con- stituents had become, just what the Greek and Latin elements are in English, merely parts of the vocabulary. Its Chinese words were presented, it is true, in their Chinese forms, that is, as ideographs, but they were re- garded only as imported words ; they took position and 12 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. underwent inflection by the use of Japanese particles, like any Japanese words. They contributed only their -meanings to the Japanese sentence. There was still, at the opening of the present era, some literature for the Japanese people written in the Chinese language. Official documents, especially, were modelled after Chinese documents and were largely charged with Chinese idioms. But, this notwithstanding, Japanese literature at the opening of the present era, was almost as a whole embodied in a language distinguished by the dominance in it of Japanese forms over all the materials of which the sentences were composed. XTTT. Lanf/uaye during tJie Meiji Age. Tlie Written Language. But during the past thirty and more years, the whole language of the country has been undergoing notable changes. The Written Language, whose career we have just glanced at, has, so far, not been much changed except by enlargement of vocabulary. Many new Chinese terms have been added to it to meet some needs arising from the incoming civilization of the West ; many European words also have been incorporated into the written speech. The Chinese words have been appropriated in their Chinese forms ; the European words have been put into writing, as far as their sounds can be repro- duced, by means of the syllabaries, the KataTcana sylla- bles being as a rule used for this purpose. A farther important recent change in the Written Language has been a steady increase of the use of the Kana syllabics, placed alongside the Chinese ideographs, to give to the less educated readers either the proper pronunciation or the Japanese meanings of the ideographs. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 13 XIV. Influences operating to dignify Collo- quial Japanese. But the linguistic change of great- est moment in the new era of Japan is, as noted before, not so much one that is taking place in the Written Language, so named, as one operating on the language of common speech. The Written Language and the Colloquial, as we know, were separated centuries ago. The latter was excluded from service in honored litera- ture, and gradually lost its earlier grace and excel- lence. The former became more and more the luxury of the Court writers and of the learned classes. It gradually became refined almost wholly beyond the use or comprehension of any but a very small number of the people. The present era however is, above all else, the era of the whole people. It is a portion of the growing democracy of the new age which is advancing around the world. Feudal aristocracy is gone now in Japan, as in the West. A new era with new needs has come to the East as well as to Europe and America. The people have become the heirs of all that once was the privilege of only king and noble. Law making and its administration, science, art, commerce, general industry and the like, have been taken in charge by the people. Education and literature are conducted for every one now, not for the privileged few. These being the facts characteristic of the new age, a necessity has for years been increasingly felt in Japan for the simplification and the popularization of language embodied in written form. The Japanese language written in its present form is an aristocratic appurtenance. Existing side by side with the language spoken by a people but lately released from serfdom, and now inspired by the 14 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. free individualism of tlie present age, it is glaringly out of place, unless it may be so modified as to be adapted to the wants of the new times. XV. Probable Merging of the Written Lan- guage into the Colloquial. It is the judgment of the writer that this necessary modification has already been begun, and is to be carried far forward in a future not very distant. The Japanese Colloquial has already made its rising power felt in literary expression. For more than the decade past, all newspapers, whose object has been to gain circulation among the former lower millions of the empire, have been compelled to put their reading matter, in large measure, into Colloquial phras- ing; to print the Colloquial extensively in the Kana; and to interpret their appropriated Chinese ideographs by means of Ka.ni as side syllabics. With the use of move- able type and printing presses, many books in fiction, science, biography, travel, etc., have, for some time now, been printed in the Spoken Language. Moreover, the numerous varieties of the Hiragana syllabics, once over four hundred, have been reduced as metal type to com- paratively few standard characters. In the common schools of the country, now more than twenty five thousand in number, attended by more than three million children, also in the thousands of private schools as well as in the Middle and Higher Middle institutions, the students are studying numerous branch- es of modern science. These students are yearly becom- ing too much busied with their studies to pay proper attention to the forms and ideographs of the standard Written Language. Besides, they receive whatever in- struction they get in the cultivated, expanding Colloquial. GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 15 The commercial and industrial growth of the nation has associated with it many societies, in all which busi- ness discussions are carried on in the Colloquial. In many of these societies, reports of business and other papers are rendered in the language of common speech. The lecture platform is the place whence, daily, thou- sands of address to the people, in a refined Colloquial, are made. The number of the lecturers who change their addresses from the original colloquial into the writ- ten style before publication, is steadily decreasing. And of the highest importance is the fact, that the speeches and debates taking place in the Houses of Parliament, also reports of the proceedings of the courts of the country, now appear in print and are put upon record, practically as they were spoken. The Govern- ment's official notices, although still put forth in the Written Language, have in the country districts Kana translations laid along their margins. In yet other ways the fact is made clear, that the contemned and neglected Colloquial has, by the necessities of the times, become a decided force in Japanese literature. No insurmountable obstacle to a yet farther advance of the Colloquial to the dignity of being the language of Japan, seems to be in the way. Bather is it likely that democratic Japan will, as time goes by, put aside most that is distinctive of its medieval Written Language, along with other of its aristocratic, feudal legacies, and elaborate, for both literature and for oral intercourse, one language, the Tokyo Colloquial, refined, adorned and dignified with much that is worth saving from the discarded Written Speech of the past, and enriched with new verbal creations and appropriations from other 16 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. languages fit to express the growing needs of the new life of the people. XVI. The Kana as Basis for the Future Medium of Literary Expression. Further, a sim- plification of the writing of the language seems to be a necessary consequence of the development of the Modern Era. The great majority of the people, even now, have not time for a mastery of the large number of Chinese ideographs that have been incorporated into the Written Language along with the adopted Chinese words. Much less, will the great majority of the people have leisure sufficient for this work in the near future. Many Chinese ideographs will, of course, for a long time remain in all writing and print, but the present pro- spect is, that for the Japanese people, as such, the Kana will more and more become the main body of their language as written. Compared with a generation ago, the books, magazines, newspapers, pamphlets, etc., to- day printed wholly in the Kana, or in Kana mixed with Chinese ideographs having Kana side translations and transliterations, are enormously great in number and excellent in literary worth. Many educationists are beginning to recognize the fact that school pupils can not become proficient writers of a really serviceable list of Chinese ideographs and at the same time master the curriculum of studies necessary for them to gain more than an elementary acquaintance with the modern sciences and industries. One or the other effort must at length give way. It is hardly probable that the learning of ideographs will push aside the modern educational curriculum. Especially is this not probable, since a simple syllabary is at hand which GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 17 can easily be so modified as to express all that is necessary or desirable in the literature of modern science, art, industry, politics religion, and philo- sophy. To some persons, this opinion may seem far from predicting the course events will take, but those who are familiar with the facts, know that the domain of the Kana is daily widening, and that no insuperable difficul- ty lies in the way to making the Kana the instrument for embodying in writing the whole intellectual life of the people. Conservative impulse ; fancy for a greater show of learning ; the love of artistic grace which has long made the writing of Chinese ideographs one of the fine arts in Japan ; and the ability to write the ideo- graphs which scholars of mature years now possess, chiefly these are especially strong reasons for resistance to the prospective acceptance of the Kana as the instru- ment for writing Japanese. But even these reasons will scarcely be able to withstand long the necessities accompanying the maturing of modern civilization in the country. Economy of time for the student, and for the man of business ; economy of capital and labor in the printing office which now must carry thousands of fonts of type for unnecessary Chinese ideographs ; the demands of the lower classes for information and literary diversion which they can not gain from books offered to them made up of ideographs they can not understand ; these, and other reasons, will in all proba- bility secure as time goes on, a recognition of the ex- cellence of the Kan* i, will go a long way towards making the Kana at last the one vehicle for Japan's written and printed thought. 18 GENERAL INTRODUCTION. XVn. The Service this Manual may render to a Student of the Japanese Lan.yiuiye. This manual having been prepared as an exposition of the polite Tokyo dialect, by means of the two Japanese S}-llabaries, the Katakana and the Hiragana, may there- fore be properly named " An Introductory Course in Japanese." But, however much the writer may be at fault in his speculations upon the future of the Kana and the Collo- quial, just given, at least this is true of the book, the student who faithfully studies and masters what is here offered him, may feel confident that he can travel throughout Japan and make himself understood wher- ever he may go ; and that he can express his thoughts in writing so that his words can be read by every ordinarily educated man, woman, and child with whom he may communicate. Moreover, he will have opened up to him a growing realm of literature, consisting of newspapers, magazines and books ; a domain not dominant yet, to be sure, but large enough to occupy his researches for a long time, and valuable enough to inform him of the regular current of events in the country, and to acquaint him with the people's simpler poetry, fiction^ history, biography, and even with some of the deeper thought of the Japanese in matters of science, ethics and religion. XVIU. Special Suf/f/estions for tisutt/ this Manual, Let the student remember that this book offers "A Progress- ive Course' 1 of study. It is not to be passed over by " leaps and bounds" but by slowly taken steps. Each step should be GENERAL INTRODUCTION. 19 made carefully. Nothing connected tvith U should be ignored or neglected, if one would reach the desired goal. 1. Head the "Exercises " set forth, over and over again and aloud, according to the rules of pronunciation given with them. 2. Write the syllables in each " Exercise " until they become perfectly familiar to the eye, and are reproduced in imagination when pronounced. 3. Do not be impatient at not receiving English equi- valents for Japanese words, at the outset. Accept the " Exercises " as though they loere so many vocalizations for elocution, or five finger movements in piano study. 4. In the Second Section do not study only the Romaji renderings of the Hiragana syllables. The Romaji is given there only for the purpose of enabling the student to master the Hiragana. In the Third and most important Section of the Manual, no Romaji appears in the " Con- versations." Mastery of the Kana in both form's is a prerequisite for successful use of the Third Section. 5. Read all the " Exercises " after the manner of the Japanese. That is, read commencing at the right hand side of the page, following the columns downwards and continuing, column by column, toioards the left. 6. "Examples," "Illustrations," and "Illustrative Words" and "Phrases" of the Japanese syllables and words, all Japanese loriting incorporated into the English text of the book, is to be read after the manner of the reading of English, that is, from left to right, across the page. SECTION FIRST. THE SYLLABAKY: WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. It icas unfortunate for an inflected tongue like the Japanese to be obliged to resort to China for an alphabet ; and although a thoroughly practical and convenient set of characters, of syllabic value, easy to write and to read, ioas at one time devised, being made out of parts of Chinese ideographs, it is of very restricted use ; and the mode of writing generally employed for literary texts is the greatest existing obstacle to the acquirement of the language. WILLIAM DWIGHT WHITNEY. CHAPTER I. THE KATAKANA. I. The Katakana is tbe simplest arid most easil}' remem- bered group of the signs by which the Japanese express the sounds of their language. Although it is not so much in popular use as the other form of the syllabary, the moru elaborate and difficult Hiragana, it opens the way, better than the Hiragana, for students beginning a study of the unique orthography and pronunciation of Japanese speech. Japanese words, as written and as pronounced, like English written and spoken word, are in large measure though not in so large a measure as in English, diverg- ent. Once, in Japan as in England, writing was practi- cally a real representation of speech. That relation- ship, however, disappeared in both countries with the movement of each growing colloquial away from the conservative writing. He, therefore, who would study Japanese that he may know it, as the Japanese people know their language, should do just what a successful student of English must do, see and speak words as they are written and spoken at home. The Kana syllabary is the instrument used for showing ho\v Japanese is written, and how, through laws of syllabic combinations, it is sounded. Children in Japan are taught first the Kala- kana. Students from the West can not do better than take the same comparatively easy path into the Japanese language. Having learned, by means of the Katakana, the peculiarities of the word formations and of the mutual relations of the sounds of the language, the student will find his way onwards, with the Hiragana as chief means of help, made comparatively smooth and successful. THE KATAKANA SYLLABARY. u E K G S z T D (/O -H* V f v X -so 20 / ^ X te te N H X / no "7 * W ho B 7 M y/o B V re W 700 CHAPTER II. THE SEPARATE SYLLABLES. At the outset the student should familiarize himself with the syllabary characters sepai'ately, that is, as distinct wholes in form and in sound. In accordance with the sounds they represent, the syl- labics may be classified as, I. VOWEL SYLLABLES, and as, II. CONSONANT SYLLABLE?. I. VOWEL SYLLABLES. 7 A 1 U E O 2. These syllable are pronounced as pure vowels, hav- ing much the qualities of the vowels a, i, v, e, o, of the European "Continental" alphabets. In the English alphabet, approximate equivalents for their sounds may be rendered by the vowels a, i, u, e, o, as pronounced in the following words : f the Japanese syllabary is an independent whole. The consonant syllables, of course, contain vowel elements, but these elements are integral parts of the syllables. They are in no way derived from the five above named characters, whose sounds are those of pure vowels. EXERCISE FIRST. r ir ^ ir i V r r II. CONSONANT SYLLABLES. The combination of consonantal and vowel elements for the purpose of linguistic expression, tends to modify, more or less, both these vocal elements. In the Japanese language this tendency becomes noticeable for conso- nantal elements, in the formation of several of the conso- nant syllables. The changes which the vowel elements undergo, become audible chiefly as the effect of the interaction of the sounds of associated syllables. In WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 27 the present chapter, which is given to the study of the separate syllables, some of the changes affecting con- sonantal elements are noticed. The vowel elements of the syllables here illustrated, should be read for the present, as given above, that is, \vith the sounds of a, i, u, e, o, in the words part, pique, pull t prey and port. 1. K SERIES. KA KI KU KE KO 3. These syllables are pronounced by combining the consonantal element of the English letter k with the pure vowel sounds as just illustrated. 2. EXEKCISE SECOND. r >r 'r 'r JL, *7 ij ft ij >7 =* 'r 'r 'r * 'r ' ij 'r f r SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. 2. G SERIES. GA GI GU GE GO 4. The sound heard in the English g hard, spoken in such words as garb, gig, good, gate and go, is rendered in Japanese by the K series of syllables, written with the addition to the right of the syllables of the mark (^) called the nigori, or sign of impurity in sound. Examples : > V-^* T^ v /7 /7 * s rea( l ka ga yj ^J is read ka go tf ^T & go ?J~ 3 ke gi ku gi /f /j~ ku gn Jf ?? f ja fa r? >% ty > " 9 ^ a ga ke ^f ^T 1, >j 'J e y e ?7 ~~t* 9 ii f j- / / / -~^ if? 5. This rule is without exception when these syllables begin words. Also, in some parts of Japan, these syllables represent the hard g sound wherever placed. It should be noticed here, howevei', that in Central Japan, especially in Tokyo, when these syllables do not *tand at the beginnings of words, their consonantal element becomes like ng in the word singer. a. Thus * n* is read in Tokyo not ka-go but Jcang-o : observe, the reading is not kan-go b\itkang-o, or ka-ngo. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 25) Examples : j^7 -^ is read kimg-i, or ku-vgi. jj if kang-a, ka-nga. >j- ^f keng-i, ke-ngi. . '-o, gu-ngo. 6. The syllable ^ ga, when used as a particle, is usually pronounced as though it were written nga. Examples : #' ^ ^" ^7 >T ? ft is read ga-kti nga lu-ke-ta ka. >T^3: if d ? * A ke.-i-ki iiga go-kit ki-i ^ -r / . * * ^r 4 . * ^ ^ -f ku-ngi no Liki nga i-La-nga-slii-i. 3. S SERIES. x -t y SA SHI SU SE SO 6. These syllables, with one exception, are pronounced by combining the consonantal element of the English letter s sharp with the pure vowel sounds. 30 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. The Japanese of Central Japan are unable to combine the consonantal element of s with the vowel sound i. They can more easily, in this relation, sound the x/i of such a word as shield. They therefore read y shi, not si. For example : T y a shi, ^ y i shi, $ y u shi, jc y e shi, and # v o shi. EXERCISE THIRD. 2. 1. tf if 7 y -k 75 >f y -k iy 17 r y ^ >f y r?* WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 31 4. Z SERIES. -9* i> x -*? y ZA ji (DJI) zu (DZU) ZE zo 7. The S series of consonant sj'llables, by the addition of the nigori (^), is changed into a series representing Z sounds. Most of these syllables are pronounced by com- bining the consonantal element of the soft s in such words as rose, or that of the z in maze, with the vowels. 8. The syllable y , however represents practically the sound dji, and the syllable X has much of the sound dzu. These are the changes that the consonantal element of soft s receives in Japanese speech before the i and u vowel sounds. For example : jj -^p is read ka za, but jj \^ becomes kaji (dji), and jj ^ ka zu (dzu). a. The negative ending 7$, of a verbal form, is pro- nounced distinctly dzu not zu. Examples : ^7 jl j is read a ka dzu. 3 ?? ~~ ka ku sa dzu. SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. EXEKCISE FOURTH. 2. 1. y* y ^ y y v* 4^" >c """ jr. r r x 5. T SERIES. X & T -t 3 IX X * X TA CMU TSU TK TO 9. Most of these syllables are pronounced by combin- ing the consonantal element of the English letter I with the pure vowel sounds. The combined sounds ti and tu, however, do not exist in the Japanese language. The nearest approaches to them are made in the syllables *? , chi (fchi) and y , tsu. These sj'llables have therefore found place in the T series. WETTING AND PRONUNCIATION. EXERCISE FIFTH. 1. -f 7 i y v i> jf 2 ij T r ^r 1^ ^ r -k T 2. T % y f- ? 1- ? -f r r 'yf- y y r r y -y- ^ f- h C. 1> SKUIKS. DA DJI (jl) T)/l'(/.r) DE DO !0. INIost of these syllables are pronounced by a coni- biuation of the consonantal element of the English letter <\ \\ith the pure vowels. For di and du the Japanese organs of speech enunciate dji and ^/if. 34 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. EXEKCISE SIXTH. 1. -k if F F F F r ' F r 1v ** - T -k ^7 e- N< * ~T -k F r ?* 7. X SERIES. NA XI XU XE XO X II. These, syllables are pronounced by combining the consonantal element of the English letter n with the pure vowels. In this series the character -y ', used as a final n sound for syllables and words, properly has place, although its quality is often more like that of the ng sound of the word song, than that of the pure n in man. WHITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 35 12. This V n syllabic has another peculiarity, to which attention may be called here, namely, that of being pro- nounced m before the labials, or syllables of the B, M and P series. For example : & V A 9 is read kam mu ri, not kan mu ri, ** -S -TV is read nem bu tsu, not nen bit tsu ; and - 31 V h* i/ is read em pi t#u, not en pi tsu. EXERCISE SEVENTH. 2. 1. -)- if J x - 7- F ) SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. 8. H or SPIRANT SERIES. 7 IIA HI FU (FAVU) HE no 13. These syllables, with the exception of 7 , are pro- nounced approximately only by combining the con- sonantal element of the English letter h with the pure vowels. TJiese syllables, however, are spirant rather than aspirate in quality. The character 7 is pronounced by means of an impure, or labial, English f sound, in combination with the vowel u. The enunciation, gently breathed, of such a word as- fu'u, would most nearly express 7 , in English speech. EXERCISE EIGHTH. 2. 7 7 k. 1" T jfc 7 7 k, 1- * fc ^ 7 h* y T k ^ 7 li K ^ ^ 7 WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. t). B SERIES. BA III BU BE BO 14-. The H series, modified by the nigori (%>), stands for the combination of the consonantal element of the English letter 6 with the pure vowels. EXERCISE NINTH. 2. 1. 7 y >f >f c 7* t: y t: X 1 O. P SERIES. '/ 7' PA 1I 1M PE PO 15. A small circle (o) called the han nigori, placed at the right of the H series of syllables, represents, in Japanese SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. speech, a combination of the consonantal element of English letter/) with the pure vowels. the EXERCISE TENTH. 2. r # 7 h IS 7 '7 ; r x r ^ X X 1. 7 t - X X 7 li XXX ^s X X - O . o TJ\ y ii 11. M SERIES. MA MI Mr ME MO 16. The consonantal element of the English letter m combined with the pure vowels sounds best represents these svllables. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. EXERCISE ELEVENTH. 2. 1. X X ^ >^ r T y # -r X >y x v> ^ y x r r X 12. V .SE1SIES. TA YU YO 17. These syllables are pronounced by combining the consonantal element of the English letter y with the pure vowels. 18. NOTE. It will be observed that a syllable for yi or ye does not appear. No special characters having these sounds exist in the Japanese language. The character /f i is often spoken as though it were yi, so also is the 10 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. character # ("-') ' which is given in the W series. The character i (w)e, given in the W series is also often spoken ye. It is almost a matter of indifference whether x is pronounced ye or e. EXERCISE TWELFTH. 2. 1. \ ~? ^ '^ S ~? ^. - a \ a ^ -~~t -<* t 1 "7 JZf" 1 ~J- - ' * V ~J- S X' X V \ ^ L - a s\ ff a *? \ -^ 7 a \7^r ~T J 3 ji 13. B SEKIES. !) HA III RU RE RO 19. These syllables can not be represented by means of English vocables, just as they are pronounced in Japanese speech. But, the consonantal element of the English letter WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 41 r combined with the pure vowel sounds most nearly repro- duces this series. Especially is it to be noticed, that the character, V ri is often spoken more as if it were a softly enunciated di i than a distinct ri. Moreover, no one of the R syllabics ever receives the sound of the European rolling r. The characters A" rii and P ro, like 9 ri, often seem to involve the consonantal element of d in pronunciation. EXERCISE THIRTEENTH. 2. 1. ^ i IX -y a 7 7 a v 7 \ ft j* } ) \s 9 y 17 I/ t ^ T7 \/ \S I? I/ r 5 u ^ X X SPECIAL NOTE: THE CONSONANTAL ELEMENT OF L. 20. In the Japanese language there is no equivalent for the English consonant Z. Recently, that is, since the Japanese people have come into intimate relations with 42 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. Occidental languages and literature, the need of some equivalent for the "Western I has been felt by some native linguists, especially that they may better represent foreign words in Japanese newspapers and books. It has there- fore been proposed by some scholars to introduce into the syllabary an L series, by a han-nigori marking of the R syllabics, as, LA LI LU LE LO Attention is called here to this proposition, that stu- dents of the language may understand the meaning of the II syllabics mgoried, should they happen to come across them iu their readins. 14. W SEKIES. 7 WA (w)i (w)u (W)E wo 21. These syllables are most nearly pronounced by a combination of the consonantal element of the English letter w and the pure vowels. 22. The "W syllables undergo important changes in combination with other syllables : a. At the beginning of a word ? ivo, invariably drops its 10 sound. 6. The pronunciation of # (w)i, varies as i, iri, and yi, according to association. c. The pronunciation of z (w)e, is almost indifferently e, ice, or ye. d. As n, particle ^ wo retains its 10 sound. e. The syllable 9 v, sometimes pronounced ivu, has been adapted by many Japanese, by the use of the nigori (^) V, to represent the sound of the English u. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 43 In the following exercise read the syllables as given above. Do not forget to drop the w sound from *' 100 when it begins a word. EXEBCISE FOURTEENTH. 2. x 7 if V ii 1. r 7 7 ' J7 7 F * 7 7 7 7 7 y >) CHAPTER III. THE SYLLABLES AS AFFECTED BY JUXTAPOSITION. 23. When the vocal elements of the Japanese language are brought together by the pronunciation of juxtaposed syllabics, many modifications of their original values become audible. Both consonantal and vowel sounds undergo changes, some of which are of radical importance to a learner of the language. These modifications are noted and illustrated at considerable length in the present chapter. Many of the " Examples, " and " Illustra- tive "Words" given, however, are but seldom, some of them never, met with in common speech. The}' are put forward here, not that place need ever be found for them in the student's vocabulary, but simply that they may furnish the student with ample exercise in learning the phonetic changes which take place through the various associations of the Japanese vocal elements. These changes should be carefully studied. I. VARIATIONS OF VOWEL SOUNDS. 24. The vowel syllables, better than the consonant sylla- bles, retain their full values under juxtaposition. These syl- lables seldom appear except at the beginnings of words ; con- sequently they are not often prevented from free utterance by antecedent consonants. They receive almost invariably the sounds already given, of a in_par<, of i in pique, of u in pull and of o in port. Their quantity in utterance may be long or short, but their true quality does not perceptibly change. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 45 25. This fact, however, does not hold good of the vowel elements which are incorporated in the consonant syllables. The consonant syllables occur under all kinds of relations in speech ; at the beginnings, in the middles, and at the ends of words. Their vowel sounds are lengthened and shortened, rounded and flattened, long drawn and almost silenced, by the changing vocalization of their associated consonants. These changes very rarely, if ever, happen to the vowel syllables. Specifically : 26. a. The a element of ^ ka and of the rest of the consonant syllables containing a, is often so flattened that it sounds much like a in pa*t or in math. 27. b. The i element of ^ kl and of all the other consonant s} T llables containing i, often becomes hastened and shortened into the sound of i in pick. Under some circumstances this sound is so lightly touched that it is almost inaudible. 28. c. The u element of 's / and of all the conson- ant syllables containing u, frequently becomes so much shortened that it is much like the u in put. This sound, like that of i, is also often so lightly- enunciated that it is practically silenced. 29. d. The e element of >r ke and of all the conson- ant syllables containing e, is often so rounded and shorten- ed that it is much like the e of pen. 30. e. The o element of n ko and of all the conson- ant syllables containing o, is often so slowed and lengthen- ed that it is sounded much like the o in pore. 31. The interaction of the consonant syllables occa- sions, consequently, such modifications of their vowel elements in speech, that these elements are sounded, ac- cording to circumstances, much a*,- (i either in iwt or in past i pique pick 4G SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. u pull ,, put e prey pen o pore ., port. 32. These changes can not be well indicated by written examples. But, a good working direction for the student who may not have opportunity for intimate in- tercourse with the Japanese people, may be found in his remembering that, as a rule, these changes are the results of the positions naturally taken by the vocal organs in an ordinary enunciation of the various combinations which the Japanese language makes of the consonantal and pure vowel sounds. 33. a. The following words, however, can be regarded, as illustrations of the changes just referred to : 7* "V \/ contains both round and flat a, ajnas/ii ^- } ) z/ >, long and short i, kirin ? ~f ^ , kubun *T y IS ,, e, kegen j^\ ^ short and long o, bongo. 34. ft. The quickening or silencing of the i and u .sounds is exemplified in the pronunciation of such words as, \s ty s/it ta, which, with one of its meanings, is generally sounded like ... y ^ tew ki, which, with one of its meanings, is generally sounded like ... .and -? y matsit, which, with one of its meanings, is generally sounded like . . . > ^ u u=u. ~X -% ^is 6/i, -^ ^ js> is \y ', jc. jz. is e. This combination, however, very rarely occurs. 36. b. The pronunciation of unlike vowel syllables generally exhibits their separate sounds as true diphthongs, but with certain modifications, as here noted : 37. cf. 7 a tends to change a following ^ e into ye, and J! o into ico. 38. (3. 4 i tends to give an initial y sound to other vowels following. 39. y ty u and X o tend to give an initial w sound to other vowels following. Examples : 7 7 sounds much like ayeru awori iyattru J7 JC.J*" tlUKTM ^~ ^[ yV , >, ,, owiru $? ^\ ^7 iiwn/u. 40. (J. "When 7 a and > u are written together as 7 & au, they very seldom receive a diphthongal pronuncia- tion. They ordinarily coalesce into a double long, or slow, 6 sound. The same change takes place in the juxtaposi- tion jf i> ou. Their sound is also that of 6. Examples : r r 48 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. 7* ^ ] .............................. Oto ~T ^7 y" ? ^ P ................ ozokkoku ( 54 > okc.n omi/o(44> ona osetsu 4-1. . When jc. e and ty u are written, Jt ty e a, they are pronounced almost without exception as yd. In Aston's " Grammar of the Written Language," this peculiarity is explained thus ; " In Japanese etymology e is equal to i-f a. E u therefore equals i a u." As we have above noted, T ty a u are pronounced o. The ele- ments taw, therefore easily coalesce in speech into id or yd. Examples : ^c & ................................ yd JZ. ^ ^j~ .............................. yochi ^E. ? ^j~ J2. ^/ ...................... yochiyen ^ ty *J~ ty .......................... yocho ( 44 ) 7 ^ ....... . ................. yd/an (47 ) jf ? .......................... yogaku ^r 3 .......................... yojo ( so > ^ Jf .......................... yoraku *? \ .......................... doycbi WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 49 III. CHANGES IN JUXTAPOSED VOWEL AND CONSONANT SYLLABLES. /. Votvel preceding Consonant Syllables. When the vowel and the consonant syllables are written in juxtaposition, the vowels preceding the consonants, several peculiarities in pronunciation are produced. 4-2. . The consonant syllables most affected by this association are those of the H or Spirant series, - ha t. hi 7 fu> ^ he * ho. When these syllables follow the vowel syllables, or, indeed, what amounts to the same thing, when they follow the vowel sounds of any syllables, they lose, with but few exceptions, whatever spirant quality they have. - ha, then, is pronounced much like wa. The other syllables of the series, practically as pure vowels, i, u, e, o, combine with the preceding vowels into true diphthongs. The few exceptions to this rule need not be noticed here. Examples : 7 ^ a ha is pronounced awa 1 /^ i ha ,, iwa ^/ >>N u ha uwa 7 b ahi ai -*f fc i hi ii yC \^ o hi oi 7 7 Q-fu ,> au or o ^ ~? if it iu ~fr 7 f a >, a ou or " <4 -^\ i hi' ie 50 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. $? *\, M he ue ^ T$\ oll or <5- NOTE. It will be well to remember the following general rule. When the syllables of the H series do not com- mence a word, drop their spirant sound, read * ha as wa, and leave to the remaining syllables their pure vowel qualities. ILLUSTRATIVE WORDS : 7 S^ ll .............. awahi ................ attm'(45) 7 f T .................................. aicdbi 7 S^ -k" ................................... encase ^ S^ s\ .................................. iivaba ^ S^ \^ .............. iioa^i .... ............ iwai ^ /> _7 .............. itoq/'tt ............... iirau (4(5) -^ ^ N 7^\ .............. iivaho ............... iwao(4:t%) ^ ^\ t/ .................................. iwashi A ?\ ^ .............. iwau ................ iico .................................. uwabr. .................................. 5lCfl jit/ ............................... oicaaeru 7 .................................. ^ ~? ............................... y .................................. airfa ^ N V ............................... ai/ia 7 J7 ~fc /^ ......................... iiaicaseru WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 51 if l: iiau(4:G) ^7 ""X ~J~ -^T itenaki &c. 2. Consonant preceding Vowel Syllables. 4-3. a. The peculiarities of pronunciation arising from the juxtaposition of the vowel and consonant syllables, the consonants preceding the vowels, are practically the same as those arising from the juxtaposition of the vowel syllables only, as shown above, (4O). Examples : jj ^7 ka u is pronounced 6 and ^. 7 y ro u ro 'y ho u ho &c. $? "i u nyu ty ri u ryit, \7 "-^ '* }} !> kyu &c. WORDS : -V ^ . .... koyaku, V jr . . . .hobo ^* . .ooqo . .... somai .... robo . . . .tome b . yoka 52 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. / ^7 jj ^7 .............. ........... noko T ^7 3 ^7 ......................... moyo Among many other illustrations a few typical words are the folloAvin : nyabo. !> iK ^ ......................... n y ftb 1 J T > h ^ ......................... ryuto l ) ty JE. ^ ......................... ryuyei *) ^7 JJ ^7 ........................ ryuko } J ^7 ^ ^7 ......................... ryukyil ^ ty ^ ? ....................... kyi'tro (45) &c. 44. I. . The peculiarity noted before (41), namely, that of the pronunciation of Ji ty e u as yd, follows the vowel sound e when it appears in consonant syllables having the same associations as the vowel ;c e., e.g. j- -ty te u is pronounced as though written cho. That is, e u becomes yd and / before the sound i or yi, has its equivalent, as we have seen, in chi (9). From these changes comes eld yo, and that is transformed into cho. Thus, also, for like associa- tions of other syllables in e and u. Examples: 7* ^/ te u = chi yo = cho j** ty de u = ji yo = jo -^ ty se u shi yo sho ^ ty be u ' bi yo byd WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 53 ^T ^ Ice u = ki yo kyo V I/ 7 re u ri yo = ryo J ty me u = mi yo = myo "\ ty he u = hi yo hyd ^J- ty ne u = ni yo nyo >/ ty ge u = gi yo = gyo &C. ILLUSTRATIVE WORDS: 7~ & s < ^ .......................... chobo ^T ty "?" V .......................... c^oc/iin .=> 7 ^7" ^ .......................... nyiich o J* ty "7" y ................. ....... .joletsu J? ty s\ ty .................. . ....... shobo ^\ ^7 5? V .......................... byddan ir & jf 7 ............ kyogo (45) V ^7 v^ ............................. ryoshi ^ & 2? y 7 ..... ................. myokwa (56) 'N 5^ 'J ^ ......................... hyoryu ^" ^7 ff y .......................... nyoketsu J $r *& ?? ...... .................... shoju \x^ ^ ............................. ryori ^\ ty J(r ^ .......................... hydsei fr 7 ^\ 7 .......................... kyoho (45) Jfc ^ %jf ^ .......................... shodai. 4-5. e. As the syllables of the H series, "when not placed at the beginning of words, are practically vowels, the changes occurring in their pronunciation, when follow- 54 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. ing consonant syllables, should be studied. They undergo in this relation practically the same changes as those to which they are subjected when they follow the vowel syllables : Examples : 7> 7 ha fa hau Ad J^ -'X ha he hoe f3\ 7 ho fu ho u ho vfc 7^\ ho ho ho o ho .=- \^ ni hi nii } } 7 ri fu ryu ^ 7 nu fu nuu ty "X ta he tae J? \Z. ta hi lai ^ \^ su hi . : sui ^ _7 su f u - SMzt -9" ^ na ha . . .nawa 3 7 9f u you go ^ S ^ ki ha kiwa -=* J7 yufu yuu J~ ^ yu hi yui 3t ]^ ko hi koi ~)~ ~fc na ho nao ^ \^ wo hi o hi oi. ILLUSTRATIVE WORDS : ^S' baiau (46) WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 55. ^ ^Sf ............................ haerv S^ b 13 A ......................... haikomu ll ^ !) ........ ................... hiwari 7h 7^ 7~ ......................... hodate >^ 7 7 1? ....................... hofu 7^7 ........................... .fuho -^ \L -t* t? ......................... niimuro V 7 t? >^ ......................... ryuron y T^\ -7\ = Tfc Ji .......... ^ tl ^ ............................ nuime f? 'N yV ............................ taerv j? \^ 7 ............................ taira 7\ \Z -^ / .............. ........... auimono 7* ^ ty ............................ 81(0 v^ 7 -^f > 7 ............................... sow (46) -^f/ 1 * ^ ............................ khvami J3u \^ -^- 7 ......................... yuino ^ ^ "3 ^ ......................... oiyotfia dec. 46. a. When the syllable 7 fa terminates a verb, following syllables whose vowel element is a or <>, 7 fa loses its spirant quality only. The resulting sound is the diphthong au or ou. 5 ?^ 7 l ) h hafuri ~J- 7 ^ ityosu nefusu &c. 48. SPECIAL NOTE. To these examples may be added from the H series a few more illustrative words to show how e u is changed in pronunciation into yd or o. ILLUSTRATIVE WORDS : "^ 7 sefu = se u = shiyo = sho ^2 ^ 7 t? shofuku ~Jg ~? "^* y shdsatsu 7~ 7 *7~ 7 chocho ^ ^7 y jf \z. chotaugai. IV. CHANGES IN CONSONANT SYLLABLES. 49. The influence, in its general character, of the con- sonant syllables upon one another, may be easily learned from what has already been said of the vowel and con- sonant syllables in their mutual relations. There remains WEITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 57 for notice but little of an exceptional character. The chief exception lies in the fact, that often there is such a blend- ing of the sounds of two or more syllables, that the result- ant pronunciation is more or less unlike that of any of the constituent syllables when pronounced separately. This peculiarity has, to some extent, been already noticed in the blendings of vowel and consonantal sounds. Something of what has already been said may be repeated below. 50. 1. Coalescent Sounds. When the conson- ant syllables v shi, y ji, and ^ chi, precede the syl- lables -V ya, >> u, =x yu, 3 yo, or the diphthongal syl- lables -Y 7 yd, 3 i> yd and the like, the first and the last sounds only of the juxtaposed syllables are audible. Exam] Jet : \ shi ya is pronounced sha 3 shi yo sho -V * shi ya u = shi yd shd & shi u is pronounced shu ^-2 shi yu u = shi yu shu ^ ji ya is pronounced jo -Y r> ji ya u = ji yd jd 7 /*/ = ji yu = ju ^. ji y u is pronounced ju ju yu u ,, ju ji yo is pronounced jo ji ya u = ji yd jd chi ya is pronounced cha <-hi yo cho chi ya u = chi yd chd 58 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. ^" 3 ^7 chi yo u = chi yd cho ^* J. chi ye is pronounced cliie ILLUSTRATIVE WOKDS : v/ ^ -^ >^ .......................... sJiabon vx ^j? ............................. xhaku v' 3 ~7 V .......................... ahobun v^ -Y ^7 s\ ^ .................. -. sJwbai v^ -^ I - ^7 "V ...... .................... xhiiya vx v^ ]^ J .......................... shulome v^ ^7 ^ ............................. xhui -V j? ................. . ......... jaku ^ ^ 7 .......................... jaho -V )> ^ >^ ~T 5? .......................... juaku 7* v ^ )? ^ ......................... chadai 3 fK ...... ' ;t 6 3 ^ i WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. -f -Y t>- ^- Jy r> ................. .choclw ^ 3 !> ~T ^i ....... . .............. choai * JZ. / ? ..... - ................. - chiezuku. 51. 2. jRttyid, or Suppressed, Sounds. It often happens that sounds associated with syllables as written, are almost, and sometimes wholly, suppressed when the syllables are spoken. We have already referred to this peculiarity, but more special attention to it should be given. In the illustrations shown in this book of this change, the sign ^ is used ; e.g. u or . 52. a. The sound u, whether appearing in a vowel syllable or as part of u consonant syblable, should it happen to end a word, is usually so lightly spoken that it may be said to be suppressed, or practically silenced. Examples : 7* *) "V ^ a ri ma su arimasu. p -7* j? v ^ to (era renti taterareitu. 53. b. When the syllable y t*u, not at the beginning of a word, precedes a ch sound, the sound u disappears. Examples : [^ xf y -f" i tsu chi = itschi ilchi A y -^ ^ i tsu ie u = its ten = ilchiyo = itcho. 54. '-. When the syllables ^ kit, not at the beginning of a word, is followed by another syllable of the K series > -h h-a, % k), & ke or a Ico, it loses its vowel sound, the resulting sound being that of double /.. Examples : f ? J3 ty ( J& k' 1 - ko fjakko SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. " j? 3 bi ka ko bikko ~jj ?? ^ ka ka ki kakki 7 ?? p J ra ka kit, wa = rakkwa (56) 55. d. When the syllable y tsu, not at the beginning of a word, precedes the syllables of the K, S, T or P series, its sound is silenced, and the consonantal sound following is doubled. ILLUSTRATIVE WORDS: ma tsu sit gu te te( " c P ma tsft, ta kit hi tau ko mu tsumotsale bats akin atsfUa chitaato katsdte kakko massugu mattaku hikkomu. txumotte bakkin atla chilto kalte. NOTE. This peculiarity has given rise to the custom, with some writers, of using the y Isn as the phonetic sign of the doubling of a sound in a word. It is often, when used in this way, marked with a small circle, the han nigori so called ; e.g. jx. 56. e. Before 7 wa, the u sound of ^ ku, and of 'S ^tt *';a = rakkvia. 57. y. The sounds w and ?', as elements of the conson- ant syllables of the K, H, S and T series, tend to become silent in polysyllabic combinations. ILLUSTBATIVE WORDS : t? ~^* *) ............................ kasari t JJ J^ ............................ hikaru v^ jj v^ ............................ shlkashi ^ r? v^ ........................... sfikoshi ^ J? -Jr v^ ........................ sukunashi y ty jls ............................ Isukeru y ^T ^ ............................ tsukegi ^JT ^ i^-V ty ..................... chikusho ^^ I/ ^- ............................ nishiki jj j? -^ y ........................ kakubetsu Jj fr ^x ~7~ ........................ kaktishite J* j? ^ v'-^ ..................... atarasluki ^ 7 j^ ........................... .fiikumu 62 SECTION I. THE SYLLA.BARY. EXERCISE FIFTEENTH. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1 >f b ^y^^^r^^-r^^rrr ^t_ ^=- ' o o ""X *7* o . o ' - * jj Jr ^ ^ ^ y ^ ^ y v v ^ > o ^ , ,* P -y - -^ ,_i ^, ft c ^ ^ 7~ ^ ^7~ * /? ^ 7 ty -&$-&&***.?/ S\ O 0^0 * > o 7 ? ? *) o n o o o A' 1. ^4.s/ti/a miniai ni mairimasho. Amashi. Ayeru. 2. Axa-han mae undo suru. Obun. YqjL 3. Tokyo ga hiroi. Awabi. Koyaku. 4. So naxarimasu ka f Nyftbo. Chobo. 5. Achi ye yorimasho. Haeru. Morau. 6. Haori u-o kau. Ofiida. Chocho. 7. Watakiishi no kyodai. Shabon. Shutome. S. HUo ni haratla. Jtcho. CaJcko. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 63 EXERCISE FIFTEENTH. 16. 15. 14. 13. 12. 11. 10. 9. ^r J^ ^^^ S J | J *^ *^ S J X -X J ^3 0^ V, w, ^V. -nf ^/ 32 *T _-% ^* ^/ >\ "n^ V^ ^^ , o 32 ^X o , ^" ^f h 1* ^foyX^. ... ^J=. / "7^ V -* & ^ , A ft s P ' n T ' A 4 f y j* A y & ' ^ T ^o ^ ^ 1 M O v, O ^ ^r -r / ->* v y o _ 9. Honcho dori de aimasho. Shobai. Ouioo. 10. Ryori nin ni so itte kudasai. Sho*atsu. Kekko. 11. Moshl la kotoba ivo ossh alte dozo. Ornou. Nan. 12. Jfi ji ni cha ico ippai motte kite o kure. Kwaji. Hikkomu. 13. Kono cho no kinjo de yozaimasii, ka ? Givaikoku. Rakkioa. 14. Kyo ica yoi te.nki d<-nii. Haori. Fasuma. 15. Komban wa memboku ga nai. Mo yoroshii. hayo. 16. Kavjo cho ico hayaku doka. Shikata ga nai. Sayonara. 01 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. NOTE. There are other modifications of pronunciation peculiar to the Japanese language, but those which have been exhibited so far, are most worth the attention of student in beginning his study. Should one faithfully apply the rules here given, he can be confident, that, although he may never read or speak Japanese like one native born, he will not make many serious failures in his attempts at enunciating Japanese words. CHAPTER IV. PUNCTUATION, GRAPHIC SIGNS, AND ACCENT. I. PUNCTUATION. 58. Properly speaking, Japanese writing is without PUNCTUATION MARKS, or equivalents of the periods, colons, semicolons, commas etc , which abound in the books and manuscripts of the West. Japanese writing does not even show separately the words which compose it. It is prac- tically a continuous succession of syllabic characters, which the intelligence of the reader, it is supposed, will enable him to group into the words and phrases intended to be understood. Sentences, however, or completed expressions of thought, and certain rhythmical phrases in sentences, are indicated in most manuscripts and printing by a few well understood marks. Recently, under the stress of " modern " needs, attempts at systematic punctuation have appeared in many periodical publications. But, as yet it may be said, that with the few exceptions spoken of, there is no general agreement among the Japanese as to the marks to be used, to designate, in writing, the divisions of their thought and its expression. 59. The marks commonly in use are these : open, and solid, circles o , and open, and solid, pendants \> >. These marks have different significations when placed in different positions. 60. A large open, or solid, circle is used to show a headline, or beginning of chapter or section ; Q or ^ 61. A small open, or closed, circle placed at the lower right hand corner of a word, serves as a period ; o or . <5R SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. 62. Small open, or closed, circles placed along the right o o side of a word, or sentence, indicate emphasis ; o or o o 63. A pendant \ may indicate either a full stop, or a comma-like pause, when placed at the lower right hand corner of a syllable or word. At the present time it generally does a comma's work. 64. Along the right side of a word, or succession of words, the pendants, open and closed, indicate a secondary \> > t> * emphasis ; , or . The emphasis intended by large sized o > type, or by circles, is of more importance than that of the pendants. The succession of degrees of emphasis is made by big type, or large writing, solid and open circles, solid and open pendants; e.g. (7),., , >, x. The best writers and o * ^> publishers, however, are not disposed now to favor the growing use of these marks. 65. An exclamation mark (!), has lately been added to the type fonts of the newspaper oifices. 66. Interrogation is embodied in a sentence by the use of the syllable * lea, or the mark ( ? ). II. GRAPHIC SIGNS. 67. In addition to the punctuation marks above de- scribed, which, as we have seen, serve also in a measure as GRAPHIC SIGNS, there are other marks now in use, which the learner of the Japanese language should be prepared to understand when he meets with them. 68. The line, single - , and doubled , is used WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. r,7 as a coupler of syllables into names of persons, and places. A single line placed at the right of the characters indicates the name of a person ; two lines designates the name of a place. Thus, P t* / y V ; or thus, y -ft n*. 69. A short line , is often used in print to show subsections and paragraphs subordinated to the main divi- sions, which are marked by the large open, or closed, circle ; Q or 9- 70. Chief subdivisions are sometimes headed by solid diamonds +, or pyramids A, according to the publisher's fancy. 71. Quotation is shown by the brackets f J. Sometimes two lines = before, and two lines = after, a phrase, mark quotation ; e.g. = . 72. Abbreviation is generally indicated by a line of small dots in the body of a sentence ; or by two long lines = between groups of characters. 73. Parenthesis is shown, as it is in "Western writing, by arcs ( ), or brackets [ ]. 74. Repetition of a syllable in a word is indicated by placing under the S3 r llable a closed pendant ; e.g. . When tico or three syllables are repeated the repetition sign is + usually a long obtuse angle, f ; <>.y. . NOTE. It might be well to notice also a few special marks, often appearing in writing and printing ; as ~] and ^7 = htro, J\ *} = muri, ft ^- tdki. Exceptions. When a short u or i is the vowel sound of the first syllable, or when a double long vowel sound appears in the second syllable, the accent falls on the second syllable. Examples : y ^ = tsuki, v' ^7 = shika, ^f }> ty *o/6, b t? ^ hir > A 7\ ty niusa, j? jj ty = toko. 77. 2. In words of three syllables, as a rule, the accent falls upon the second syllable. Exception. If the second syllable is short, as l or , the first syllable receives the accent, unless the last syllable has a double long vowel sound, when, of course, the primary accent goes to the last syllable, and a secondary accent to the first syllable. Examples : ~T ? \s ardshi, illustrates the general rule. Then ~T y p dtsiikii, shows an exception with short u j] ^ 7 kdshira, i & k 7 t( '- lra > " 78. 3. In words of more than three syllables the accent, as a rule, falls upon the syllable before the last, unless sent elsewhere by short, or double long, syllables, whose values must be respected. 70 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. Examples : ~T ^" jf 7 asagdra, so, also, 7* ~^* "V $? -^f asamaddki ; but 7* ~y* ^ & asdgita, and 7" >/V ^\ ^ & ty aruheito and ;fr ^ v' ^" kdkashite. 79. 4. In all words, let it be remembered, accent always goes to the double long, or slow, syllables. When two such long syllables are juxtaposed the}" are pronounc- ed with even tones, like a spondee in English verse. 80. 5. In some, not very many, words which are written exactly alike, there are differences of pronunciation which can not be illustrated in any way by rule. Each set of these words must be learned for itself, as, for example* the four /"* v" hashi, the half dozen jj v^ kashi, the several -h ,= kaki and the numerous ko and ko. These last difficulties, however, need not trouble a be- ginner in -the study of Japanese speech. The rules above given will be sufficient for all ordinary needs of the student. IV. MARKS FOR TRANSLITERATION. 81. In seeking to reproduce Japanese sounds in this book, by the use of English equivalents, it has not been WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 71 thought necessary to burden the text with many arbitrary signs. The pure sounds of the vowels such as a in part and pa*t i pique ,, pick u pull put e prey pen o pore port are all represented by the unmarked vowels a, i, a, e, o. Taking the sounds iu part jnque, pull, prey and port as basal sounds, the student will naturally modify them practically aright, as in pa*/, pick, put, pen and pore in pro- nouncing them in connection with the consonantal elements of Japanese words. a. The double long, or slow, sound of a vowel is indicat- ed by a letter having a short, straight line over it ; as, ft, o. b. The quick, short, or suppressed, sound of a vowel is indicated by a letter having a short breve over it ; as, l, . c. The sound of n like wj in singer, when marked, is shown by the letter n with a small dot over it as n. d. Accent, where marked, is shown by a letter having over it a short inclined line ; as, kd, me, mi. CHAPTER V. NUMERALS. 82. In the Japanese language the treatment of NOM- KEKS is a work of considerable length and complexity. But, every beginner in the study of the language should know enough of the numbers, to enable him to read them, should he meet with them in writing, and to recognize them should he hear them spoken. 83. The characters which show cardinal enumeration from one to ten, and which stand for one hundred, one thous- and and ten thousand, are the elements of the numerals. These should be learned by every student of the Japanese syllabary. 84-. From one to ten, in present Japanese speech, is re- presented by two groups of sounds. These sounds are applied to one series of characters. One of these groups of sounds is purely Japanese in its origin. The Japanese sounds for the numerals above ten are for the most part obsolete. They remain only in a few compound words, and in ancient literature. The other of these groups of sounds is of Chinese origin. This group furnishes the sounds for a great deal of enumeration from one to ten, and for almost all numbers from ten upwards. The elements of counting in Japanese speech are there- fore as follows : CHARACTERS. JAPANESE SOUNDS. CHINESE SOUNDS. VALUES. Hitotsu Tchi 1 .Futdteu . . .Ni. . ..2 WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 73 .......... Mttsu ............ San ............ 3 .......... Yotsu ............ Shi ............ 4 -J^ .......... Itsidsu ........... Go ............ 5 A^ .......... Mfdsu ............ Roku .......... 6 J--*" .......... Nandtsu .......... Shichi .......... 7 yl .......... Ydtsu ............ Hdchi ..... ____ 8 "Tf .......... Kokonotm ........ Ku ............ 9 -I- .......... To ............... Ju ........... 10 "5" ........................... HydkS, ....... 100 Sen ........ 1000 Man ...... 10,000 85. In counting between ten and one hundred, combina- tions from the Chinese group, such as ten one, ten two, ten three are used. Twenty is two ten, twenty-one is two ten one, thirty is three ten, etc. Examples : CHARACTERS. KAXA WHITING. PRONUNCIATION. VALUES. -J- "* ....... 1/7 -^ ......... juni ..... 12 ^^ ....... ^> 7 ^ ^/ ......... ju san ---- 13 -j- ...... ^ & ? ............ nijt, ..... 20 71 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. -=^ t^ ~7 ^\ ^f" -nijuichi. .21 ....... ^~ x v? 7 ......... sanju ____ 30 ...... v" v^ y ............. sfo' > ____ 40 ....... \3 5? v^7 ......... rokuju . . .60 -J- ....... ^"f* v^y ......... hdchiju . .80 . ............................................... f ^^5/ ........ issen .......... 1,000 ____ -fei/ .......... nisen .......... 2,000 . . . ^ ^--r^ ....... icTiimdn ....... 10,000 ____ S? 7 -v i/ ....... jYewmn ....... 100,000 ____ t -^ ^ -r X ____ hydkuman . . . 1,000,000 87. A year number is represented by a combination of the numerals, somewhat as in English. To illustrate, WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 75 . issen happyaku ku ju go = 1S95. Recently, just such combinations of numerals as are found in English have become quite frequent in Japanese. ^ = shlchijti ni 72 150 yi = sen hydku nijii hdchi = 1128 88. In connection with the numeral characters certain other characters are in constant use. A few of these should be learned by the student, even though his work should be confined to thea?a. Such, for example, are the characters for day, month and year : CHARACTERS. KANA WRITING. PRONUNCIATION. TRANSLATION. nichi = '' dav '' = gets u = tsfikl = nen Examples : -0 -i = " month " = " year." ichi nichi ichi nen. According to circumstances, the character for month is read by the use of either the Chinese, or the Japanese, group of numeral sounds. 76 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. Example, : EJ = either ichi getsu or Ititotsuki. 89. The Japanese group of sounds, when used for purposes of enumeration, is abbreviated throughout, as follows : CHARACTERS. NUMEBALS. ABBREVIATIONS. - ~ \L ]* y = ll h 1M or ll M ~^ 7 P ? =7$ /< or 7 ... ,/u .mi 3 ? = ............. 3 ....yo r^ ............. -V ..2/a / y = .......... 32 / ---- kono 90. The student will find, as he progresses with his reading of Japanese, that the Japanese numeral sounds are used chiefly in combination with Japanese words, and that Chinese numeral sounds beloio ten are, as a rule, used with Chinese words. Above ten, Chinese numeral sounds, with a very few exceptions, are used for the expression of all numeral combinations. CHAPTER VI. THE HIRAGANA. 91. The Hiragana form of the syllabary is the popular medium in use for the representation of Japanese speech. Its chief excellence, and probably a reason to be added to the main reason given in the General Introduction for the preference over the Katakana shown it by the people, lies in its easy adaptability for the purposes of writing. The characters composing the Hiragana are easily joined to one another. In former times each syllabic of the syllabary was rendered in the Hiragana by a large number of differing characters. At the present time most of these characters have become obsolete. They remain enshrined in ancient literature, and are honored to-day chiefly in ornameutal script. The tendency at present is steadily towards reducing the variety yet remaining, to the simplicity of the Katakana, in which there is but one sign for each syllable. In the Hiragana syllabary next given, those characters are reproduced which are becoming standard. They are learned by the children in the schools of the empire, and are, with but few exceptions, the characters now in use in the printing of the newspapers and the books which are prepared for the reading of the common people, and in the publications in which the Kana, as side letters, serve to interpret Chinese ideographs. The less used, and some of the obsolete, Hiragana characters will be given in another table of the syllabary printed at the beginning of the Third Section. 78 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. I. TRANSITION FROM KATAKANA TO HIRAGANA. For the purpose of preparing the student for a mastery of the Hiragana, we shall now transcribe from the KataJcana into the Hiragana, the Illustrative Proverbs which are to serve as texts to the reading and conversation composing the Third Section of this manual. Let the student be content for the present with learning only to read, and to pronounce correctly, the Japanese text of these proverbs. ILLUSTRATIVE PROVERBS IN KATAKANA. 2. \y y ~ -?tr7- ^e, !)~ ft ? 3, ^ j) / r -)- ft ?, -r^ ? ' r* i. ^yfy y x: ft , d&7 ^y 5. * -^ v r ? is a i ) , y ^ i ) ^ ft V 6- -\ ? / -^ ft* ? ^ ^\ 7- h V f " h 4 ^ j" ? / ^ i> s. f-y y^ty^^rv h ^- ^ 9. >) ft ^ ft ^ j* y ? ? ^ ^ x: 10. ^c ^ t* > ^ i -r ^ y ^ ^ 7 11. ^V -f ^ jx 3 y ^r 7 - )> ^ 12. ? ^7 > ^ f- ^e ^ WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 79 13. 7 -f ^ b ^r -if >f A> b / ^ f I* ^^o 14. # is 7 ft ? is y- ? ? ft ? ^ X % 15. 3 > #* i^ ^ h > ^ ^^V o 16. ^ -T I /T ^ -f* V X k ^7 ^ ^- i^ o 17. V ^f ^ ^* V X ix ^ ix >f > ^^o 18. > T ^ ^ ^ ^r / f * Jf M. y s ? -r-fo * h -? ^^ ^ 20. 21. ^ 4 ^ ? ? ^ f- Jf I 22. ? y ? y ^ ? ~ ft ^ 23. A ^ ^ h T^> V X, t ^ 32 A Q 24. ^ U / ^ ^ -)r 26. 80 SECTION I. THE SYLLABAEY. 27. #~ / ^f7'? 28. ^ f- ^ > ,\ ? ?- 7 T/ 29. -V ^ ^t / ft ^ S % ^ $r 30- V #" y ^ X H - ^ ^ TX 31. ir f 7^7-,*?? ? ^ 32. yyv^ ? ^x^r r^ ^ ^^o 88. 3 } X ^* 7^ ^T V >N\ ^^^^0 34. ^ ^ / ^ f- *.-,*,-f ^^-^o 35. ^ / ^ ^ f # 'X ^ Q 36. Tv v' 3 r?\ 37. 38. 39. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 81 40. y ? ? -\ ^ _-- % ^ *T 41. J 3 } ) =2 \ u o 42. &x .rz. .=. v jx /> v > T jl ? 43. JE, X /> T 2 "\ 3 o / 3 f V C >N * V^ / 3* h VX 45. 7 47. ;* * # 4 / ^- ^7 ^7 y > ^ > v #' r ^ 48. >f f- ^ ^ jx ^ ^/ o II. THE HIKAGA.NA SYLLABARY. 92. Ordinarily the Hiragana syllabary has a different arrangement from that here given, but as a mnemonic aid it may be well to write it first in the same order as that of the Katakana syllabary already shown. 82 THE HIRAGANA SYLLABARY. A u E o jfc* K s z I - T D X CD / H B P M Y E WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 83 III. TRANSCRIPTION OF THE ILLUSTRATIVE PROVERBS. 93. As a further aid to memorizing the Hiragana, the student is advised to transcribe the Illustrative Proverbs above given, from the Katakana into the Hiragana, by a gradual substitution of the syllables of the latter for the syllables of the former. To this end, comparative group- ings of the Hiragana syllables are here shown. The syllables are given, arranged in ten groups. The syllables most resembling one another are written side by side. Their distinguishing marks may thus be more easily discovered among their confusing resemblances. The arrangement, especially among the later groupings, is somewhat arbitrary and unequal, but it may serve its purpose. The characters having the most familiar, and the simplest, lines are presented first NOTE. The numbers which precede the proverbs, as here given, refer to the proverbs as numbered in the Katakana series, appearing on page 78. The purpose of the first numbering of the proverbs will be seen later. The numbers which appear in the "Notes on Pronuncia- tion," which follow each group of the Hiragana syllables, refer to the paragraphs of the manual, bearing the same numbers. a. First Group: 36* < ^ < 1 KA KU HE TE TSU ILLUSTRATIVE PBOYEEBS : 14. j^Sx ^ ^>< vx-C ? 7 tf^< ^*T Kashira kakushitc, <> ico kakhsazu. 28. < f; - h ^ 2^7 v* Kuchi ni to v:a taterarenu. 54 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. 6. "\ P / jr if ? ts ^\ Heta no naga dangi. Te no ura ivo kaesa. Tsuno ico naosu tote, ushi 100 korosu. Notes on Pronunciation. 14. In the words kakushite and kakusazu, the sounds u and i are almost silent (57/.), excepting the sound of the final zu in kaku- sazu (8 a.). The particle ^- wo retains its w sound (22 d.). Kashira receives accent upon the first syllable, ( 7 7 Ex.) The accent of kaku- shite is thrown forward to the first syllable (78). 28. For the pronunciation of the word taterarenu see 7 5 and 52. 6. Naga (ft a.) Dangi is pronounced distinctly as two syllables, ji, the n being here the final tone for 9? (11). 35. The word pronounced kaesu is written kahesu. Its pronun- ciation is governed by the rule given in 42 . b. Second Group: L -t SHI mm i N 42. 1 ^3- ,51, -? }* S"* IS s\ 7 ^> ^_ V * A/ >S7m ni majiwdrebd akaku ~}~ j^ o none. Sumikaki no naka-kara meiken WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 85 Rika ni kdmmuri ivo tadasdzu. Ichi ivo kiite, ju wo shim. 48. V >f- Jl -^/O 4/0 /c/i jj, sen kin. Notes on Pronunciation. 42. For shi-yu coalesent as shii, see 5O. Majiwareba is pro- nounced with even tones, emphasizing slightly the distinguishing verbal termination ba. 47. Meiken, (77 Ex). Ga, see 5 b. 9. Kanmuri pronounced kammuri, see lii. 1. Ji/tt pronounced JM, see 5O. c. Third Group: KO TO HI O NI 33- ^ .< jfc,fc 3r v X L ^ Kotoba dh'rcba shina i~< + L, siikundshi. 1- E/O't: Z> U v*^ ^o / A L Tohde Id ni iru natsu no mushi. 44. A ^ / 3 7 ^ yv >^> V yV 4 JEft/o ?o ?/o wx> u'otuni wa mdruki x L / .* Lo ??o goto*hi. 27- Oni no nemlnttou. 86 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. Ningen icazuka goju nen. Notes on Pronunciation. 33. Kotobn, in having the three full vowel sounds o, o, a is pronounced with scarcely any perceptible accent. The word writ- ten ohokereba, is pronounced okere'ja according to rule 42. For sftku- naslti see 57 /. 27. Nembutzu for nenbutzu, see 12. 4. Gojifu = yojii see 5O. ^?. Fourth Group: SA KI CHI MO MU 37. ;V ik * 5h ? % o mo, ki kara otsuru. Kingen mimi ni sakdu. Chiri tsumotte yama to naru. 45. ^^< JA K ^ CA #> Moyekui ni tea, hi ga tsuki toreba, dori o?i Pronunciation. 8. Tsumoite for tsumotsute see 55. 45. Moyekui for moyekuhi see 42. See 4 2 also for fta > read as 23. Toreba for tohoreba, see 45. Dori for dattri see 43, and 4O. Hikkomufor hitznkomu, see 55. too. WHITING AND PKONUNCIATION. 87 e. Filth Group:- " U SO RA HO 24. V , . Uri no fane ni, ndsu.bi wa Sod>' utsfishi ni, mono u:o yarn. 22. tp< < y ^./ ^ eda ni kawdzu. 2- ^^ U -^"C ^ *) U =3> mo, ri ni katsu. Ridrdn yori mo, ayaushi. Notes on Pronunciation. 24. Haeru for Jiaheru see 4-5. 22. Rakkica for rakukwca, see 54 for the doubling of the fc ; see 56 for the elision of the sound from the second ku. 11. Ayaushi is an example of an exception under the rule referred to in 415. In this word the svllabics -y V remain separate in sound. t ft ft YO MA KE HA HO gra shfUome ni naru. 30. t^^-^^ J; R ppv Magardnebd, yo ni tatarezu. SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. tf ?ro fuite, kizu ivo molomu. . o nozokit,. 5. Ktv r ^^ j; ^ Homdre ardn yori, nakdre. Notes on Pronunciation* 15. Shfitome written shiutome see 43, a. , Jia?ra ?ro a??. 39- 1^)^/0 ^V^> -C Yvdan, tai teki. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 89 * sordn yon kokoro ivo tore. Note on Pronunciation. 10. Nau instead of no, see 46. As verb ending in a w, rather a fu, the separate vowel sounds are retained. h. Eighth Group: sft NE RE YI 20. fc-f i ES fa^ Ht o>6 I- Nestnni torn neko ica, tsunw V'O sitgurebd, shitsurei to naru. Wazawdi mo sdin-di no hadn /o naru. Mo no naka no kairdzu, daikai 25. wo shirdzti. Emi no itchi ni, yaiba wo fvkwmu. 90 SECTION I. THE SYLLABARY. * Ninth Group: XA wo TA FU E(YE) lo*k * tit. ** 5^ Naki-zura ico hachi ya sasu. Okame, hachi moku. i- migdkazdrebd, hikdri nashi. 32. Furuki ico tdzunete, aJtardshlki % LSo tfo shiru. -E"6a ?z nikuki mono ni, aide JVbtes o Pronunciation. 12. Okame for tcofcame, see 22 a. 43. .4fae for atahe see 42, note. ^'. Tenth Group : MI YA SE Mime yori, kokoro. WRITING AND PRONUNCIATION. 91 29. ^ ^(7) fa* (7) Yasu mono kai no zeni Sendo oku shite fane 0^"S noboru. Notes on Pronunciation. 41. For pronunciation of such words as fcofcoro, see 7i>. 46. Sendo for sendou as written, see 4:3. Oku for ohoku see 42. For /ie pronounced ye, see 18, and 42. SECTION SECOND. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. It is still doubtful under what family of languages Japanese should be classed. There is no relationship between it and Aino, the speech of the haul/ aborigines rchom the Japanese conquerors have gradually pushed eastwards and northwards. In structure, though not to any appreciable extent in vocabulary, Japanese closely resembles Korean ; and both it and Korean may possibly be related to Mongol and to Manchu, and thei-efore claim to be included in the Altaic group. Be this as it may, Japanese is ichat is generally termed an agglutinative language, that is to say that it builds up its irords and grammatical forms by means of suffiy.es loosely soldered to the root or stem. BASIL HALL CHAMBEBLAIN. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. It is not proposed to attempt in this manual any thing like a complete presentation of the grammar of the Jap- anese language. But the progress of the student will be made much easier as he enters the next section, if, pre- viously, he shall have become familiar with some of the most prominent facts peculiar to the usages of speech among the Japanese. The student should at least know in general how the Japanese classify and dispose of their words ; how ordinarily they modify them and relate them to one another ; and how they combine them into common phrases and sentences. The Japanese language is quite different in structure and character from the languages of the West. Being the expression of the thinking of human beings it is, of course, essentially the same in its parts, composition and operation as all expression of human thought. It must name things, and tell somewhat about the things named ; in fact it must contain, in some form, practically all the " PARTS OF SPEECH " that are known in any language. But the Japanese language is, after all, a very different thing from any tongue known as Occidental. The Western student can not, consequently, make satisfactory progress in using its forms of expression, without first acquainting himself with its chief distinguishing characteristics, and without, also in a measure, investigating its peculiarities by the aid of acknowledged grammatical principles. In a primary way we shall now seek to do this work. CHAPTER I. CLASSES OF WORDS. 94-. 1. Like all human beings the Japanese have words which are names of things, events, and persons, and are also names of certain relations among things, events and persons. These words are not divided by the native grammarians, as Western peoples divide such words. They are however equivalent to what we know as nouns, pro- nouns, numerals, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjections. These words are nearly all uninnected. The Japanese separate them into two classes according to their importance, namely, as a. ^ NA, and b. * J (- TENIWOHA. a. NA are NAME-WORDS proper. b. The TEXIWOHA are the suffixed words, or PARTICLES, which in Japanese speech are equivalent to Western prepositions, conjunctions and, we may also say, interjections. They are also like the signs of case in declension. These particles further serve as terminal inflections for verbs and ad- jectives. 95. 2. Also, like other human beings the Japanese have words which express qualities of things ; and words also which tell of how things, events and persons exist, act, and endure. These words are equivalent to what we of the West know as adjectives and as verbs. The Japanese grammarians call them . fc KOTOBA, " words," or {^72 t? ^ . &3C HATARAKI-KOTOBA, i.e. " working words," so naming them not because they are in largest part the words of action, the vital force in speech ; but because CLASSES OF WORDS. 97 they are active words; words undergoing constant change. They are inflected in many ways to show time, mood and other states and changes of being and action. NOTE. Dr. J. J. Hoffmann, in the introduction to his " Japanese Grammar," says of the kotoba, it is " the word (vt'rbum) by eminence and is considered as the living ele- ment (Hataraki-koloba, working word) of the sentence." But Mr W. G. Aston in Chapter II. of his " Grammar of the Written Language " has this pertinent foot note. "In the Ilf> Tyv^fr*:* Kotola no Chikamichi, na are called (> ~ 2 It) i-kotoba, or words which remain at rest as opposed to(lt7:?>d lift) ]iataraki-kotoba, or words of action, the term which in that treatise has been applied to the kotoba of older writers. By ' rest ' and ' action ' are here meant ' want of inflection ' and ' inflection,' and hcdaraki, ' working' or ' action/ has no reference to the usual meaning of verbs as expressing action." In the Japanese language therefore there are properly but two classes of words : 1. Uninflected words, includ- ing NA and TENIWOHA; and 2. Inflected words i.e. the work- ing words, HATARAKI-KOTOBA. Any distinctions which foreign students may make among Japanese words other than those here given, are not made in accordance with the Japanese way of dealing with language, but simply that they may meet their own convenience in study. CHAPTER II. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN SPEECH. The Japanese have ways, peculiar to themselves, of putting the NAMES and the WORKING-WORDS together. 96. 1. Mr. W. G. Aston in his " Grammar of the Japanese Spoken Language," thus describes the order of words in a sentence ; " The first place in a Japanese sentence is occupied by the nominative case, the next by the indirect object of the verb or by a noun followed by a postposition, the third by a direct object of the verb (accusative case), and the last by the verb or the adjective in the verbal form." Among the illustrative proverbs (91.) used for these lessons, Proverb 18 shows the order here described. ( ^> g> t> J3 Ano hito wa) . - 5 -2 L ^ sode-utsushi ni $ <& fe mono ico ^> yarn. Literally, (" Thai person as for," subject understood), " sleeve transferring in " or " by" in- direct object, " thing " followed by accusative sign wo, direct object, " gives," verb. Or, " He, by transferring through his sleeve, thing gives." More freely rendered the proverb means, " He gives a thiug secretly by passing it through his sleeve " i.e. the long sleeve of the Japanese dress. Exception : An exception to this order of words arises in making comparisons, when the object with which the comparison is made is usually put first. Proverb 41, is fc$ 1) . S. % " Jlime yori, kokoro." Literally, " Face than, heart." Freely rendered, "The heart is better than the face," i.e. , " Goodness of heart is to be preferred to beauty of face." ARRANGEMENT OF SVORDS. 99 97. 2. The fundamental law governing the combina- tions and relations of Japanese speech is that the words, clauses &c. qualified, follow the words, clauses &c. which qualify them. Prof. B. H. Chamberlain in his " Hand- book of Colloquial Japanese," thus summarizes this rule : " The adjective or genitive precedes the noun which it defines, the adverb precedes the verb, and explanatory or dependent clauses precede the principal clause. The object likewise precedes the verb. The predicative verb or adjective of each clause is placed at the end of that clause, the predicative verb or adjective of the main clause rounding off the entire sentence." Example : In Proverb 21, # ^ t> % fctt> ** $f Naki zura ico, liachi (ja. sasv, " Weeping face ($\) bp.es sting" or, " Bees sting a weeping face," / nak't, "weeping," precedes ^ ty ztira ((sura), "face." In Proverb 24, 5 /) > 7^& fc # tCX iite Uri no fane ni, nasubi va hayenu, " Melon of $<>ed from, egg plan! ("];) does not grow ; " or, " An egg-plant does not grow from a melon's seed," the genitive 5 /) 7) ^''i- >"-> "melon's," precedes ~feifo. fane, "seed." In Proverb 42, UMt $ ttt^kf $>**< H Z> Sh& ii i majlvareba, akaka narn, " Ver mill ion with if you are in- timate, red becomes ; " or "If you handle vermillion you will become red." Here the adverbial adjective form, $>2p <( akakn, " i-ed," precedes the verb ^ ^ naru, "becomes." Then, in Proverb 34, fr <> *, t, ^ ^ ^kf fr & < If Enii no n.chi ni, yaiba im fukumu, " Smile, of interior in, xirord ("i%-,) conceals ; " or, " Conceals a sword, within a srnile," the explanatory and subordinate clause, Emi no uclii ni, "within a smile," precedes yaiba wofukumu, "con- ceals a sword." In Proverb 3, ft f> & #># ^ t? X/i- Z 3: < Hari 100 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. no ana Lara, ten wo nozokti, " Needle of hole from, heaven (*f^) peep at ; " or " To peep at the heavens through a needle's eye," the object " fa, ten, " heaven," precedes > 7f < nozoku, " to peep at." In Proverb 1, \^*t> % ^T t U Ichi *> kiile, ju wo shiru, "One (*) hearing, ten (^) knows;" or " Having heard one thing, he knows ten," the predicative vei'bs l/^X kiite, and \^ shiru, end the clause, and the sentence. 98. 3. a. It is customary in Japanese speech, when two or more nouns are coordinated in a sentence, for the last noun of the series to take the particle belonging to each. Example : Here are linked together a series of rfouns, in which only the last receives the declension sign of the ac cusative: /c^L If* $>$> O^> t> ^ &^ 13^ t> % &'? < f) ^^J^^LTS #* Dare ga ame, tsuchi, hi, tsuki, mizu, kaze, hi wo otsukuri, nasaremashita ka, " Who ("i^')* heaven, earth, sun, moon, u-ater, air, fire (ace. sign wo) august- author has become ? " Or, " Who has made heaven, earth, sun, moon, water, air and fii*e ?" b. It is the rule also when several verbs or adjectives succeed one another in a sentence, that the last verb or adjective only takes the inflection or particle belonging to each, and that the verbs or adjectives preceding take the gerund, or indefinite Main Stem form. Illustrative of b. is Proverb 8: t, /> C^-^X^^ ~lZ) Chiri ttiiunotte, yama to naru, " Dti*t heaping, moun- tain becomes ;" or, " Dust heaped up becomes a mountain." 99. 4 In Japanese speech quotation is usually made without any change in the form of the words quoted (71). The added particle (to), " that," with some verb mean- ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 101 ing "said," points out the quotation. A quoted sentence thus is repeated as orignally spoken and is closed by the words. " that he said." Example : ^ 5rt>^* t U72 Myonichi mairu, io iimathila. "'To-morrow I come/ that he said"; or, "He said, ' I Avill come to-morrow.' " 100. 5. Interrogation is indicated by the particle #i lea ? at the end of a clause or sentence. (66.) Example : $ L"^2 %* Kima^hita lea. "Has he come? " ^ ^ \s1Z Kimaxhita. " He has come." . 101. 6. Expressions concerning time ordinarily precede expressions concerning place. Examples : U*'&tJfc>&iP*{j& : 3 tiC \r> < Icln ji kara, gal-ko ni iku. "From one o'clock I go to school;" or, "I go to school at one o'clock." 102. 7. Final verbs and adjectives are often omitted and understood in many colloquial phrases. The mean- ing is clear without them. For example : It is not necessary to say ^^-i^^ Cr 3^ $ "3" liaijo gozaimasii, in friendly morning greeting; ^^^^ liayo, is sufficient. The verb < f \f\ ^ ^" gozaimasft,, though used among comparative strangers for the sake of formal politeness, is generally dropped among in- timate friends. ~t> lr> Choito ! " A little ! " is a call to a friend, meaning ^l^ (.t,>-^>(^1?%5l/\) Choito (kocliira ye o ide nasai). "A little here to, honorably come, deign ; " or, " Please come here for a moment." Many other like forms of speech are in use. CHAPTER III. WESTERN GRAMMAR IN JAPANESE SPEECH, I. THE ARTICLE. 103. There is no ABTICLK among Japanese words. When a speaker of the Japanese language wishes to single out, or to make definite, any thing named, he does so by the use of pronouns, verbs, adjectives and various distinguishing phrases. So far as its ordinary construc- tion is concerned, the Japanese language is both indefinite and impersonal. For example : In English " the book," invariably points out a par- ticular book which has in some way been previously brought to one's attention. To reach the same end in Japanese one must say something like "book just named," " bought book," " book this man wrote," " that book servant just brought," and like periphrases. II. THE NOUN. In the Japanese language the NOUN, i.r. the name proper, is not inflected in any way to distinguish for it number, gender or case. In other words, the Japanese noun has no declension. 1. NUMBER. I04-. a. SINGULAR. If, however, it is necessary to specify only one thing of a kind, the numeral for " one," > ^> Ititntxtt, t> hit", or i/>t, iclii, is added to the noun either as prefix or suffix. THE NOUN. 103 For example : ^.^> hon-hitolsu, "one book" = "a book;" ^ ichi ji, "one syllable" = "a syllable"; t^ (- hito-hako, " one box " = " a box." 6. PLURAL. When more than one thing is referred to, the Japanese add such words as * $ domo, ^^ f J a ^ a > %> ra > \^^ *''> an d ~fZ.^> tachi to the noun. For example : % watakushi-domo = "we;" ^^7^ ^'^ f/a/a = "you;' fy kodomo ra = "children"; < -!ir 5 t, 5 liyakmlio vhu = "farmers"; ^> < Jt/^ yaknnin-tachi = "officers." Among these plural suf- fixes, -h^-ft. 9 a!a an( ^ ?2^> tochi are U8e( i ^r polite speech ; among the others t? ra is least courteous. c. Plurality is also shown in many instances by doubling the noun. For exampl 3 : fotL fc^t v ' are u ' are - "we"; \r>2> Ir^Z) i i = "all kinds"; < ^" /) <*"f~ /) kusitri-gusuri, = " medicines "; * C. % * . % tokoro-dokoro = "places"; < ^ ^^ /;/?- fir{{)ii " countries," and so on. 2. GENDER. 105. Difference in gender is indicated in a very few cases by the use of different words. For example : musume, "girl" (" daughter ";. Sometimes sex is distinguished by a prefix, o or n, as masculine ; fc?> ie or ^>/^ ?6, as feminine. "a;a//' L " ' '"''"' " a l>ull;" or " a hen." 104: SECTION IT. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. But these distinctions are exceptional. Japanese words, as a rule, ignore number or sex. Such qualifications must usually be inferred from the rest of the sentence. 3. CASE. 106. By the use of particles, as suffixes, equivalents for the case forms common to the "Western languages may be expressed. ILLUSTRATIVE WOED. *f> ^ Yama, " mountain." Nom. ^> ^ #* (or (3) Yama ga (or ica) = " a mountain." Gen. ^> * (> Yama no = " of a mountain." Dat. < ^ fl (or -^) Fama ni (or ye) = " to a mountain." Ace. *f ^ Yama ico = " a mountain." Voc. ^> ^ Fama yo ! = " O mountain ! '' Abl. ^ ^ 6 ( or 2^ >) ^ 7 Q ia yo?'i, (or Lara &c. ) = " from a mountain." &c. 4. CLASSES OF NOUNS. 107. As in all other languages, so in Japanese, nouns are of various kinds ; SIMPLE, DERIVATIVE and COMPOUND. 108. a. SIMPLE Nouxs. These are original, undecom- posable nouns, or, at least, names whose components are no longer separable without destroying the words : such as * te "hand"; to "door"; \r>&. in a. "dog"; ^>^ yama "mountain " ; <( Jt. Luni "country." 109. b. DERIVATIVE Nouxs. These nouns are formed iu Japanese by adding either prefixes or suffixes to nouns and to other words. There are for example : 110. a. Abstract Nouns. These nouns are derived chiefly from the stems of adjectives by adding to them the syllable 5. *a, which is equivalent to the English ' : uess." KINDS OF NOUNS. 105 For > atsiisa = "hotness," or "heat,"; ^2^ 3- takasa = "highness," or "height"; ^^ omosa, "heaviness," or " weight," and so on. 111. The word _ * koto "fact," added to true adjectives forms also equivalents of abstract nouns, as: \^^\[^ . shiroi koto " white fact,'' or " whiteness ; " ..#:> \r> . ftikai koto " deep fact," or " depth," and the like. 112. The same word . koto, added to sme verbal forms, also produces equivalents of abstract nouns: as . $ (L shiranai koto = "know not fact," or " ignorance." 113. ft. Concrete Nouns. By the addition of the word $ mono " thing," to adjectives and certain verbal forms equivalents of concrete nouns are produced. For example: J> fc $ CD ao mono made up from " green," and " thing," = " vegetables ; " ^ ^ \r> $ g) vmai mono from " delicious," and ' thing," ^ " delicacy ;" iQ t> ^ '"&' mono from " sew," and " thing," = " embroidery," or "needlework," (/>^1, ^0 in- mono, from "put into," and " thing,'' = " receptacle." 114. y. Diminutive Nouns. These nouns are formed by prefixing _ ko " little," to nouns, as : ^ V^iQ kn inn "little dog," or "puppy ;" ^ ^ ^ ko yama "little mountain," or " hill," and so on. 115. d. A tif/n tentative Noun*. The prefix ^.JJ 6 = " great," forms with nouns a class of magnifying nouns, such as : ^{J *> $ o yama, "great mountain;" ^&(3: tbt?\^ aiwhi = "great storm," or "tempest;" 2? I J && o bu.m = " great boat," or " ship ; " ^> ( J <* t? ^ o gvrai = ' : a great eater," or " glutton." IOC SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. 116. Verbal Nouns. The Main Stems of verbs are often used as nouns. For example : ^ \^ % aoshim means "to speak evil," % \^ f) soshiri the Main Stern of soshini is used in Proverb 5, as equivalent to " evil speaking; " X.Tj'&Jg yorokobn means "to be happy," and j; 7^ _ (ft yorokobi = jy 5 %> &>&> Hwau = " to laugh," -fo C, \f\ irarai = " laughter;" >#* liikaru = "to shine," >> 6 /"^^ = "lustre," or " brightness." -^ fau.ki in Proverb 45, is the Main Stem oi *2 ( teuku "cleaves to," or "fastens on," used substantively in the sense of " the act of applying fire." 117. COMPOUND NOUNS. This class of nouns is numerous, and may be indefinitely enlarged. The compound nouns are for the most part composed as follows : 118. a. A noun with a preceding qualifying noun. For exam-pi. 1 : < ^" /> ^> kuxuriya, made up of " medicine," and " house," = " drug-store ; " #* < $ fa, (jakvmon, from "learning," and "gate," = " science; " #:> ^ <^ t^ Kama- kura from " sickle," and " ware-house," = name of a cele- brated city. 119. ft. A noun combined with an adjective preced- ing. For example : ifo <( ^ waritkiichi, made up of "bad," and " mouth," = " evil speaking ; " ^^^ & takayo" from " high," and " voice," (~C& koc) - " loud voice ; " ^> ^" ^ C5 yasu mono from " cheap," and " thing," = " cheap article;" #> \^ ]ft fa, mci Lrn from "famous" and "two- edged sword," = " famous sword." 120. Y- A noun combined with a verbal form preced- ing. Forexampl'* : ^ $ *^ ? nakizura, made up of "weep- ing," and " cheek," (^ C> Item) = " crying face ; " iQ f C'C ^ nusubilo, from "steal," and " person," = '' thief ; " $ fe < {> moyekui from " burn," and " stake," = " brand," or " charred stick." 121. S. A noun combined with a verbal form follow- KINDS OF NOUNS. 107 ing. For example: ~$~ fc 2p sumi kaki, made up from " charcoal,'' and " to scrape," = " fire-scraper ; " [> ' % L hifogoroshi, from " person," and "killing," = murder or murderer ; / ^ ^ J^ /?O/SM wio&tf from " summer," and "lose in contest," = "summer-languor." 122. f. Two verbal forms combined are often used substantively. For example : fa^ % ^ &ac/u HIO&P, made up of "win," and "lose," = " the question of victory or defeat ; ' fy *% ft*^> liikika,", from " draw," and " return," = "exchange "; ya 7!;^ nukigaki, from "draw out," and " write down," = " an epitome," or " abstract." SPECIAL NOTE. a. In compound nouns the consonantal element of the first syllabic of the second word of the compound, as a rule, receives the $! f) nigori (4), and is correspondingly changed in pronunciation. For exam-pb- : ~fe%* r taJca-gw has e ^ gw for _ & koe ; ~? ^ ^ naki-zura has ^J ty zara for ^? ty teura ; iQ^X nusu-bito has tf)? bito for t> ^ hitn : O^^-^U hito-goroshi has 2:' ^> L gcroshi for <1 ^> t, koroxhi : AQ 7&^ nuki-gaki has ft* ^ j/oH for x?^ fcfl/iv. Prof. B. H. Chamberlain thus formulates the law con- cerning thes-eAhauges; "The broad law governing the use of the |iiW nigori, is that the initial surd, (c//, .>7i, f, h, k, s, tx or t,) o\au independent word, especially of a noun, changes ia^to the corresponding sonant (.;', b, g, z or taka-hara, "bamboo-grove," a compound of tak>, and (- p, liara ; ^.^ feft #aka okr, "a.a/-"vat/' compouudeJ of ^ *ai<', and tf <>kr ; \, t? (^ diira Jia, 108 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. "white teeth," compounded of \^Z) shiro, and 13 ha; ~{* *2 [^ 5 Icoza-deppd, " air-gun," compounded of 2p* and ^ *9 ^ 5 ^!R?'o ; 5 l"i ^ O utra-gutsu " overshoes," or " slippers," compounded of ^ N ite, and <( ^> kutsu. ILL THE PRONOUN. The SUBSTITUTES FOE NOUNS used by the Japanese are nouns which', by long service, have become purely pro- nominal. They are gathered into several groups expres- sing the different degrees of politeness or respect peculiar to Japanese speech. 123. 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. SINGULAR. First Person. I. fcT^ < L ^atakushi (polite) ; icaJUbtln (familiar, and used by women). lit ^ bokn (used by students and soldiers). X ^ "^ Innae (humble); fc%\, ore (rude). Second Person. You. foTlJZ anata (polite); ^ -N ^.^ omae MII (familiar). ^ ^ kiwi (used by students &c.). ^ ^ ->. omae (used b} r superiors); ^ 5- $ kixaiua (rude). Third Person. He. fa c?) ^ fcfe ano o luia (polite) ; ^) CD t> ao /'/o (familiar). She. ano o /-a/a (polite); J> Jf A/ ^ flo onna (familiar). ^>^t a/v (rude, for " he " or " she "). It. -L we. THE PRONOUN. 109 PLURAL. Plurals for these pronouns are formed as for nouns, by adding <* $ domo, jj'Z'fe 3^ a , > r &, L5 tS ''' 76 an ^ T?> taclii. There are other substitutes for personal pronouns, but the names just given will serve for the present. It is to be noted especially that Japanese speakers make but very little use of personal pronouns. 1 24-. 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. The particle no added to the personal pronoun forms makes them possessive : %)~n. < L walakuslii no, " my," or "mine ; " $>~f&*fc <7) anala no, " your," or " yours ; '' fc>^ < \^ * $ > icatakuslii domo no, " our," or " ours." 125. 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. The chief words for pointing out, directing attention, are the pronominal nouns : 126. a. _ jft, kore, " this one," when the object is near, or possessed by, the speaker ; ^t sore, " that one," when the object is near, or iu possession of the person spoken to, and >jfl are, "that one," when the object is far away, or not in possession of the person spoken to. Also : 127. b. kono " this," - sono " that," and fo <> ano " that," are words used as pronominal adjectives. They are used in the same relations respectively, as, Jl^L kore, % ft sore and > ^L are. 128. c. Besides these words, there are such derivatives as, 2l/x>X kww, "this kind of," ^/v^ xonna, "that kind of," and foAsJl. anna > "that kind of," and their equi- valents #} *j ^ ^ Ad 't, '' this called," $ 5 lr> ^ S 'O ^w, " that called," and ^ \, l^ ^ ^ ^w, " that called." ILLUSTRATIVE PHBASES : 2l^t (i ^ < t? "trf %* Kore wa ikura desu ka? "As for this one, how much is it ? " 110 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. *C 5 ' V> 'SW ira c/5rfo 2/oi. "As for that one, (it is) just right." >^ 11 #/V -ef -'''6 i nandesu? " As for that, what is (it) ? " Kono miclii. " This road." Sono lial-0. "That box." > ^> < A'6 to wwfrH. This kind of a candle." (29. 4. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. The chief words used for inquiring, or asking questions, are the pronominal nouns y^L dare, " who," -*^L dore, " which," and 7 $c nani, " what." Among other words used in the same way the adjective #-fc donata, " which side," (a polite sub- stitute for -g^t dore), is of especial importance. ILLUSTRATIVE PHRASES : *&*) \^^>i^ Dare ga so Ufa ? " Who said so ? " (familiar.) 1" Donata desu ? " Who is it ? " (polite. ) > t> &A/ V* S. %* Dorega ichiban iifca ? " Which is the best ? " (familiar.) X $1 2r ^ ^ "1? * ^ V^ ^ T %* Nani go yd de gozaimasii In ? " What honorable business is there ? " i.e. what can I do for you?" (polite.) 130. 5. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. In the Japanese language reference, or relation, to another noun, or pronoun, in a sentence is secured by using the verb of the relative clause as an adjective. There are no relative pronouns proper. ILLUSTRATIVE PHRASES : W-V?~fe. * % \ J 5 Nigeta dorobo. " The ran away robber," i.e. "the robber who ran away." %*%l,-fe j <2 Karcla matxu. " The withered pine," i.e. " the pine which withered. 5 ' lo iu hito. " Saichiro THE PRONOUN. Ill that called person," i.e. " the person Avho is named Saichiro." 131. G. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. There are certain words which, used pronominally to express distribution, number, quantity, comparison &c., may be called indefinite pro- nouns. These words are formed by adding ft* ka, ^ mo, -> ^ demo, and * zo to the interrogatives, as: dare ka, " somebody." i -jfl ft* dore ka, " some one thing." \ dore mo, " any one or " somebody. body." dare de mo, " any- *- ka>> " anything."' thing," or " nothing." *^L " $ dore de mo, " any- thing whatever." ?. tiC $ nanimo, " anything," or " nothing." mo, "ftnj'pj/^ $? nan zo, "anything.' thing whatever." Polite form for f%-\, dare, donata ka, " somebody." donata mo, " everybody." $ donata de mo, " anybody." ), and -fj;ii t nani mo, are, as a general rule, used with negative verbs, and are equivalent to the English words "nobodj'," and "nothing." IjLLrsTKATlYE PHRASES '. ?^t %> 5 \r*'O~tZ. Dare ka so itta. " Somebody said so." ?tf / L ^ \s'O~. IT* ^ ~tJ"A/ Dare mo slrilte imasen. "No- body knows it." fz.^ ^ ^ \s*2~. '-^ ^ *f" Dare de mo xhitle imasu. " Everybody knows it." 7J&.~f2. ^ V^^^ ^ ~& /{/ Donala mo McaremaaeR. " Xo- body can go." 112 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. "i? $ t/>2p^l Donatademoikareru. "Anybody can go." '^L XP l>-9 Ip^^Tctr* -^ore to hitotsu chodai. " Please give me one or the other." *fa- $ lr> H" ^ ^A' ^ Z>ore mo ikemasen ka. "Wont one of these suit you ? " "*^ ~ % t>^ 5 ? lr ^>' e ^ 5 7c lr ^ r "i ^ chodai. " Please give me something." ?. ft- ^ ^> b %~&A/ Nani moarintasen. " I have nothing at all." ^Ax "1? ^ %\^\r> Nan de mo yoroshii. "Anything whatever will do." IV. THE VERB. VERBS, or the words which assert, or declare, something about the things named by nouns, are peculiarly treated in the Japanese language. 1. CLASSES OF VERBS. 132. As in other languages, so in the Japanese language, the verbs, in accordance with their use, separate into two main classes, TEANSITIVE and INTRANSITIVE. That is, some verbs have objects which receive the action expressed by them, and others of the verbs express the action fully in them- selves. For example: *%$$'$" naosu "I mend," or " cure," is a transitive verb. On hearing it spoken one wishes to know what is mended, or who is cured. But ^ ( J naoru " I get well," describes in itself fully the action it expresses. ?. &J -5 naoru is an intransitive verb. 133. The transitive or intransitive character of Japanese THE VERB. 113 verbs, however, does not show itself in any peculiarity of structure. Many verbs having roots or stems in common, as transitive or as intransitive, have recipro- cally different terminations. For example, %*~~^-$- ka"xu "give back," or "return," is transitive, and %>~^Z lawn "return," is intransitive. But this peculiarity does not definitely distinguish these verbs as transitive, and as not transitive. There are verbs which have just the contrary formation and character, as, -feo tafsu "stand," which is intransitive, and ?2 T tateru " set up," which is transitive. But "> < yaku " burn," is transitive, and ^> \} yakeru " burn," is intransitive ; while > < ok it " be open," is intransitive, and J> ft akerti " open," is transitive. Only by famili- arity with its use can a student know whether a Japanese verb is transitive or not. 2. NUMBER AND PERSON. 134. Japanese verbs have no forms which show either number or person. For example, the word ^{J^~ naosu whose meaning is "mend," or "cure," remains the same in a sentence whether one intends to say " I, you, we, or they, mend," or " he, she, or it, mends ; " so also ^ {^ % makeru " lose," or " lower a price," stands for " I, you, we, or they, lower a price," or " he, she, or it, loses." This fact holds good for every verb. 135. a. Distinction of PERSON is generally understood through the use of pronouns. Especially by the use of humble or honorific verbs does a speaker make it known whether he is referring to himself, or to others. 6. Distinction of XUMBEB, when necessary, is made by the use of associated pronouns, numerals, and by other auxiliary words. 114 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. 3. TENSE. 136. Inflection of verbs for the purpose of specifying the TIME of the action, or the state, told of by the verbs, is almost wholly confined to forms which indicate present, or past time, and this time as either certain, or probable. In Japanese speech therefore there are properly onh r four tenses:/. The Certain Present : 2. The Probable Present; 3. The Certain Past, and 4. TJtc Pro- bable Past. a. Future time is expressed by words associated with the present tenses, and often by the Probable Present tense alone. 1. The verb, e.g., }tJt~ naosu, or ^ {^ .5 maker u, has thus really by inflection only four tenses, as follows : TENSE. y^tJtNAosu.jtf ft % MAKEKU. Certain Present. #&Jt~ naosu, mend, or mends. J W" -5 makeru, lose, or loses. Probable Present (or Future.) % 1 J 3- 5 naoso (naosa-u), probably mends, or will mend. $ tf ^ ^ makryo* probably loses, or will lose. Certain Past. #{JL72 naoshita, mended. $ Vj"fZ makda, lost. Probable Past. # ii L7 &> *> naodiitaro, probably mended. $ V}~fe. t? 5 makdaro, probably lost. 137. 2. There is a further time inflection of Japanese verbs, an indefinite tense form. It is named TJie Al- ternative, or Frequentative Form. It seldom is used without a companion word having the same inflec- PROCESS OF INFLECTION. tion. Its function is to show occasional action, or alter nation of action. E.g. : Alternative Form. ^ iJ 1x^2 h naosliitari, sometimes mends. %. tf^fc. b muketari, sometimes loses. 4. MODE. 138. Inflection for the purpose of showing the MODE or MANNER of the assertion made by the verbs consists of forms expressing simple declaration, contingency or doubt, and command. That is, there are (1) Indicative, (2) Subjunctive, and (3) Imperative Mode forms among Jap- anese verbs. The Subjunctive Mode consists practically of two forms, a. The Conditional, and b. The Concessive, according as the action of the verb shows dependence, or involves concession. TEXSE. 1. INDICATIVE MODE. Present. #Ht1~ nao * u > (I) mend. ^ Vt naosliilara, if (1) had mended. $ W" 72 > makdara, . if (he) had lost. 11G SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. TENSE. 2. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. b. CONCESSIVE. Present. 7\t*& naosedo, though (he) mend. $.$%!'* makcredo, though (1) lose. Past. # i 1 IxTW naoshita- redo, though Cl) have mended. $ tf"fefi' maketaredo, though (she) lost. 3. IMPERATIVE MODE. 71 J J-tt nwse, mend! $ V)r % maforo, lose! 5. ADJECTIVAL VERB FORMS. 139. There are some other forms of the verb whose uses- give them a larger than verbal character : they are closely allied with adjectives. These forms are generally classed under the names, a. Gerund, Participle, or Subor- dinative Form, and 6. Desiderative Form, or Desiderative Adjective. GERUND. mending, having mended. losing, having lost. DISIDEEA.TIVE FORM. wishes to mend. maketai, wishes to lose. 6. PROCESS OF INFLECTION. 140. The ultimate element of the verb, or its simplest form, is named THE ROOT. From the root all inflection pro- PKOCESS OF INFLECTION. 117 ceecls. In the Japanese verb the root is often hidden, or its immediate growth is difficult to trace. We need not attempt a study of this perplexing subject. 141. VERBAL INFLECTION, so far as the student of this manual need study it, may commence with certain de- veloped forms of the verb which can be accepted as PRIMARY STEMS, or BASES, to which all further inflections have been joined. These forms are four ; and they are at but a small remove from the root. They give practical starting places for verbal study. !42. Western grammarians have named these primary verbal variations, not in accordance with their full functions, but after some especially prominent service they perform in speech. They have been designated by dif- ferent writers, as :l. " The Koot," or " The Stem," or " The Indefinite Form " ; 2. " The Negative Base " ; 3. " The Indicative," or " The Certain Present," and 4. " The Conditional Base." In exhibiting the inflection of the verb, some of the writers who have named one of the variations " The Root," or " The Stem," have treated the three other variations as though they were derived from this " root," or " stem," by a series of terminal changes. It is not probable that these forms were in fact so derived. The several stems ap- parently have only a root in common. In this manual these four primary inflection forms shall therefore be figured under the name STEMS OP INFLECTION. 143. The STEMS OF INFLECTION shall be treated as though related to one another like so many different stems separat- ing from the same root. We do not propose, however, to make any essential change in the names which foreign grammarians, generally, have agreed to give to these four primary verbal variations. We shall adopt the names most commonly held, only modifying them so as to sustain the 118 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. metaphor stem here proposed, and substituting among them for the term "The Root," or "The Stern," or "The Indefinite Form," the term The Main Stem. The four primary Japanese verbal variations as studied in this manual appear, therefore, as the STEMS OF INFLEC- TION, named severally, 1. The Main Stem, 2. The Negative Stem. 3. The Certain Present Stem, and 5. TJie Conditional Stem. 144. 1. The Main Stem. This primary variation supports a larger number of verbal inflections than any of the others. It terminates with a syllabic in either i or E, as for example : \vith \^ shi in 7 ( J \^ naoshi of the verb mean- ing " mend;" with tf ke in # make of the verb meaning "lose;" and with ^jiin^^oji of the verb meaning " fear/' 14-5. a. By the addition of various words and particles, the Main Stem supports the positive past tenses in all modes, also the positive alternative form, the positive gerund, and the desiderative form of all verbs. Moreover, it supports all the inflections of the large number of verbs which are grouped together as the Second Conjugation, and also all modes and tenses of the polite forms of inflection. 14-6. b. In sentences where several verbs occur in different clauses, each, however, characterized by the same time and mode, all the verbs, except the last, take the Main Stem form, leaving for the final verb the function of giving time and mode to the action of the whole sen- tence by means of proper inflection. 147. c. The Main Stem also appears at times as a noun ; also, it forms compounds with other parts of speech. 148. 2. The Negative Stem. This stem stands next STEMS OF INFLECTION. 119 to the Main Stem in importance in the process of inflection. It terminates in a syllabic in A for all the verbs which are grouped together as the First Conjugation. In the Second Conjugation its terminal is either an E syllabic, or an i syllabic. For example : j JJ $ nao*a is the Negative Stem for the verb meaning "mend;" % }ft make, for the verb "lose;" and ^& Ty J' f r the verb "fear." 149. a. In the group of verbs making the First Conjugation, the Negative Stem supports nearly all negative inflections. It supports the probable present tense, and the passive, or potential, and causative inflections also. 150. b. In the Second Conjugation the Main Stem and the Negative Stem, as said before, are the same ; that is, the Negative Stem in the Second Conjugation is but a name given to the Main Stem, for the sake of convenience in exhibiting the verbal paradigms. 151. 3. T/ie Certain Present Stem. This stem does not take any extended part in the process of inflection. It supports only the negative probable present, -and the negative imperative inflections. It assists, also, in the formation of some quasi forms of inflection. Standing alone, it indicates the certain present tense. 152. a. In form, the Certain Present Stem terminates in ar. syllabic in r ; that is, in the First Conjugation its ter- minal is any one of the syllables in u, but in the Second Con- jugation its terminal is the syllabic RU suffixed to the Main Stem. For example : ^- su forming / { J ^~ naoxi' for the verb "mend; "and ru forming J ft maJcera and :fe>t ojiru. for the verbs " lose " and " fear, 5 ' produce the Certain Present Stems of these verbs. 9&F* 153. b. The Certain Present Stem hasbeen selcted as the name, by n:h icii each verb is known. 120 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. For example: the verb meaning "mend" is naosu. ; " lose "is % ]fr makeru ; " fear " is ^ % ojiru ; "hear" is -| < kiku ; "know" is \^Z shiru ; " wear " is & % kiru ; " grow " is (-j; (3 liaeru ; " see "is ,. mini ; " eat " is ~fe^< tabw ; " go out " is - dent, &c. S^ 154. <. By means of the Certain Present Stem in conned ion u-ith the Main Stem, the special groujnngs of Jap- anese verbs in Conjugation are determined. 155. 'I- The Certain Present Stem does duty in speech not only as a verb, but often as a noun, and also as an adjective. 156. 4. The Conditional Stem. This stem sdrves to support inflection in the two forms of the subjunctive mode, i.e. the present conditional and the present con- cessive. It is also identical with the imperative mode of the verbs grouped in what is called the First Conjuga- tion. In form it terminates in a syllabic in E ; that is, in the First Conjugation its terminal is any one of the sylla- bics in E, but in the Second Conjugation its terminal is the syllabic RE suffixed to the Main Stem. For example: sv forming ^IJ-tJ- noose for the verb "mend " ; %t re forming ^-^L makere and ^^"^t ojire for the verbs " lose " and " fear," produce the Conditional Stems of these verbs. 157. SUMMARY FUR THE VERBS *i* t *tf * NAO su MAKE RU i-tf & OJI RU THE MAIN STEM is *tt U *tf nao t(])i make ^^ oji. THE NEGATIVE STEM is 5 trt nao wf male &V oji. GROUPINGS IN INFLECTION. 121 THE CERTAIN PRESENT #ft t f H- o* / ** &% t> STEM is nao sit make TU oji 1*1*. THE CONDITIONAL * * $tf fr \, * 3/\ .& b JM' STEM is nao ne mate re o/i rc. 158. The PROCESS OF INFLECTION for Japanese verbs therefore takes its start, so far as it is examined in this manual, from these four Stems of Inflection : the Main Stem; and its associates, the so-called Negative; the Certain Present; and the Conditional Stems. All verbal inflection will here be considered as proceeding from, or as being supported by, one or the other of these primary variations. 7. GROUPINGS IN INFLECTION : CONJUGATION. 159. As the PROCESS OF INFLECTION goes on from these primary variations, the Stems of Inflection, the verbal forms differentiate into two distinctly marked groups, which are named CONJUGATIONS. The two Conjugations may be distinguished as follows : 160. 1. THE FIRST CONJUGATION. This conjugation con- sists of all verbs whose Main Stems end in a syllabic in i, and whose Certain Present Stems end in the u syllabic of the same series as that of the Main Stem terminal. (154.) ISustrations : If the Main Stem of a verb ends in & ki and the Certain Present in < ku; or, if further, the former ends in ^ gi and the other in (* gu ; or in \, shi and in "f */ t> J l an d *$ zu; % clii and > tsu; t> Id (i) and ^ fit (it); fr mi and & mu; /> ri and ru, and so on through- out the several series of syllables as shown in the syllabary of the .Katcd.-a.na on page 24, that verb maybe classed in the First Conjugation. 161. All the forms of inflection of verbs whose Main 122 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAK. Stems and Certain Present Stems are so marked follow oiie model, euphonic changes in the stems excepted, ILLUSTRATIVE VERBS : MAIN STEM CERTAIN PRESENT " mend " ^45 L/ naoshi 7 JJ^~ naosu " hear " kiki | < kiku " smell " 2p ^ kagi . . -. %* <* kagu " know " ^ 6 shiri ^ & shiru " look at " 3? nozoki <> 7f < nozoku win " #:> "t, toc/ii ^^ O kateu " enter " \j\ 1) iri \t\ & iru " twist " >Xl> 5i " return " %*-^ /) " draw back " l>OlLfr hUckomi t>OlL\f hikkomu " shine " X b teri X -5 teru " go " or " come " ^ fo /> mairi $ ' ^'ogri . <* ^u " blow " ^ fuki ^ < fuku " fly " ^ CX to6i ^ ^ to&w " hold in the mouth " ^, < fafu&umi ^ < frfukumu " pile up " ^> ^ /> tsumori -9 $ -5 tsumoru "take"tE^ ^ /, /ori .f^ ^.5 ton* fjfi ^ " become " jroo ^ ^ ??ari } ,5 " climb " U 6 rjo&07 '* I J " give " ^> /, 2/ari ^> ,5 ya*it " buy " ^t> *i %*& kau " be " ^> ^ a*i fo aru " go " V> ?'& l^ < iku. ? 162. Eu2*honic Changes : In all verbs of the First Conjugation certain changes, chiefly euphonic, take place within the Main Stem during the process of inflection. These changes appear particularly in the gerund, in the past tenses, and in the alternative form. EUPHONIC CHANGES IN MAIN STEM. TERNAT FORM. f CONDITIONA PAST, ETC. ti Q H S O G p H GO M NX 40i 124 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. O ^^ o QQ a OH CD C*H I? -u O J^ "0 s "^^ *^N ua CO ^ H ^ v ^ 'V ~ *w "^ cS CO J5 M ** fS "t* *^ ^S A O /* *.2 f . ^ f .^ CO o -J-3 s* r 1 J 3 xJ ^ < * ^r a ^5 ^j o cS> a Ky g^ ~ "3 oo "5 ->-> P^ C3 &t/'^ S 3 03 CJ 5" ^2 a o ^ 15 ^ .^ * -1 -4- 3 rt jy* * '3 *-* s ^f ^ g * ** g S 2 2 -t H3 03 H AJ ^ r ^ pz| a f ^ % *> ** a a 5 s ?fi ^ ^ * -*^ jj HQ i CO to s co a C, ^ ^ n-j 1 < -^ a .' .r^ 5 1 1 O 1 j s S 1 ' . J 5 1 ^ tt= 2 f * ? J "* tc ri |^ ^ l^j o ^ 0) ^ O) A ', O KJ Q. EUPHONIC CHANGES IN MAIN STEM. 125 * a 3 v/ CONDITIONA PAST, ETC. tA P CER GERUND. J 02 "if. xJ | 3 E .a $ iC KJ 6 126 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GKAMMAE. r o .2 3 i J * . O 03 J a *H O I C5 S I Ed O - H o - -RI fs a 2 1 r+ 5 O O S " '3 f EUPHONIC CHANGES IN MATN STEM. 127 ftf ol w fc g o U *H" Q f a Q GERUND o oqou & o ol s K 9 f- f f 128 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. p 'S r< T5 . o O 3 '- 5 THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 129 (69. NOTE. In verbs of this class, properly speaking, the terminal syllables belong to the H or Spirant series of syllables, and their euphonic changes follow the changes peculiar to the syllables ^ ha, > hi, J^fiuu, ~^\ he, (, kau (kafu), ftzfe kawa is the Negative Stem. Of \f\ j^ in (ifu) \s\ {-j; iwa, and of fo t> ^ warau (warafti) fo ty ^ icarawa, are the Negative Stems. Thus with other verbs also. 170. 2. THE SECOND CONJUGATION. The Second Con- jugation consists of all verbs whose Main Stems end in a syllabic in either E, or in i, and whose Certain Present Stems are formed by the addition of the syllabic ru to the Main Stems. For example : If the Main Stem of a verb ends in ]/j- ke and the Certain Present in J^- ,5 keru; or further, the former in ^ ki and the other in ^ 5 kiru; or further, in -tJ- .*? and in # sent; ^ ji and *gjiru; or fa ne and fa ne.ru; $1 ni and ^^ niru; or ^> me and ^> merit; or fa mi and fa% mini, and so on throughout the several series of the E and i series of syllables, that verb is classed in the Second Conjugation. ILLUSTRATIVE VERBS : MAIN STEM CEKTAIN PRESENT " lose " ^ ]fj- make $^-5 makeru " fear " fe^ Qji ft ^ & ojiru " wear " ^ H ^ ^ Lira " sleep " 43. ne fa & neru " grow " (i hae (i haeru " be " foi > & iru " get " e % era 130 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. " "O Out " MAIN STEM - dt>. CERTAIN PRESENT -/;. x dai'u " cool" 3 ^> XCLnie ^ fy z. sami'ru " see " fa mi " eat " y?-~^ & tobcru " bathe " #) \* obi ^. -fV X obiTU " break " S'jK' ore ^^\, X orc.ru. " borrow " fi^ h kari . . .-h* h 7. kuriru. 171. lu the Second Conjugation the process of inflection divides the inflected forms into TWO SEKIES. These series are distinguished from one another, however, only by the syllabic in E, or in i, with which the Main Stem terminates. In all other respects the forms of inflection conform to one model. For this reason we group these two series of in- flections in one Conjugation, and distinguish them as the. FIRST, and the SECOND, FORMS of the SECOND CONJUGATION. 8. PARADIGMS OF THE VERBS. 172. Japanese verbs may therefore be grouped into two Conjugations, and their process of inflection may be con- sidered as being supported by FOUR STEMS. TABLE OF STEM SIGNS. FIRST CONJUGATION. .SECOND CON- JUGATION. FORM I. FORM II. Main Stem, ending with a syll . in i, Negative Stem, ,, A, in E, in i. E, ,, I. Cert . Pres. Stem, u, ,, ERU, IRU. Coiul. Stem f E, ERE, ,, IRE. Beginning with the form of the verb declaring direct, simple action, that is, with the primary variation here named PARADIGMS OF THE VERB. 131 the Main Stem, let us follow the process of inflection. We shall take as illustrative verbs, the three which have been named / ( J ^ naosu, ^ ^ maL-e.ru, and ^ % ojiru. The Main Stems of these verbs are % { J L< n aoshi, % \j- make, and ^ ^ q/t. 173. 1. T/ttf Main Stem, as said before, bears a larger number of inflections than any of the other primary varia- tions. In some verbs it is apparently the root of the word: in the Second Conjugation this stem in reality supports all inflection. 174. a. In the FIRST CONJUGATION for the verb %&J^~ wao.su we have the Main Stem # I J L naosJii. By the use of suffixes to the Main Stem the following forms are produced for this verb : Gerund % (J L~X naoshi-te, having mended, mending Cert. Past -^2 -/a, mended, have mended Concl. --72 ty -lara, if tl) had mended Prob. -7*2 C,^ -taro, probably (he) mended Cone. x -T fl' -tan-do, though (he) mended Alt. Form -/ f) -tari, at times mending Des. --^ \r> -tai, (he) wishes to mend 175. NOTE. Polite inflection for the First Conjugation, and for the Second Conjugation also, is made by adding most of the inflected forms of the verb ^ ^~ maau to the Main Stem of a verb. For example, : % {J*f naostt is made to serve polite speech under the form / JJ ^ ^ ^~ naoshi- In the inflections of the verb compounded as t" naoshhnasv, only the suffix ^ ^- masu under- goes change. 132 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. 176. b. In the SECOND CONJUGATION there are for the verbs ^1^-5 maker u and ^ ^ ojiru, the Main Stems ]ft make and ^ " oji from which are produced the Gerund * <: > )ft * make te and ^ ^ X q/i fe Certain Past ,3 ft ta 7*2 ii ta Coud. ,, ft > tara ft > torn Probable ,, ft5?5 taro ft C ? 5 ,i taro Conces. 33 ft^t>gT taredo,, 7^^ L-*,, taredo Alt. Form ft 6 to>i ft ^ ) ,, tari Desid. Form >3 ftlr> tai ftl/ > ,, tai 177. NOTE. But, besides these inflections which are here given simply for the purpose of running a parallel with the inflections of the First Conjugation just shown, the Main Stem really supports all the forms of inflection of the Second Conjugation, as appears in the process of inflection continued below. 178. 2. The Negative Stem is second in importance to the Main Stem in supporting inflection. It exists as an independent stem only in the First Conjugation. In the Second Conjugation, what is called the Negative Stem is only the Main Stem as it appears in the forms of inflec- tion which correspond to the inflection forms supported by the First Conjugation Negative Stem. 179. o. In the FIRST CONJUGATION for the verb / ^ ^~ naosu the Negative Stem is % (i naosa. By the use of suffixes the following forms are produced from PARADIGMS OF THE VERB. 133 _o _Q O en .3 O to 9 a H3 a o O V e 1 ^ ^ 0* o O 134: SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. -a rz ^ tb Z O O bo VI rt o O bfl -< E ho o ho s "4> O i *H CT2 ? O tc a> o H o p f z Q Q X. O 2 ? - c3 A PARADIGMS OF THE VETU3. 135 *o I VJ fc* ft in a o O ft -R -o ft >0 O 13G SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. 181. 3. The Certain Present Stem supports but few inflections. It is a primary verbal variation in the First Conjugation. In the Second Conjugation it is an inflection of the Main Stem by the use of the suffix ,5 ru. 182. a. In the FIRST CONJUGATION for the verb naosu, the Certain Present Stem is naosu. This stem is inflected as follows : Cert. Pres. %{J^~ naoxu (he) mends, (they) mend. Improbable ; l^ ,, mai probably (1) do not, will not mend. Neg. Imperative / 1 ., a do not mend 183. b. In the SECOND CONJUGATION the Certain Present Stems of J |^- waJceru and ^ ^ ,5 q/iVu are the verbs as named ; Certain Present $ # * IMateri * U) lose, shall lose ^ t ty ' (1) fear, shall fear Neg. Imperative itf *5 mairia/ do not lose ! ^^6^'y''>"a/ do not fear ! 184. 4. The Conditional Stem, like the Certain Present Stem, supports but a small inflection. In the First Conjugation this stem is a primary variation of the verb. In the Second Conjugation it is an inflection of the Main Stem by the use of the suffix ^t re. PAKADIGMS OF THE VERB. 137 185. a. In the FIKST CONJUGATION for the verb Naosn the Conditional Stem is naose. This stem is inflected as follows : Conditional Present 7 { J &) naoseba if (1) mend Concessive g do though (he) mend. takes the form of this stem (J-&- noose! mend! 186. b. In the SECOND CONJUGATION the Conditional Stems of the verbs ^ ft makeru and :& ^ ^ o/iru are vutltere, Cond. Present ^ tfrjfl $ makere ba and ^. ^Tfl ^t Q? l ' re ^ a Cone. ,, -* ,, f/o ,, ^* rfo SUMMARY OF FORMS OF INFLECTION. Exhibiting all these forms together, and classifying them in accordance with the arrangement generally made by Western grammarians we get the accompanying verbal paradigms. 138 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. PABADIGM OF FIRST CONJUGATION. 13J> 8 I 140 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAB. s A.AO- OO C. "3 ^ S s 333 : A,| && 1 Make- J^V> M saa > 'S to fi ^ c3 'S to o < PH j^j ^Y a b o & PARADIGM OF SECOND CONJUGATION. 141 * * g-y-R,. . H elfl ' S o 5 ^;? c5 -'^ =5 5 d II O *- OP-i OP* 142 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR 189. 5. Verbal Inflection in Polite Form. In social intercourse in Japan, language has been given a special character for the purposes of courtesy. Except among relatives and with one's own servants, verbal forms in the main parts of sentences almost always differ somewhat from the simple inflections jnst given, in order to express politeness, respect or reverence. The subject of honorific language can not be dealt with at any length here. We may not, however, pass by the use of the verb j "f* magu-, meaning " be," which, as a suffix to the Main Stems of verbs, relieves the verbs from the familiarity and curtness of the simple inflections. The inflections of this verb are con- stantly in use, and are universally applicable to other verbs. In fact, J ^T masii has now no independent function. It appears always as a suffix. 190. a. The inflection of the verb ^ -^ masa, is some- what unlike that of either of the verbs whose paradigms have already been given. The Main Stem of the verb is J \, mashi ; its Negative Stem is J -tJ- mass ; its Certain Present is ^ ^r masii, and its Conditional Stem is J ^"jft masure. It has no desiderative form. Knowing these peculiarities the student can easily complete its paradigm. 191. b. All the inflections of j ^~ masu, however, are not in common use. The forms most frequently met with are the following : Cert Pres. Pos. !| U "f~ masa, Keg. \ J -tt 1 IQ. mase-nu, Prob. Pos. ! J tt5 ma,-sho (seu) Cert Past Pos. J U~^2 mashi-ta INFLECTION Dv POLITE POEM. Prob. Past Po= i': Cond. Pres. Cond. Past P - $ * -f? A mashi-twi Alt Form , ^er- ^^-^Jl^'O'fi b ma^-naiaaUfn Poa Gerund k, ^ . _ ' T 192. c. Several of the forms for the Negative Voice of J ^ ma*a are by preference in popular speech rendered by combining with the negative certain present, masen, such auxiliary forms as -t^-ft- ^ rfesfto, -(* deshila, -^ ^"/j t? d^iilara, which are remote abbreviations of the particle ^ ^ ^~ jotarinidfi,'^ or 3t ^" yozainw**! Positive or Negative. 144 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. Examples : Polite Desiderative Form naosu. naoshito-gozarimasu Neg. ^ftU^<-&^ b naoshitaku-gozarimasen Polite Desiderative Form Pos. makeld-gozaimasii Neg. ??? aketak u -gozaimasen Polite Desiderative Form :& ojiru. Pos. ojitaku-gozaimasen. e. The Imperative Mode in polite form is commonly formed by the help of certain auxiliaries, with or without the verb ^ mas. For the present, the auxiliary % ,5 nasaru, " please do," associated with J ^~ masu, may illu- strate this form of inflection, as ; Imperative Mode. Pos. 7 $ (/> ^ -{j- nasaimase ! or % $ l/^ $ lx nasaimashi ! Neg. ?. IT* $ ^" ^ nasaimasu na ! or 'X $ t/" $ ^" -5 ^ nasaimasuru na ! In polite inflection the verb to which ^ $ lr $ ^" nasai- masu is auxiliary is accompanied by the honorific :&> o. SUMMARY OF POLITE INFLECTION FORMS. Exhibiting these forms together, and classifying them in accordance with the arrangement generally made by Western grammarians, we have the following paradigm. INFLECTION IN POLITE FOKM. VO NEGA tJ G G O 4~ E3 1*" b 5 tf POSITIVE - -J co ^ cS TTv ^5 \^3 ' CD S5 a EH G g '5 O \ < a "o ^-1 - 5 r * E c 6 1 T ^ 4 a o O 146 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OP GRAMMAR. O 1 VE VOICE. PO MODE AND fr alca s *H O fe O _> '*= ci a aku *< 1 . Gerund c S fc P -.3 a3 o rs "S o p to 8 ^ O ci o T5 fl . 02 5 - -B J '-S to r- ' O ~ ' . J2 2 -" "2 s s, .- O O > as O as tJ ^ ^ g 0) <>2 ^ co s O EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR INFLECTION. 147 P D in P a >-! BB M a p P CO OQ OJ OQ 1-1 O M P a P P M M &c K. . a Ilia H H a S -o "o - a _Q -Q i o hi P-. 148 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. ATIVE VOICE. p 2 ->A VE VO '^r Ji' _ a -. TIVE VOICE. - EH K I e E el ' I - >- l , 6 o o V? ', o o o a o O tp "E a a eS a - ^ a> !2 'x Qi a 150 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. ATIVE VO N H Q bJO too - S 3-0 02 E 03 O ^ s i 2 > ^ .2 ft S 60 S3 02 - a 02 O n3 '43 q S o 3 es ^.fl Jf : s w - *s eS 2 ^o 02 rg qj ^ rj S ^ C3 , T3 3 p 49 E " fl . 02 ,2 O > 2 H CM 3 ^ ' PASSIVES, POTENTIALS, AND CAUSAT1VES. 151 199. 1. THE PASSIVE VOICE. "When that which is the object of a verb in ordinary form is represented as having become a subject, affected by the action expressed in the verb, the verb is said to have taken on the PASSIVE VOICE. For example, the active verb-phrase " he knows me," is made passive when it becomes " I am known by him." Likewise " I see," becomes passive when phrased " I am seen," &c. 220. The change from the active to the passive voice in Japanese is made by adding to the Negative Stem of the First Conjugation the syllables %], RERU, and to the same stem of the Second Conjugation the syllables ty%\,& RARERU. For example ; the verbs \^ shim "know," eru "obtain," and fa mini "see," are made Passive as follows ; CONJUGATION. NEGATIVE STEM. PASSIVE VOICE. First Con j. \^ ty shira L>*t "to be known" shira reru Second Conj. I. e II. fa mi t?fr& "to be obtained" e rareru fa t?%\-& to be seen mi rarer n 201. a. Strictly speaking, however, there is no passive voice in Japanese speech. Etymologists teach that the so called passive termination is a condensed compound made up of the verbs, > /> ari " being," and eru " get " which means " get being. " The verb \^ , %\, shirareru, therefore, is a verb-phrase meaning " to get being knowing." This phrase by an easy transition comes to mean " " to be 152 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. known." This change applies to all passives. They are, as Prof B. H. Chamberlain describes them, " actives in disguise." 202. &. The paradigms of all the so called passives are shaped in accordance with the First Form of the Second Conjugation. ILLUSTRATIVE PHRASES : V- ^ * 7* V S '* i * " He is well known by me." Watakushi ni yoku slurareru t % frbftt V-]k ** " Where were you seen ? " Doko wo miraremasnila ka 203. 2. THE POTENTIAL VOICE. Having power to do anything, i.e. POTENTIALITY, is expressed by the same phrase- verbs as those used to convey passive meanings. ILLUSTRATIVE PHRASES: calot set Prov 28 rrov. 40. . fe ^ %},%> shirareru, and ]_,%l- shireru, both phrase- verbs meaning "may," or "can, know." By pre- ference, however, the idea of permission, or " may," is as- sociated with \s^%l> shirareru, and with all verbs in REBU ; and of positive ability, or "can," with \^#t-,5 shireru and all such verbs in ,5 RU. There are some variations in the formation of the second potential form, such as PASSIVES, POTENTIALS, AND CAUSATIVES. 153 kikoeru instead of g ]rf % kikeru, which should be learned. 205. b. In the Second Conjugation the two potential forms for &. miru "see"; that is, fc tyfab mirareru " may see," and . -5 niieru, " can see," should be noticed as the exceptional two potentials in the Second Conjuga- tion. 206. 3. THK CAUSATIVE VOICE. There are many phrase- verbs whose meanings express CAUSING OF ACTION, e.g. " causing to know," or " to get," or " to see." Such causa- tion is expressed by the addition to the Negative Stem of a verb, in the First Conjugation of the syllablis SEJRU, and in the Second Conjugation of the syllablis SASEKU. For example ; the verbs ^,.5 shim, % eru, and mini, become Causative as follows ; CONJUGATION. NEGATIVE STEM. CAUSATIVE VOICE. First Conj. \^ Cy >shira lx^^-5 "to cause to shiraseru know." Second Conj. L e II. fa " $"t3r^> "to cause to e sftsera obtain " ^ $ *tir -5 "to cause to mi saseru see." All causative verbs are conjugated according to the paradigm for the First Form, Second Conjugation. 207. NOTE. The irregular verbs < L-uru, and ^- suru, form causatives in the forms ^.J-tir/S kosaseru "cause to come," and $.-fi-.5 saseru "cause to do." Please let me know at once." |" <* ^ ??*& ^ \ K 8ugu m kucasnue kudaxai 154 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GKAMMAE. Mina ureru nara liayaku kite shirasete kudasai " If you can sell all, please come quickly and let me know." L^^ & ^-tir^H'fLldC t^tf%V> "You must make then! Shizuka ni sasenakenba ikcnai keep still." V. THE ADJECTIVE. 208. In the Japanese language, words and phrases added to nouns for the purpose of describing, defining, limiting the meanings of the nouns, differ much in con- struction, and in ways of use, from their equivalents in English speech, THE ADJECTIVES. For instance, Japanese adjectives have neither number, gender, nor a true suc- cession of degrees, such as positive, comparative, and super- lative. But they have an inflection which, as far as it goes, is almost exactly like the inflection of verbs. 209. True verbs, too, and adverbial words, are in con- stant use as adjectives. 1. COMPARISON. 210. The Japanese do not express degrees of com- parison among things by such terminals as " er," and " est," or by a succession of auxiliaries of relation, such as " more," and " most." They use a simple adjective like ^C#*lr nagai "long," or ^^"^ yasui " easy," " cheap," and make comparison as follows : 211. a. FOR THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE. They use ordi- narily the particle /> yori " than," with the adjective ; saying, for example," This than, that long is," or " cheap is." That is to say, " lhan this, that is long " or " cheap" which means what is understood in English by the words " That is longer " or " cheaper, than this." For example, ainong the illustrative proverbs take numbers 11, and 41. THE ADJECTIVE : COMPARISON, INFLECTION. 155 Proverb 11 * Buiran yori mo ayauslu. " Pile of eggs than even, dangerous," that is, " Even than a pile of eggs, dangerous," or " More dangerous than even a pile of eggs." Proverb 41. ^> /, v, % Mime yori kokoro. " Face than heart," that is, " Heart than, face (is better)," or, " The heart is more to be desired than the face." 211. NOTE. Excess in quality of one thing over another is sometimes expressed by such words as ^ ^ motto, " more," ft $ J nao " yet," or " still," &c: For example: ^ c? ft^'tr* motto nagai, "more long," 'S { J ^ ^* V^ nao yasui, " jet cheap," that is, " longer," " cheaper." 213. b. FOR THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. The extreme degree of quality is expressed by the use of such words as \r>*ty &A, ichi ban, "number one," 7l/^ (r> "?> dai win no " first," " chief," &c. For example : ^^, ^/^ ^l^\r> ^{^ Iclii ban nagai na- u~a, " Number one long rope," is equivalent to the English words, " The longest rope." 2. INFLECTION. 214. The simplest form of the adjective is what may be called THE STEM. By the addition of certain syllables to the Stem, various adjective words and phrase words, are formed. These are simple adjectives, adverbial adjectives, and verbal adjectives, all having special mood and tense forms. By INFLECTION these adjectival words receive both affirmative and negative expression. 215. a. The syllabic (^ i added to the Stem of an ad- jective, forms the simple adjective, which is usable either as an attribute or as a predicate. 156 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. For example ; from the Stems %-frZnaga, and "f>^~ yasu, the simple adjectives 71)$\r> nagai "long" and yasui " easy," or " cheap," are formed. One can say ^fc nagai naica, "long rope," or ^{"i -ftf f-ft3\r* nau-a ga nagai " the rope is long " ; and *ft> ^- ^ { /> yasui hari, " a cheap needle," or (3 /> -ft* -f>^-(/\ hari ga yasui, "the needle is cheap." 216. NOTE. In Proverb 32; && ^^&X <5 "72 > U ?T lx Furuki wo taziwele, atarashiki ico shiru, " Inquiring after old (things) he learns new (things)," the adjectives " old," and " new," terminate in the syllabic <| KI. This syllabic is the Classical termination of all adjectives. In common speech the K sound has been dropped, leaving the i vowel element as the ordinary, simple adjective terminal. 217. b. The syllabic < KU, added to the Stem of an adjective, forms an adverbial adjective, or an adjectival adverb. In ordinary speech this form has predicative force. When adverbial it is followed by the verb which it qualifies. Examples : From the Stems /#:? naga, and ^ ^~ yasu, are thus formed 7i}3 ( nagaku, and ^^~ < yasuku, which may be used as follows ; # Wt ft* #7&* < r ^lr 3t 1" Kono nau-a ga nagaku gozaimasu. " Tliia rope. (J"J long is" that is, " This rope is long. " ^^" < "t? ^ lx"/ Yasuku dekimashita, "cheap made," that is, "It is made cheaply." 218. NOTE. In common speech the K sound is often dropped from the adverbial form of the adjective, and the u sound is combined with the vowel element of the preced- ing syllabic. To illustrate; fij~Z <( nagal'u often passes THE ADJECTIVE : INFLECTION. 157 .2 2 CO >> of * ^ S o 'rf S3 I 1 a *o -f m ' "2 5 .2 Q X ^ s; H 'o o t-l c eS o S g S^ * si V^ j3 ? *?* ^j ^^ 0} o rffrj ' ^ r2 O VI ^ CO S 5 3 N> e3 rH _ K> S ^ fc* 1 a5 o ** 'O w > s 'S o * -^ O p. ej "* "S _^; *" ' ^ 05 ? ^ -] " ^< '2 M *C; J_ ^. -^ o e" h. O = . ** CO r^ ^ -> I'*'* 8 s o CQ M O fl *^K v .2 02 o > g c o *^ *<< ^H * 3 C, _c Vo "S .2 o .* H g fe O K O 1 ^: f> L ATARASHI. -J < ,> '% *^ -S & "c *^ s 8l 1 sx r* J "; >^ *^ F\ ^ . < ;* o> V- g c 1 o" 00 o v *P a ,, ^a N* 'S C3 ^ 02 r/T s O - QQ o ^5* e: o> E3 ^5 HH ^ ^ ** ^ 45 Vi XJ ft A-/ ' ^< CO ^ '-*3 *^ '6 *^ ^3 ^. > ^ -1 s IH o o | CO S 01 Vi 1 ^ a CU ^ 13 <3 T3 ! GO 5 s o .S ^5* ' w < 158 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. *s? f*- 1 /{s , fe "-J3 t) i ~ jj a o a it 2= !jj i .gS O S 3 "'o ^^ S -*- 1 fc p C c 0) \ C3 C '3 2 i . ?: CO_Q , . ? "r^ v <3 ^ v/rC^ o ^^ "" i Y? ^ p ^!u ^ C/> * " n ^ o a 55 **- c ^0 * *lfi K ^ 3 ' ^^? 2 * ^^? fe 1~ i C- 1 g 1^5 c> ~ o vo i ~o : i o " oj TV '"^ IITIVE. S S -a K> C i^ >-g) m P S <" J^ |U O r*a ^<^. - *Q ~ _Q-^- o b i 5< PH *%*'* 2 ^ CL. iv, V J 5 ATIVE. *-6 *** *" S CD Is 11 ^ o ^^ "5 t/5 O r^ ^ l**.s Sj 3 '* H # C-<* >-> c O ^ CO " <=3 3 n ^ *- a "-^ Q _Or= "^ t* 5 3 O ^"e 4-i b -o ^ >i g | V s o *I o S cs Vo .s = vl V? ,' ; 1 1 f4 ^:g "^'1 ^i Oi co P *J"^i 5* ) "^^ "~ ^ _ f^ j? ^i ^^ S ^1 = it^l ii i V? o Si" V? c o jl $ Q n. ADJECTIVE STEMS. Polite Predicate Form VERBAL FOBMS. INDICATIVE MODE. Certain Present Probable Present Certain Past THE ADJECTIVE : INFLECTION. '^pS S Vv ^ o * w| ^ ~ ^* V) "5? .,.3 "^ e ^ 2 ^^ 1 ^|I ^1^^ it E~o *-l i: "o r\ 5 s -^i-l ' "e >1 "^ e "o C*~-; - ^>~ "o % 53 4) - ~ hO p r. _Q V^ S C 2 c v^ ~ Ct s E c ^~ ~> _O ^Z ,<2 ?* H *> ^^"Si "*" i; "-i 3 NX ~ "*> -It tO ~ -^> o tiiO -o _T C5 O VJ't^ "? ' i '~~ w V-S ~o 4i!2 ^S~5 vl 8 ^. s; 7\ ~^ E ? ~ ?11 ^-,^5 .^ ^l 1 ^-S ho ^liS "^"s ^ O r^ o ' ~ "55 tc ~ Cu ^B~ KJ ^ h: ^"C^ '^ c 3 <-S M^^ 2 ^"**S ' ^3 ^"^ x -"55 f ">^ -Q ,fs |0 _ I 5 . -^ * C3 ^ ^ *\ G 43 ' J r>~ ^ * C3 v*^ ***** ' * **^ C ^~* * , . ~ C sL ~ 5 T^ ^^ ^_ * i* ^""S * - 7^ ^ ^ f^5 a> fej ^ C3 2 XX*^ $ / ^ C q"c = 0"S - H" = t>"il P ^ >^ V? K *- ' -k o ^~ S o _^ ~ -^ rr cc il"l *" ^~ j-Sj >S "S -j!i*> "* r? 2|j ^j 2 E ?il ^f\ ?* C3 f t K ^ c\ ^ p .t: j**\ C3 *~-S.E ^ki **^> ^"^ $ e vl 3h= "S .0 *X** Qj ^JU 3i P r< - ..J VD O ^ J3 Q. S 2 ^- || i ~J^-S2 X .+- ^ t^ ^S *****>****'* 02 ^S c K-s- 2 > "e-o Pr^^ ~>^J *$ >r; turns' tarashikeredo though new f:5 Lt>-of:vj arashikatlari ng at times new fcf: ?> L < -C itarashikute being new JL- "*O CO * Q $ ^?"S *~3 h= *i 53 *2 Tl C i - "fl ^, a i . 03 " 03 P^ > ij _> *n *"O 03 s ' ^ 'S kin no "of gold " = " golden "; ^ ^ <> makoto no " of truth " = " truthful; " and > ty%* % akiraka na, " bright being " = " bright ; " l%* 7 baka na " fool being " = " foolish," and so on. 222. b. Nouns followed by Cy\^\r\ BASHII, meaning " like " or " appearance," become adjectival. Examples: fc#> > Hr* baka rashii "like a fool" = "foolish;" $ > UV^ kodomo rashii "like a child" = " childish; " (J^ 5 > L-1^ honto rashii " like the truth " = " truthseeming," and the like. 223. c. Verbs, in present and past forms, often become adjectives in use. Examples : dekiru and -^ ~f\r> dekinai mean- ing " able to do," and " not able to do," are equivalents of " possible," and " impossible," when used as adjectives. %>V*~fc aifa meaning " has become open " = " open," is used as an adjective, and the like. 224. d. There are many phrases in use by the Japanese which are practically units, and may be called phrase-ad- jectivcs, such as > \^ ) (j;^i/^ aslii no hayai, " quick of foot," = " swift ;" \f\ \, &l%\r> ishinodi, "abounding of stone," = "stony; " ^ ^ ~fo \r iji no wand "bad of spirit," = " ill-tempered," and so on. When these and like phrases are used predicatively, no is replaced by #* ga, as > \, -ft* j-j;^ \s\ ashiga hayai, THE ADVERB. 161 for J> U > tt^W ashi no ' lfl y ^ & iJl^ mini i ga toi "distant of ear," = "deaf," fc*> #* t^lr we 0a c/wte' " near of eye," = " short sighted." 225. e. The Desiderative Form of the verb, that is, the Main Stem having the syllables ;fe \r> tai suffixed, is in common use as an adjective. Examples: ^nJU"fclr naoshitai, "desirous of mend- ing," "curing" = "helpful," "kind;" ^^^fc^ ojitai, " desirous of fearing " = " anxious," " timid." VI. THE ADVERB. 226. Words and phrases whose functions are equival- ent to those of ADVERBS in the English language, are numerous in Japanese speech. In origin and chief use most of the adverbial forms are adjectives, verbs, and nouns, which, by means of particles and combinatives, are made descriptive of the action expressed in the verbs. 227. 1. There are a few true adverbs; such as > ^ f) amari, " too much ; " &%* t) bakari " only ; " ~t> ^) ^ chitto " slightly ; " 5 do "how ? ; '' < goku " very ; " t"! ^ ("i ?c hanahada "very;" (r>%* v ikaga "how;" \f\-O itsu " when? ; " ^? ^ kitto " positively ; " ^ 7c mada " yet; " ^ ^ naze " why ? ; " ^( f) sappari " wholly ; " *fc Vlr> ^ tadaima " presently ; " ^ ^ /) yahari " also ; " and some others. 228. 2. The adjectival form ending in < KU is practically a true adverb; as %#* < nagaku "long;" ^> ^~ < yasuku " cheaply," " easily ; " ^>^2 > \^ < atarashiku " newly; "^ / 5< "old;" ft^> < hayaku "quickly;" j; < yoku " well," etc. 229. 3. Nouns which are made to serve as adjectives by the addition of no, or / na, become adverbial 162 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GBAMMAR. by the use of the suffix ^c NI in the place of NO, or NA ; as $ . K. makoto ni " truthfully," " really; " \^*5fo \iC sliizuka ni " gently," " quietly ; " \, ^ i/% flt shimai ni " finally ; " \^/^^^> \IC shinsetsu ni " kindly ; " X ^ 43. t^ ftt teinei ni " politely ; " ^> 5 (|t yo ni " in the manner of ; " l^2p $L hoka ni "in another way;" i&{J^ (ft oki ni "greatly;" ^-- He sude ni "already;" ?l/>b tf daiji ni " carefully," and the like. 230. 4. Words reduplicated often take on an ad- verbial character ; as 7/^,& dan-dan "gradually," (fc/i, dan " a step) ; " t/> % / iro-iro " various kinds," ( \/\ % iro "sort);" ^tt>( nichi-nichi "daily," (^tt> nichi "day"); /* tokidoki "sometimes," ( ^ told " time"), and so on. Many such reduplicatives are followed by the particle to. 231. 5. The gerunds of many verb have in practice become adverbs; as fa fc. $ X hajimete " for the first time," G"i t ^> -5 hajimeru " begin "; ; fc^O T ^'fl^fe " on the con- trary " (-jj*^ % kaeru " return "); \^-^> |^X kessliite " never," used with a negative verb, (ft -9 ^" ^ kesshiru, " determine"); $ ? ft T sadamete " probably " ( $ 7 ^> ^ sadameru " con- firm") ; ?^-PX damatte "silently" (? ^ ^ damaru " silent ") ; $ ^, 7&i*^ X machigatte " wrong " ( t, ^'^ machigau " err " ) ; j; ^, _ ^ -^ yorokonde " gladly " ( i ^> . Jg yorokdbu " glad "). Also negative gerunds, such as #:>/ C>ir kanarazu " necessarily;" \^ty3 shirazu " un- consciously." 232. 6. Onomatopoetic words in large number have been produced by the Japanese, and do service as adverbs ; as (&tyt para-para " sound of rain ; " $? #:> / pika-pika " flashing of lightning ;" 2J-^>/ goro-goro "rolling of thun- THE ADVERB : RESPONSIVES. 163 soro-soro "slowly moving;" &*%/) patchiri "sudden breaking ; " f?C5 \^^ I) pissliari "slamming of a door;" |3? /W pon-pon " sound of guns ;" Jt A,/ pun-pun " spreading of perfume," and many more. 233. 7. Responsives. The Japanese have not yet re- duced their responses to questions to the simple " Yes ! " or " No ! " of English. As a rule their replies are repetitions of the verb of the question, either affirmatively or negatively. Their negative answer 4 x. iiye, is almost an equivalent for " No ! " Their response -^ 4 hei ! or >* 4 hai ! may mean " Yes ! " but generally it shows only that the person spoken to has heard, or is paying attention to, the speaker. ILLUSTRATIVE PHBASES: ) Xfit/*/ te&$/>f<#^ "These examples are Kono tehon ica amari sukunai too few." Prov 42 Shu ni majiicareba aJcaku naru " If intimate with verrnillion (you) will become red." 5 < // ft $ it <1 3t ^7^ " Really last night (I) Sakuban wa makoto ni komatta was troubled." " (I) see you now and then. Tokidoki o me ni kakarimasu tt t $ X & ft ^ ** V. /) J L7^ " (I) liave met you for ffajimete o me ni kakarimashita the first time." _. The gun says, ' pon-pon. Teppo ga pon-pon to iu ) send a letter? Teyami wo yaremasho lea ,c yes ! (you) can probably send it." emaso Is Mr. Robinson in?" Robinson san ica orimasu ka - * ' 7 $ ^ . ^ ^> 6 $ ^^ No 1 (he) has not yet come. /tye moaa mainmasen 164 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. VII. THE PARTICLES. (TENIWOHA.) 234. There are many words used in the Japanese language, named by the Japanese,^from four of the most important ones among them, X &t & ft te t ni, wo, ha, TENIWOHA. In English their equivalents are named PAKTI- CLES. The}' hold the same offices in sentences as those which are held in English by PREPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS and INTERJECTIONS. 235. a. The PARTICLES in Japanese speech are generally suffixes. Especially is this fact true of the Japanese equivalents of prepositions. These particles are postposed not preposed, to the words with which they are directly connected. In consequence of this peculiarity, they have received from "Western grammarians the distinctive name " POSTPOSITIONS," not prepositions. 236. I). Considering the meaning and uses of the partic- les, we divide them into four groups : 1. Cfise Signs, 2. Postpositions, 3. Conjunctions, and 4. Interjections. These words constitute a highly important part of the structure of the Japanese language. But we can not here give more than glances at some of the facts concerning them, which are of most practical value. 1. CASE SIGNS. 237. Among the particles are several which, as we have seen, are attached to nouns and pronouns to indicate their CASE, or state with respect to the other words of a sentence. They are #* ga and fo wa, ) no, J ni and -^ ye, and fe wo. 238. Properly speaking, -fiX ga for the nominative case, and fe v:o for the accusative case, are the only particles THE PARTICLES: CASE SIGNS. 165 which may be regarded distinctively as case signs. But, since the other particles, > no, fl ni and -s ye, excepting ft ica, render the same service to the words with which they are associated, as that rendered by the case termina- tions in Latin or Greek declension, we shall name them, also, CASE SIGNS. The particle ft u-a has a unique func- tion. The particle <> no, also, has uses special to itself. 239. 1. -ft* Ga and ft W(l. The particle -ft* -go,, though originally a genitive sign, may now be regarded as the generic NOMINATIVE SIGN for Japanese words. As a rule, it now simpl}' denotes the name of the thing of which something is affirmed, as ; 'Q'O T&* $ \s~feNatsugakimashita " Summer has come." 7 y $ y -ft* fc $ ^~ Fuji san ga mienmsu " Mount Fuji is visible." 240. a. The presence of -ft* ga in a sentence has no mean- ing beyond this. But, were a speaker desirous of calling especial attention to the relation existing between subject and predicate ; for instance, did he wish to EMPHASIZE the fact of the advent of summer, or the visibility of Mount Fuji, he would in all probability substitute ft wa for jj* ga> and say 7-o ft $ L72 Nctisu wa kimashita, and 7 y "#" y (t & 5. $ *$ Fuji san uu miemasii. The particle ft wa, as associated with the subject of a sentence, is ap* parently an index pointing from subject to predicate. . 241. b. But the function of ft u-a is more than that of an index to predication. It serves also as a sign of AN- TITHESIS, or CONTRAST, very much, so some writers think like the Greek fjiiv ds, which are equivalent to " indeed but." * ^ # Hf 7 * ^. y ? 7 ft "t?-tir 5 Karuizawa to Nikko to u-a dochira ga suzit- (hshd. " Which is cooler, Karuizawa or Nikko ? " 166 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. It ^* Karuizawa wa suzushii ga Nikko wa kirei de gozaimasu. "Karuizawa, indeed, is cool, but Nikko is beautiful." Here, (^ wa with [-j; ica is the sign of contrast. 242. In the sentence fcfl (1 5 $ l^ #>*t ft $ o't/^ .ffo?*e wa umai, are wa mazui. " This is delicious but that is disagreable," an antithesis is expressed by fc wa with (2 wa. 24-3. c. As an ISOLATING, or separative, sign { ?ra takes a prominent place in such sentences as the one given above; * * # -T 7 - y ^ 7 (i ^* t> ^ ^ f Karuizawa to Nikko to wa dochira ga suzushii desho. The words preceding fo wa are isolated by this particle from the rest of the sentence, which remainder thereby becomes a simple sentence, in which &* ga is the nominative sign. %>> < $^ Wt ^U^ltf^^ Ano kurumaya wa ashi ga hayai. " That kurumaya, as for, foot swift" i.e. " As for that kurumaya, he is swift of foot." In Proverb 45, $ < tN it ft t> #' C> ^ f lr Moyckui ni wa, hi ga tsuki yasui, (3 ?mis also separative, and fy$ ga is the nominative sign for the remainder of the sentence. 244. d. The particle (^ twz has other functions than those here noted; but what has been said of it will suffice for present purposes. a. As a PREDICATIVE INDEX it has no equivalent in English. /3. It stands as a MARK OF EMPHASIS, y. As a SIGN OF AN- TITHESIS, or contrast, it is best rendered by the word " but," at the beginning of the second clause, or sentence, of the parts in the antithesis. o\ As an isolating, or SEPARATIVE THE PARTICLES : CASE SIGNS. 167 SIGN, it is equivalent to the words '' as for," " so far as concerns, &c." 245. 2. No, as Genitive sign. > No meaus " of," and, after a noun, signifies possession. Examples : fa b fo % H ar i no ana - " Needle of hole " = " hole of needle " = " needle's eye. " 0b tUft* Ido no naka. " Well of interior" = " interior of well " = " well's interior." $3>Vt &A/^*9 Oni no nembutsu. " Demon of prayer " =" prayei* of demon " = "demon's prayer.' 246. 3. Ni, and ye, as Dative signs, it, Ni means "to," or "into." ^ Ye means " to," " towards," "at." Both words represent the thing named as being added to, 01* as having something done to, or for, it. Examples : > ^-Y ^ 3t k b 1 1 Tokyo ni mairimasu. " Tokyo to go " = " I go to Tokyo." Proverb? * ^^ .^ f ^ * ^ P*^ Tonde hi ni iru nalsu no mushi. " Flying fire into enters summer of insect " = " Summer's insect flies into the fire." ^9^ -^ #^ /) $ f ^ America ye kaerimasu ka. " When America to return ? " = " When do you return to America ? " 247. 4. IFo, s Accusative sign. Like #* gra, {^ ?w is a true case sign. It signifies that its associated word is the object in the sentence. Examples : Proverb 1. ^ fc 1 1?X t* *T lx* Iclii ico knteju ico sniru. " One (ace.) hearing ten (ace.) knows" = " Hearing one thing, he knows ten." 168 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR, Proverb 9 ?ii kammuri ivo tadasazu. " Under a plum tree, do not adjust your cap." Proverb 10 *?-# * &T #te K& Nusubito ivo mite nawa wo nau, " Thief (ace.) seeing rope twists " = " Making a rope, having seen the thief." The accusative case may be signified by the use of other words than fa ico, and by the form of the sentence, but the particle fe wo (which like #? ga is untranslateable into English,) is properly named the ACCUSATIVE SIGN in Jap- anese speech. 248. NOTE. Equivalents for a VOCATIVE, and an ABLATIVE case can be made for Japanese nouns, by using the ex- clamation .}; yo " O ! ", and the postpositions #> t? liara, and j; /> yori, " from," and " since." Examples : Vocative. '^^.O^/^ Otottsan yo ! " O father ! " Ablative. ^ Yoroppa ka.ro, kaimasu. Jiiinope. 2. POSTPOSITIONS. (PREPOSITIONS). 24-9. POSTPOSITIONS proper do not form a large group among Japanese words. They are -^ de, %* t? kara, ^ -^ made, \fc ni, (ft no, l to, -s ye, j; /> yori. It is very difficult for a foreign student to understand the real mean- ings, and to make correct use, of these words. Only long familiarity with the language will enable him to express himself with them satisfactorily to himself, or to his Jap- anese hearers. But, in the main, these words may be understood as follows : 250. 1. *t? D e This particle primarily expresses the meanings conveyed by the English prepositions " by," THE PARTICLES -.POSTPOSITIONS. 169 "with," and "by means of." De also stands for "at," "in," "of," and "for." Examples : < 6 % -e ^ * U $ L^ -Washed (it) with soap." Shabon de araimash'da. -(? #t^ 2Pt>^5 " (I) shall buy a watch rfe to/t-ei u-o kaimasho. at Yokohama." > * -T ~e $ 5 WC 13 ^ < t, "What is the j>rice Tokyo de sdba va tfcura ? in Tokyo." ( i t ) i s m ade of jfcwafci wood." KeyaJci de kosturaemashita. ^ Z-SyT?*^*? " (I) will buy (it) for one yen." Jchi yen de kaimasu. 251. 2. 2p C, Kara. When used after nouns, this particle primarily means "from." ^ty Kara also means "since." Examples : yi~if"> fa ty X * ^ 9 $ "t? " From Shinagawa to Shinagau'akara Omori made. Omori. fa t? Sakiijitsu kara. " Since yesterday - " 252. 3. ^ -^ Made. This particle can be rendered into English by such words as " to," "as far as," " until " &c, Examples : a3 "^ * " b /V ^. it t J 6 3it" "( Ifc ) commences at Ichiji han ni hajimarimasu. half -past one." t%^< Lt "(It) is due on the ni chakushimasu. fourth." it ^ lr X < ?c $ l^ " Please put (it) on the i ?i i oite kudasai. table." fc ^frtl^tJ-f "(I) go to see the Hana wo mi ni ikimasu flowers. " it ^ $ %\,~fc " The cat was bitten Neko wa inu ni kamareta. by the dog." ^ U ^ W fc^ 5 r ^ 21 "A clever child for Toshi ni icajozu na ko. (his) years." 255. a. Among phrase-postpositions including ^ ni are these : > 5 ->. (ft no we wi " upon; " ^ ^ fl nosAi m " without;" ^ tdt ^ ^o so6a m' " beside; " ^^i ^ ^o nakani, "inside;" l^C>Li fctoisshoni" together with;" tame ni "for the sake of;" > ^^ /> {t no i ni " instead of," C5 t?*^^ fll ^o iwJto ni " across; " $ ^ liC. ^0 saki ni " beyond; " 5 t fll no wc/ii ni " among," " within; " e> ^ (1 ^ ^t o mawari ni " around;" ^ ^ K. ?7 ^o 6 w * " before; "0 ^ ^^ Jt no ushiro ni "behind;" fo ^ HC no ato ni "after;" ,{>? ^ wo THE PARTICLES : POSTPOSITIONS. 171 aida ni "between;" (> (J#: \[C no lioka ni "except;" > \s'fe HC no s/uta ni " under." 256. b. Preceding, that is, being a real preposition to gerundial verbal forms, l[c ni produces certain equivalents of English prepositions, such as \jc O lr X 7U fewife " be- longing to;" ye \^X & n i 8 hite u ' a "considering that," or " for; " \[c i O X m l/ Ue " according to; " \fc #> "fc-^ X ni ataltc " just at; " ^ \^~fei!)'S'2 X n ^ shitagaUe " in accord- ance with." 257. o. For the use of jfc. n *- as an adverbial ending, see 229. 258. For the use of He ni as a conjunctive particle, see 273. 259. 5. % R. no uchi ni : Prov. 34. . if ^ < tr Emi no uchi ni, yaiba woftikumu. " Within a smile to conceal a sword." 260. b. ) No is also used to show two nouns as being in apposition. Examples : ^ 4 7 y V) < ^L "The province of Taiwan Taiwan no kuni. (Formosa)." 1*JLL *n* *, *i "ThekurumayaTsunakichi." Kurumaya no Tsunakichi. 261. c. (^) ^b is often used attributivel}', after adjectives, having the sense of the word " one." 172 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. Examples : V- "Bring a long one." Nagai no ico motte o ide. (I) wisll to see a pretty one> Kirei na no wo mitai 262. rf. "When the cardinal numbers precede the nouns they qualify, the numbers are usually followed by the particle (> 770, (284.) Examples : ' #2 > (r> lx "Three stones," instead of Mitsu no ishi, the rendering - ^ 7 V' * ^ " Three stones." /s/u mitsu, - 263. 6. To. The meaning of the English preposi- tion " with," is at times rendered by to. Examples : &l>- L&> fc l/> L7 " (I) went with him .4??o s/w'to to shibai ni ikimashita. to the theatre." 264. 7. -^ Te. This particle signifies "to," "into," and is an equivalent, when suffixed to nouns, of the dative case sign, -x Ye sometimes has the force of "at." Examples : x =7- - y 3 y ~^ (1^> < " Quick ! to the Station ye liayaku ! station." ^<^^5 -^ \r>^^ 3? ^^>-^$lr " Please go and wait Gakko ye itte o machi nasai. at the school." 265. 8. /) Yori. Like %* t? Lara, /) yon means " from," or " since." 5. ~^ S y & h 1f . , .. . " From Mivanoshita. " Miyanosinta yon - | < 4a/t i b . since last year." bakunen yon - ^* ^.^ "Henceforth." Ima yon - THE PARTICLES : CONJUNCTIONS. 173 :i. CONJUNCTIONS, 266. The particles which in Japanese speech render a like service with that rendered by CONJUNCTIONS in English are & ga, ft* ka, ft* t? kara, $ mo, ^ ni, \^ shi, to and *f> ya, and several conjunction-phrases such as y -ft* da ga, ]?) dano, Ij-^L ' ^ keredomo, $ ^lit /) mo yaliari, Ufr* L #** > shikashi nagara, $5 UT s shite, /^; > sonnara, ^^L ^ liJ sore de wa, %%l, ~(* $ sore ^ e mo > . % -^ (or 1)*) tokoro ye or ga, $) -^ ^ 2/we ni, "f> ^ It. yd ni, I) \r>O 't yri ^- s '> an cl several others. 267. 1. H3 Ga. This particle is an equivalent for the adversative conjunction " but," when placed at the end of a clause. Examples : * 6 ^'^ 5 e S^ ^ $ t & ^^43LWC ^ 6 Arigato gozaiinaxu ga ikaneba narimasen " I thank you, but I must go." Itsu ka Nilion go ga dekiru yd ni nareba ii ga "If I am able to speak Japanese sometime it will be well, but - ." 268. 2. -ft* Kfi. ft* Ka repeated in a sentence has the force of the alternative " or," or the correlatives " whether - or " in English. Examples : < $ ^ 1/^iQXp U6 $"fr/^/ " I do not know whether Kuma ka inu ka shirimasen. it is a bear or a dog." tfr $>K f>.U^ &Z to ^ -is this new or old ? " Kore u-a ataramn Icajarui ka. 269. '6. #: ty Kara. Placed after verbs, ft* t? kara is best rendered as the subordinating conjunction " because." Examples : Attuku, narimashita kara Tokyo no ho ga (amaranai. " Because it has become hot, Tokyo is intolerable." 174 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. 5 t* liOlZ %* > U >% lr "I do not know because I Sfc 5 ^>. ^> ^ /Sq/i ??io sara ?)io uchi ni arimasen. " There is neither spoon nor plate in the houses. " 273. 5. HC Ni. The particle \jc ni serves often as the conjunction " and," in the enumeration of several things. Examples : Sake ni budo ni mikan ni sono hoka iro iro arimasu. " There are wine, grapes, and oranges, besides several other things." 274. 6. ^ Shi. This particle often serves as the copulative " and." Examples : s/u'na wio ant s/ri takai no mo aru. "There are cheap things, and also dear ones." 275. 7. To. a. When placed between nouns, to may be understood as the the copulative conjunction -and." THE PAETICLES : CONJUNCTIONS. 175 b. To also has the meaning of the English subordinat- ing conjunction " that," introducing an assertion. Examples : a . A'ori to 7Hi'zu to ic'O motte o ide. "Bring some ice and water." " Kori to mizu," to iimashita. " Ice and water," that he said." 276. 8. ^> Yd. ^> Ya, used with conjunctive meaning, is equivalent to the copulative " and," especially when the addition intended is rather indefinite. It expresses also hesitation and reflection. Examples : li/, ^> t& -+ ^t? ** > b $ t Son ?/a s^mi yafude ga arimasu. "There are books, ink and pens, and such." ya did ya. ""The flowers and the butterflies." 277. 9. There are various phrases in common use in Japanese, which as above noted, are best rendered in English by conjunctions. More particularly these are ; ? 7&* da ga, or . ^ #* toJtoro ga, which, in be- ginning a sentence has the meaning " still," or " well then," and "that being so'' ; ? dano occurring in a sentence has the meaning " and," it serves to give distinctness to the things counted ; $ ^ ( 1 /) nio j/a- liarl means "like-wise"; \^%* \, %fr? t? shikashi nagara is equivalent to "but"; 5 LX so shite (so doing) means "and "; % /il. t? sounara, and ^^t ~1* Jt sore de tva, should be rendered by " then " ; sore de mo is equivalent to "though"; ni is "because"; ^> ^ ^ yo ni means 176 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. "that," "so that"; and /> \r*O%: J/ori isst> signifies " than," " rather than." 278. Many other words and phrases perform the the service of conjunctions in Japanese speech. 4. INTERJECTIONS. 279. The Japanese language is plentifully supplied with EXPKESSIONS OF FEELING, which make frequent appear- ance in ordinary social intercourse. The most common among these exclamations are 7 A ! T \ Aa! 7 ? Am ! T ^ Ail r 4 & Aiia, ! p y n 4 y 3 Dolckoiaho ! Y - ^ fiomo ! JE. % Eh ! ^ 4 Hei ! ^ 4 Hai I - 7 Ha / -v 7 Ma ! -r ?\s * Y Naruhodo ! ^ Ne ! % 4 Oil % -\ Oya ! 1h Sa / -V 7 Yaa ! -y Ya ! y* Zo ! and many onomato- poetic words. 280. A brief explanation of ihese words will be suf- ficient. 7 A I shows attention, and often assent, on the part of a listener. 7 \ A a! may express either admiration or grief, and, when long drawn out, usually tells of weariness. ^ ^ Eh ! may tell of dislike. It is also an equi- valent for wonderment, and often of sympathy, on the part of one listening. 7 ? A.ra ! tells of either joy or fear. Spoken quickly, chiefly by women, 7 ^ Ara ! shows sur- prise. 7 A A.i ! often answers a call, 7 -f # Altai tells of sudden pain, like the English " Ouch ! " ^ % 4 Itai ! tells of continued pain, p y 3 j DoJfkoi ! or K y = 4 y 3 DoMeoixho! is a signal for encouragement, like the Eng- lish " Now altogether ! " spoken when several persons make a united, laborious effort ; or, it is like the English "Up she goes ! " exclaimed when a person lifts a heavy burden. K *> ^e DiJmo ! shows the speaker to be puzzled, not knowing just what to do, or as telling how difficult was the situation he is describing. ~. 4 Set! and .* ^ Hai! we THE PAKTICLES : INTERJECTIONS. 177 exclamatory acknowledgments that the speaker has heard what was said to him. >* Hd ! is an expression of atten- tion, often of assent. -v T M3i ! means surprise, and wonder, like "Oh!" and also entreaty like "Do! do please ! " -f ^ * p NaTUliodo ! stands for attention, sur- prise, sympathetic wonderment in conversation. Generally, to foreign ears the interjection Naruhodo ! seems repeated with embarrassing frequency. It is like " Really ! " " You dont say so ! " " Indeed ! " and like interjections in English conversation. -^ Ne! is in more common use in ordinary conversation than even -?- /^ * Y NfirtlJlOclo ! -?- ^ * F Naruhodo is a listener's word; -3- Ne ! is a speaker's word. It calls attention to a preceding word or clause, and often has the force of the interrogations, " Isn't it ? " " Don't you think so ? " &c. % ^ Oi ! is a call, summoning a servant or an intimate friend. % -y Ot/fl ! is an expression of astonishment ; it is ordinarily a woman's exclamation. -9- r Sa ! is an exclamation to arouse one to action. -\- 7 Ya, ! an expletive accompanying expressions of profound contempt. -Y Yd ! shows pleasurable excitement over what is being witnessed. It is often heard in theatres as an expression of applause. 3 Yo I indicates address to some one. 3 Yo ! generally means emphasis, and often warning, y Zo ! added to a word gives it strong em- phasis. CHAPTER IV. SOME PECULIARITIES IN ENUMERATION. Iu addition to what has already been said, (82 9O) concerning the numerals used by the Japanese, a few notes showing certain SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS OF ENUMERATION should be noted. 281. 1. NUMERAL AUXILIARIES. In counting objects, the Japanese usually enumerate them as so many things of a certain kind, or class. They seldom associate numbers and nouns as these are associated in English. Ordinarily the noun is spoken first, the numeral and class following. For example : ^. "* " U A/ fude go hon, " pencil five dick, " = " five pencils ; " $ C, ^ 5 ^ \/\ sarajiu mai, "plate ten flat," = " ten plates," and so on. This peculiarity is very like the English colloquial descriptive enumerations, " five set of harness," " three pair of hose," " two yoke of oxen," " six ton of hay," " four gross of matches," and the like. These auxiliaries to the numerals are numerous. Those most commonly heard are the following : ^ Clio j for things with " handles," such as kuruma, guns, cannon ; also for candles, sticks of ink, tools, and utensils, e.g. ^ ^ (. ^j^kuruma iricho, " t\vo kuruma ;" >.&,< \T>-O^J&. rdsoku itcho " one candle," etc. j^ < Fukil / for things like "doses" of medicine, "cups" of tea, " smokes " of tobacco, e.g. < ^" /> $L ^ < kusuri ni fuku, " two doses of medicine ; " "fb . \T"9 & ( tabako ippitku, "a smoke;" ^^>"f> $/^^< o cha sani buku, NUMERAL AUXILIARIES. 179 ' three times taking tea," etc. There is another J^ (fuku, used as a numeral auxiliary for pictures and maps. lli tr> S.fli / used for so many " fills " of a cup, of a bowl, etc., e.g. t<2jj tr"2frV > fa^f koppu ippai no mizu, " a cup full of water." l[> ^ Hik'i / used in connection with " animals," a "draught" of a net, and "pieces" of silk, etc. e.g. *j \, ^t/vA'^ ws ^i nambiki? "how many head of cattle?" ^ iQ lr O ~tf ki nit ippiki, " one piece of silk. {J/v Roil} used for "stick," or "cylinder," like things, as masts, posts, bottles, etc. ^^ 7o/ used for mats which cover the floors of Japanese houses, and designate the areas of rooms. % \/\ Ufai is applied to " flat," broad things like coin, sheets of paper, plates, etc. iA/ Nin> / is used to enumerate human beings. $^2 Satsu is used for "volumes" of books. For copies of books, the auxiliary ^ bu is used. < Soku / helps to count shoes, socks, sandals, etc. 3- 5 So f is applied to boats, ships, and to all kinds of " navigating vessels." jfo Wa; is used in counting " birds " and " bundles, "e.g. C> %> l/^t> %> tsuru ichi wa, "one stork;" ^ $ /^ ) maki sam ba, " three bundles of wood." 282. There are other numeral auxiliaries in use: like y (/N dai for things supported on abase; like ]fr A/ ken for houses ; ^) 5 tsfi, for documents, letters; -^ \. fa tsuttiii- ini for packages; fy /^ men for mirrors; < fa ktimi for sets of things like suits of clothes, and sets of toys ; *$~ ^ ftttji for line-like things, such as roads, rivers ; ?& intnie for ridge-things, or houses, and many more. The auxiliaries given above, however, will meet nearly all ordinary needs. 180 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. 283. 2. ORDINAL NUMERALS, a. The order of things in series is shown often by the addition of the word ^> me, as a suffix to the cardinal numbers. (84.) 6. But chiefly is ordinal enumeration shown by suffixing the word ]&h/ ban, or )$/(/&) bamme, or by prefixing the word ]\f\ dai to the cardinal numbers. (84.) 284. a. As with the cardinal numbers, so with the ordinals, when they precede a noun, the particle f> no is interposed between the numeral and the noun. ILLUSTRATIONS : I> "9 #> Hitotsu me, or \ Ichi ban, or V "First." i ichi. "Second lot, second ward, Jfita 7i i o/io we ?ji ban chi Mita. f A/ Id'/v > $ t^ 1 The third train." OOTO 0371 77O *>:* < ^^ The chief officer." yakunin 285. 6. When there is a specification in time, place, quantity, or kind, in enumeration, the name of the thing specified is genei'ally interposed between the cardinal numeral and the word ^> me, to form ordinal enumera- tion. Examples : liC %^ *> V> Ni cho me " second ward;" $A/ ^ ^ san do me " the third time; " $LA/ $ yo nin me " the fourth man;" $ V^ & go mai me "the fifth page;" /^^t'^A/ yr> roppon me " the sixth bottle," etc. 286. 3. QUESTIONS CONCERNING NUMBER AND QUANTITY. a. When questions are asked as to the number of persons, or things ? the interrogation \/\ ( -9 ikutsu " how many ? " is often used. But more frequently the numeral auxiliary, representing the object of inquiry, in NUMEEAL AND QUANTITIVE QUESTIONS. 181 connection with the adverbial ^ ^ iku " what number ? " that is, " how many ? " is heard. Examples : lT < (|A/ Iku n i n > a l so lr> <( ?2 ^) ^^ ^ a > i Q asking " how many human beings ?"^^3L('il^< $5 /aie wa iku so " how many ships? " ^-^ ^ l/> < litA/fudv wa ^ w ^ ton " how many pencils?" ^#; ika, or -*^t rfor, or % J nani, "which? "or " what ? " followed by (J * /iorfo, meaning " degree of quan- tity." Also, <) < C? (f> rfono kurai, meaning "which grade ? " These phrases are each equivalent to " how much ? " 288. The interrogative l/> < C? ikura " about how much ? " is used in inquiring as to amount of price. Examples : *t ? ^ .*> 6 3: t ^ ,. HOW much is there ?" ^a hodo anmasu ka ^ ^ ^i 1 " * a " How mucb wil1 ifc hold ?" o nair'i ??iasu ka < ^.^ .^ 6 J t * HOW much do you want?" Dono kurai mmasu ka ft \f< t> tl HOW much does this cost." Kore wa ikura 289. NOTE. Frequently one hears j; yo as a sub- stitute for \^ slti ; ? I nana instead of \^^ shichi ; and ^ kyu instead of < ku ; spoken for the numbers " four," " seven " and " nine." This usage avoids certain ambiguities of sound, and an unpleasant association of the numeral phrase ^ &/^ shi nin " four persons," with the word shinin " dead person." CHAPTER V. HONORIFIC FORMS OF SPEECH. 290. Oue of the great difficulties in acquiring a proper use of the Japanese language, arises from the fact that the social relations of the Japanese people have been charac- terized almost as much by different forms of speech, as by legislation and customary ordinance. Between subject and lord, servant and master, host and guest, children and parents, women and men, words, as well as manner, have been shaped to an exceptionally marked degree so as to show the relations of inferior and superior, real or formal. A few remarks about the honorific forms of Japanese speech must suffice for us in this manual. 291. 1. A foreign student, in beginning the study of spoken Japanese, should remember that, IN SPEAKING TO EQUALS, or to any persons, except intimate friends or his own servants, he should always make use of what are called the polite and honorific forms of speech, especially such forms occurriug among verbs. 292. 2. The student should never apply an honorific form of speech to HIMSELF, or to HIS OWN POSSESSIONS. 293. 3. In speaking ABOUT OTHER PEOPLE, custom varies. If the person spoken of is decidedly superior in position to the speaker, honorific expressions are to be adopted; other- wise, the speaker is left largely to his own pleasure in choosing an ordinary or an honorific word or phrase. 294-. 4. The foreign student would do well not to try to USe THE SPECIAL FORMS OF ADDRESS WHICH MARK THE SPEECH OF SUPERIORS TO INFERIORS. Even with his own servants he HONORIFIC FORMS OF SPEECH : NOUNS. 183 would better be liberal in expressing himself by means of at least polite verbal forms, that is, of those forms which are inflected with the verb ^ ^~ masu. Of course, he should not use honorifics in speaking to his servants ; but polite verbal forms are in place for all relationships except those of the family, or of the moat intimate friendship. 295. 5. NOUNS ABE MADE HONORIFIC by using either . o or go as a prefix. For example : ^ *fc <( o taku " honorable house," mean- ing "your" or "his house;" ? L 5 ^> 9 shochi, "honorable assent," meaning " your " or " his assent." The suffix 3. /^ san, or ^ sama, exalts the name of a person addressed, ^ sama being more honorific than -. /^ van. ?A/% 3- ^ Danna sama is a very respectful address from a servant to a master ; * y 4? 3. ^ Kanda san, is the equivalent for " Mr. Kanda ; " & s\-}- $ /^ ffana san is " Miss Flower." :&><$$ Okusama, is the title given to " the lady of a house " in polite society. The word $ ^ sama refines such phrases as ^ <> *< $ J o kinodoku sama, " I am sorry for you ; " ^ ,5 $ ^ go kuro sama, " Thank you for your trouble ; " ^ ^ t> -T4J $ ^ o machido sama, " I have kept you wait- ing ; " ~fe (^ ^ ^ -^ ^ go taikutsu sama, " It must be tedious for you." 296. 6. FAMILY RELATIONSHIPS receive an honorific or humble character, not so much by the use of prefixes and suffixes with one class of names, as by choosing for the relationships appropriate DIFFERING NAMES, and by adding to them the honorifics :&> o and - go, and $ /^ san and $ ^ sama. For example : The ordinary name for mother is ft ^ haha " my mother," but " your " or " his mother " is called okkasan; " my father " is t, ^ chichi, or 184 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. oyqji, " your or his father "is :&> ^ S> A/ ototlsan, or 9 shimpu ; " my husband " is 7ifa7 danna, or eishu, " your " or " her husband " is ffa7 ^ J danna sama, or > " ^ ^ $> go teishu ; " my wife " is #:> / (/> fcanai, " your or his wife "is $ \/\ ( fa saikun, or ^ ^ $ fa okusan, or :&. ^ 5. ^ okusama ; " my son " is j> ^~ mitsu- ko, " your son " is generally ^> \^ ^ <( 170 shisoku ; " my daughter" is tj*^^) niusume, "your daughter" is ^ t^p> ^ ^/^ojosan; "my brother "is ^> JC ari * (elder), or ^ ^ ototo (younger), " your brother "is ^> ^> ^ $ fa o ani Kan, or ^ ^ \, ^r ctfofo ^o ; " my sister "is , j& ane (elder), or ^ ^ ^ ^ wioto (younger), "your sister" is ^ ?)43t 3>/^- o ae san, or ^. ^ ^ ? o imotogo. There is quite a long list of these relationship names. 297. 7. DIFFERENT VERBS are used by the Japanese to HONOR, or to HUMBLE, THE SAME ACTIONS. A speaker almost always humbles his own acts, and dignifies the same acts when performed by another. Sometimes, a speaker will use the ordinary form of a verb in speaking of the actions of servants, and their like ; sometimes, but not often, he will apply to a servant's actions the humble verb forms. For example: The verb \f\ ^ iku is the ordinary ex- pression for the " act of going." But if I tell an acquaint- ance that "I am going," I should humble myself, and honor him, by saying ^ fo % maim. Should I request him to go, I should honor him by using some form of \T* > O \s*^ irassharu. Ordinarily, " I say," is \/\J^iu- To another I should in politeness express the same act by J *) ^ $>$ moshi ageru. I should request another to " say " by using some form of ;%, ^ \^^> ossharu. " I see," is ^ miru. To another, I, asking permission to look, should use \~^\r>]/^ fa "f" 6 haiken suru ; requesting him to look I should use some form of , fa % 3. goran HONORIFIC FORMS OF SPEECH : VERBS. 1S5 nasaru. > Yaru is " to offer," or " give." " I give to another," using the verb >frf ageru'; "I ask another to give," with some form of < 7 & kudasaru, or < ;ft kureru. i^ty^Morau is "to receive;" but " I receive from another," using some form of \r**fe'? < itadaku. -fc^. Tdbe.ru is " I eat; " but I request another to eat, with #> lx %) & mes hi agaru. 298. NOTE. The POTENTIAL FOKMS of ordinary verbs are in a measure honorific ; and in common polite intercourse they are often heard, especially when persons are spoken, of. 299. 8. From what has just been said, it is evident that FORMS FOK ADDEESS TO OTHERS BECOME OF SPECIAL IMPORT- ANCE. In this act the imperative mode would naturally be used, but the Japanese use the common imperative mode comparatively seldom. In honorific speech an honorific imperative is usually accepted. But various substitute imperatives are as a rule heard in ordinary intercourse. The verbs % $ nasaru " please do," or " deign," and < ? $ kudasaru "condescend," are constantly in demand to trans- form common verbs into polite imperative phrase. (193). For example : The common verb / { J ^~ naosu " mend," if used in a request would not be / { $ naose! " mend ! ", but probably would be / JJ \^^. ^ ?c \r> naoshite kudasai " mending condescend," = " Please mend this ! " or it would be > % { J ^ / 5, ^ -tj- o naoshi nasai mase "honor- ably mend deign," = "Please mend this!" So, &*&* < 7 5 V* misete kudasai, or ^ ^^ ^ 5. ^ o mise nasai, not ^^j- mise ! would stand for " Please show me." Seldom would one say ^ ^ mate ! " Wait ! " except per- haps to a coolie ; he would get around the blunt word with :& t, % 5. ^ o machi nasai " Please wait ! " Less often would be say ^ koi ! " Come." Hardly would he say this at the present day, even to a coolie. The least 186 SECTION II. ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR. polite phrase one would commonly use for " Come ! " would be ^ (/> - o ide, the honorific o with " Come ! " To equals he would say, ^ \f\ -> ^ ^ \^> o ide nasai ! But to unfamiliar friends, to guests, and to superiors he would at least say \s\ t? -2 \s^ I/N irasshai ! the honorific imperative, request- ing one to come. 300. As a general rule, there need be no hesitation on the part of the student in using polite and honorific forma of speech, when holding social intercourse with the Japanese people of all classes. Politeness, in word and in act, is part of the general popular culture in Japan. The extravagant dignity and humiliation expressed in word, and by ceremonial act, in formal, and even in ordinary, social relations are, at the present day at least, but the pleasant forms with which Japanese society is graced. SECTIOX THIRD. PKACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. He (hat traveUeth into a country before he hath some entrance into the language, goeth to school, and not to travel. FRANCIS BACON. A child does not waste his mental activity on vain theories; he goes straight to the phraseology ; he listens and understands, he imitates and speaks. He owes his progress to example not to precept ; to practice, not to theory. It is under the impulse of these instincts that we acquire the language of our parents. The same process applied to any other language must produce the same result; and success will be the more certain, as ice follow more closely in the steps of nature. IMPBESSION of language u-ldch is effected through hearing and reading, must therefore precede EXPRESSION, which is effected by speak- ing and writing. C. MAKCEL. CHAPTER I. ON METHOD IN ACQUIRING JAPANESE. 301. The best method by which to learn Japanese is this: let the student go to Japan ; enter, there, an intel- ligent and sociable Japanese household, and become, in language at least, like a child. As an interested member of the family, sharing with it the home life and its re- lations with society also, he would be master of a goodly domain- of the desired speech before a year would pass. But among the many who may wish to know Japanese, those who can take this best way are exceedingly few : so few are they that nothing further need be said here about this method: nothing except this, that it is the natural way for a real, practical acquirement of the language ; and that, in any method adopted for learning Japanese, it should, as far as possible, be followed. 302. The best substitute for this best method is life in Japan, in intimate contact with the Japanese people, under the faithful guidance of a competent native teacher. The student adopting this method would thereby be subjected to often repeated impressions of the true sounds of words and the rhythm and cadence characteristic of the native tongue. If attentive and inquisitive, his vocabulary would enlarge daily ; and, by bold attempts in reading and in conversation under his teacher's correction, he would make steady progress in fluent and idiomatic expression of what he might wish to say. Such student could hope to have the language under easy command, within a comparat- ively short time. But even this way is fully opened to comparatively few. 303. Most learners of Japanese, even most students 190 SECTION III. PEACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. resident in Japan, do not have tlie advantages of intimate intercourse with the Japanese people, and, except rarely, do not find satisfying native instructors. For this large majority, the method for acquiring the language most available is, therefore, whatever intercourse with Japanese speaking people and teachers may be secured, and, beyond that, whatever may be wrought out through books, that will most nearly make good the want of intimate inter- course with native household, people and teacher. 304. This Manual embodies an attempt, at least so far as the beginnings of acquiring Japanese are concerned, to do what may be done by a book to supply to those who seek a practical knowledge of the language, the aid which would be found in the method of nature. In the preparation of the book it has been assumed that the student who can make proper use of the lessons is intellectually mature. However childish much of the work he is asked to do may be, he is not to be instructed here as one would instruct a child. In a purely natural method imitation and memory are the most powerful agencies in operation. Here these agencies are to a great degree to be supplemented by reflection and the judgment. 305. In the First Section of the manual an attempt has been made to set forth by means of comparisons drawn from the student's own language, sound by sound, the tones and the tone-combinations common to Japanese speech. At the same time the signs by which the Japanese express in writing the sounds of their language were represented. It is supposed now that the student has learned how to write and to read both forms of the Kana ; and that, so far as the sounds of English can teach him, he is able to pronounce, and he knows how to write, Japanese words. 306. In the Second Section a systematized, though ON METHOD IN LEARNING JAPANESE. 191 brief, summary, copiously illustrated, of the distinctive usages regulating Japanese speech was given. It is not supposed as yet that the student has mastered this sum- mary ; but it is expected that in general he has become so well acquainted with the summary that he can use it intelligently iu his study of the remaining, and most im- portant, part of the book. 307. With this preparation we now propose to open the way for the student to become familiar with a large measure of the Japanese language as it is really current in polite social intercourse. The Conversations which make up this Third Section are to be regarded as being among the best substitutes, as far as a book can furnish a sub- stitute, for the companionship of living beings. They are attempts at faithful reproductions of the intercourse of persons imagined to be members of the middle and refined social circles of Japan. They embody just such language as would most become the intercourse of a cultured foreigner with the Japanese people. 308. Through a proper use of these Conversations the student may hope to go a good way towards his goal. As much as possible let him forget that the Conversations are part of a book. Let him look upon them as reports from life. Let him think of " Mr. Kobinson " and " Mr. Mikata " as friends with whom he may associate daily, to whom he can listen until their words are common place and are fixed in memory. He will find at length that these talks cover a large part of ordinary, every-day experience, and that familiarity with them has introduced him into a wide knowledge of, and given him considerable use of, the language he is seeking to master. 309. In order to secure best the result aimed at in the Conversations, it will be necessary for the student, as soon as possible, to understand them just as their speakers 192 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. understand them. The English sentences standing op- posite them are not their literal translations. Literally, it is not possible to carry over a Japanese sentence into English, or into any other Western language, and along with such translation to convey the true Japanese mean- ing. Translation from Japanese into English is a very different thing from the turning of, let us say, German into English. The English sentences here given are to be considered almost wholly as but the equivalents in usage and in meaning, of the Japanese sentences with which they are associated. To illustrate : take the first phrase of the Conversations, Mr. Robinson's greeting to his friend ; " liayo gozaimasu ! " In literal translation, Mr. Robinson in this phrase declares, with an honorific prefix, that, " Early is," or rather," " It is early." In such literal translation these words are to an English speaking person only a common-place assertion about the time of day. But to a Japanese the assertion is a friendly morning greeting. Its real equivalent in English is " Good Morn- ing ! " a phrase which in turn is to a Japanese, in literal translation, no greeting at all, but only an awkward de- claration about the quality of the morning. A German and an Englishman meeting early in the day might say the words " Guten Morgen ! " and " Good Morning ! " to each other, each using a literal translation of the other's words and each conveying to the other exactly the same meaning. But Mr. Robinson may not translate his English greeting to his friend; he must use its Japanese equivalent. Still far- ther removed from use in literal translation is Mr. Mika- ta's answer to his friend Robinson's apologetic inquiry, "Do I interrupt you?'' His reply is, " Sukoshi mo!," literally " A little even ! " Literally, to Mr. Robinson this answer is nonsense, but Mr. Mikata means to say, and Mr. Robinson so understands him, exactly what an Englishman ON METHOD IN LEARNING JAPANESE. 193 would intend to say in the words, "Not at all! ", " Not in the least ! " or in any other complimentary phrase, waiving the apology. 310. So then, in a study of these Conversations, in- deed in the learning of all Japanese phrasing, the student should first seek to understand the Japanese sentences as their speakers understand them. In all languages, words necessarily are used, sometimes man}', sometimes few, which are only different signs for the same things. Sepa- rate imrds are almost always translateable. But very often a Japanese speaker, as we have just seen, uses even traus- lateable words, applying them to relations designated by an Englishman through entirely different words. Much more often, phrases in Japanese and in English, having the same intentions, differ from one another interms and in composition. Yet further, there is never any real like- ness in construction and in verbal content between extend- ed sentences of the two languages. The Japanese language must, in fact, be studied as a development of speech almost wholly independent of any tongue of the West. The most that the English language can do towards helping a stu- dent towards a knowledge of Japanese arises from the fact that English like Japanese is a human language. Conse- quently, to an English vocabulary almost throughout, Japanese words denoting the same ideas and things may be attached ; further, the laws of universal grammar, the distinctions of parts of speech, and their fundamental modes of relationship, may be illustrated for Japanese speech through their manifestation in English; and, as is done in these Conversations, English equivalents for what is expressed in Japanese sentences may be constructed, thereby making the Japanese forms of expression some- what the more easy of comprehension and of appropriation. But, beyond these limits, the student must depend for his 194 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. progress in the language almost wholly upon the help he can find in the language itself. In this connection some counsel given by Prof. Chamberlain in his " Handbook " is worth remembering. He writes; " The student should endeavour to place himself from the outset at the Japanese point of view. This he can do only by dint of much learning by heart. The necessity for memorising can not be too strongly insisted upon. It is the sole means of escape from the pernicious habit of thinking in English, translating every sentence literally from a whispered English original, and therefore begin- ning and ending by speaking English Japanese instead of Japanese Japanese. It is not only that the words and idioms of Japanese differ from our English words and idioms, but that the same set of circumstances does not always draw from Japanese speakers remarks similar to those which it would draw from European speakers." 311. Let the student then, as far as possible, familiarize himself through both eye and ear with the Japanese text of this section, informing the text with the meanings em- bodied in the English with which it is associated, but aiming to make the text his own so completely that he might as readily use its forms in addressing a Japanese, as he would use the English forms in addressing an Eng- lish speaker, when he had the thought common to both texts in mind. This task may seem very tedious in pros- pect and to promise but little in achievement, but really, in time, its slowness will result in the best possible speed attainable when the purely natural method is not avail- able. 312. In carrying on the work of comprehending and appropriating these Conversations the student will find the section on the " Elements of Grammar " especially helpful. Grammar, is not correctly apprehended when it is looked ON METHOD IN LEARNING JAPANESE. 195 upon as the art of speaking and writing a language. Grammar, imparts no power of speech to him who has not already the materials and ability for expression. It is specifically but a record and generalization of the usages which prevail in the speech and writing of those who are considered good writers and speakers. It is a systematized presentation and explanation of standard linguistic forms. 313. As such systematization of linguistic forms and usages, however, the Elements of Grammar here present- ed will be found to have a large value for the student. Constant reference to it will make clear why the Japanese give the distinctive forms to the expression of their thought, shown in the Conversations, and, in general, will explain unique linguistic usages which to the Western under- standing must otherwise remain obscure. 3I4-. But beyond this service, a thorough study of the Conversations in intimate association with the Elements of Grammar will do much to hasten the progress of the student toward the culminating gain which every one must make in order actually to acquire a language, namely independence of a literal repetition of the forms set for him in the models he studies, and power to express his own thought in phrases characteristically his own. 315. The real acquirement of a language means in the end, freedom from a literal imitation of models, and an ability of one's self to originate speech. The best aid given by this manual, or by any other help to the learning of a language, is, at last therefore, just how much it may hasten such independence and self reliance. Indeed, all books, teachers, companions, even the largest and most intimate fellowship with others are to be regarded in the main as only guides and helpers towards the time when the student, emancipated from his pupilage, shall be able to go forward dependent upon his own strength 198 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. and inventiveness. The natural and accomplished speaker is he who has gained so large a mastery of the teach- ings of others, that they all serve him in the development of a language which is characteristically his own. So far as this manual is concerned, therefore, the aim in its preparation will have been reached, when it shall have become to those who may use it, no longer a collection of models to be exactly copied, but chiefly a store of words and of sentences, and of laws of speech, from which the users shall take what they will, combining the words and phrases into new relationships, creating new sentences and distinctive modes of expression, in a word, making the book secondary to self-direction in linguistic progress. 316. There is no more a royal road into the learning of Japanese than into any other learning. He who seeks such path would better never begin the search. But among the ways over which one may enter this domain, some are less difficult to traverse than others. The way which we have here attempted to open; the way of long endur- ing submission to often recurring impressions of sounds and signs of speech; of continuously repeated contact with syllables, words, phrases, sentences and paragraphs, read, memorized, and imitated until the mind has become thoroughly familiar with them as speech or writing ; of study of numerous conversations from real life, illustrated and explained by the general usages of Japanese speech and by their equivalents rendered in the student's own language; this way though seemingly very slow and, it may be, difficult, we nevertheless believe to be comparatively the easy way, and the way really the most rapid in ad- vancement towards the longed-for goal, a practical mastery of Japanese speech. CHAPTER II. THE I-RO-HA. 317. At the close of the First Section of this book the student was recommended to make himself familiar with the Katakana writing of forty-eight proverbs, and then to transcribe the proverbs with the Hiragana syllables. The transcription was proceeded with there only in part. The complete transcription was left for the opening of the present section, that it might serve to illustrate the arrangement of the Hiragana syllables in the order by which the Japanese ordinarily know them. 318. The arrangement of the syllabary with which the student has become familiar is called the " Go-jil-on," or " Fifty Sounds." There are in fact but forty-seven basal sounds in the syllabary ; the syllables 4 , y and ^ being repeated in the " Y " and " W series," chiefly for the sake of a symmetrical filling out of the table ; and the syllabic ending y being in fact but a variation of -^ . The Go- ju-on is easily memorized ; the five pure vowel sounds <1 9 i f if, e, O constituting a series of sounds to which the nine consonants Jf 9 8 9 t f n, h, m- 9 y, v and W 9 with the five consonantal softenings (/*> yu-9 > ^ tr 0*r< Needle of hole from heaven ({) peeps at. Peeps at the sky through a needle's eye. .space Man's life is but fifty years. . Praise shall be than defame be not. No-blame is better than praise. Unskillful of long sermons. An awkward priest for long sermons. 7. Flying fire into enters summer of insect. Summer insects fly into the fire. heaping mountain that becomes. Piled up dust becomes a mountain. ILLUSTRATIVE PROVERBS. 203 9- Plum-tree under cap (*) no adjust. Adjust not your cap under a plum tree. Thief (sign) *Mi0, rape (') fcws/. He makes a rope, having seen the thief. U e<7 #>& CD ^rlt 5 Cheap thing buyer of money losing. He who buys cheap loses his money. tt * K ^ JVb^ bending if world in keep up cannot. No keeping up in the world without bending. . w* (sfg,-,) blowing wound ("^) obtains. He blows away the hair, only to find a wound. new /bnotes. New things are learned by studying the old. abundant if materials few. Many words, small matter. 206 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 5 t> Smile of the middle in blade (*;,) contains. He conceals a sword within a smile. 35. -t CD $ b ^ .Hand o/ jpa/m (*{) t t ^^ Monkey even tree from falls. Even monkeys fall from trees. 38- t Golden-saying ears to oppose. Wise sayings are disagreeable. 39. Negligence great enemy. Negligence is a great enemy. 40. #>< g> -\^ ji ^4 Winrf 7?ia?i s??a^e a< fearing not. A blind man is not afraid of a snake. Face than heart. Goodness of heart is better than beauty of face. Vermillion with mixed if red becomes. He who handles vermillion is stained red. ILLUSTRATIVE PROVERBS. 207 43. # as for the detestable thing to give ! Give food even to detestable things! tt 4S||(t of toorid ("f^) passing as for log-bridge Man's journey through this world is like crossing a round bridge. A fire-brand to as for fire (""') catch is easy. A brand easily takes fire. 46. Sailors numerous being ship mountain to go up. Too many sailors run the ship ashore. Pokers of the middle from famous sword ("^') Ufco comes out. Famous swords sometimes are made from fire- scrapers. 48. One letter a thousand pieces of gold. One letter is worth a thousand dollars. 5 y y- 2. e "tf CHAPTER III. FRIENDS IN CONVERSATION. I. PROVERB FOR (v%) I. Hearing one thing, he Jznows ten. PLACE : Mr. Mikala's house, Tokyo. South room, opening upon the garden. Mr. Mikata, writing : 1. Mr. Robinson entering, bows, and says : Good morning. Do I interrupt you ? 2. Mr. Mikata : Not at all ! Please, take a seat. I am glad to see you. I have been expecting you. 3. Thank you. Be kind enough to excuse me for sitting down in this way. 4. Do make yourself comfortable ! Won't you have a chair? A chair will be easier for you than a cushion. 210 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 5.^-^ te>^>5 it > i^L-VWfcT (15 ** &*>* to 6. -> 1 7. i/^fc$ W-0^5 ^C fe-ittt rt $OT< 5trv> ^ff i- ^r^ -e tt t> it $t *f, t0 ^-^u$ -e -e it it L^^t S: it -^ ^5 it U^ it T^- it > ti it tt rt fcJM*^ *f, tt^t t it it 2l^6^to CONVERSATION FIRST: (^) J. 211 5. No, indeed ! If you won't niind my rudeness in shoving out my feet, I would rather sit as I am. G. Make yourself at home. You and I need not stand upon ceremony. Say, Yone! bring some tea. Here are some good cigarettes. Try them. 7. How much you must enjoy your garden ! You seem so entirely protected here from the cold winds. It is delightfully warm in this room. Really, there is quite a cold breeze from the north, this morning. 8. Even in mid-winter, when the sun shines, I can sit here with all the shoji open. During mid-day I do not even use a liibachi. I can almost bake myself in the sun's heat Will you have a sip of tea ? 9. Thank you Well, I should like to begin to-day the conversations we spoke of a short time ago. Have you thought out any good plan for them yet? You know that I have a pretty good vocabulary already. I understand much that I hear. Speaking is my diffi- culty. I need practice with a guide like you. 212 SECTION III. PBACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. fc K. 11. *>^Tfe tt 12. $^ - t fit ^T5 -^>5 t^ 6 6 3t -6 > X F A' fit 10. U^L. &L I: t& ft$ fr lie. ^$5 ^5 it ^%r>3tfo ^b ^^ ^' -e a* ^^v ^ ^-tt> ^5 a -e CONVERSATION FIKST :-((,>) J. 213 10. But talk for talk's sake only, is very tiresome. I am anxious that you should be able to use our language freely. If you could do so, your life in Japan would be so much more interesting than it is now. I have been think- ing a good deal about some plan for us to follow. How would you like to talk over the proverbs which you used in learning to read and to write the Hiragana? 11. You are the doctor for this patient, you know. Just as you decide. What is your plan ? 12. Why, let us try to find out what meaning is shut up in these wise words. A pi'overb is wisdom turned into coin. It circulates among the people, and makes them rich. These proverbs are some of Japan's oldest treasures. See ! here they are. I have arranged them in the order ot 214 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it 0*>*> LX it ^o 13. ,3:5 it /> 15. 2r-> ^X i^^2 V* T(^ $ it it J>^' t r ^x ^^ i/t rv j t & ^ I to fc/a < U rt 5C $ ( 21 tt 3teit it j: < ^^7^ .ei it CONVERSATION FIRST : ( ^) I. 215 our " I-ro-1ici." What do you say to making them the texts for our talks ? 13. All right ! But you must be the interpreter. 14. I think you can do your full share. Now, there is the " 1 " proverb. I sometimes think that it really applies to you. Certainly, if it were shaped so as to read, " Hear- ing ten things, he knows one" you would have no part in it at all. 15. Much obliged to you for the compliment. When I am hungry for praise, I shall come to you for a feast. But I know that I do not need, what we call in America, an " Irish hint." 1C. What is that ? 216 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 17. , -e it 18. I: ^A/ ^ <*^>T> lit 7^5 6 -el" =eo 19. ^10 tfc^ tt ^*y-fc/j. it tt -e < < it -e cr< ^?f -e -e- it $ft fc rtt& i: t< t T^^t. it it 21 ^b> l a li ^^7^ ^- ^>L^>^t> CONVERSATION FIEST :((,%) I. 217 17. To be kicked out of a house in order that one may understand that its master does not -wish one to be his guest. 18. That is an odd way for using this proverb. You give its meaning by showing what it is not. Of course, white is plainly white when it stands beside black. 19. Is this proverb true of the Japanese people ? What do you think ? 20. As a nation we are not stupid. We are rather quick to guess at the whole, when we know only a part. Our most popular poetry consists largely of suggestive fancies. Also, we are often blamed for jumping at a con- clusion, as soon as we hear the beginning of an argu- ment. 21. I fancy that your people are very clever. My servants, for example, hear my awkward attempts to give them orders. I am often astonished at the ten things they 218 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ** * lx tt $ to it, 23. t^fct. tt -e I: CONVERSATION FIKST :((,) I. 219 know of what I want, before they have in fact heard the one thing I try to say. 22. Indeed, I think we are often too much in a hurry in such matters. Our people are mentally quick. But that quickness, possibly, at times makes us think we know when we don't know. Occasionally it would be better for us to hear four things, and know six. Even to hear seven things and know three, would often be best. To hear one thing and think we know ten, when we do not know even the one thing we have heard, is not wisdom. This proverb is excellent praise for clever men. But every body should be very slow to think it true of himself. 23. You have been very kind to-day. I am sorry to 220 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. a* K, 21^^ it t)t & /> ^^A/O ^n -e it ^-i^t? ^5-5 ^it tt 26. i. ptf-/ yy- ^' t>t^5 it If, CON VEESATION SECOND :-(3) RO. 221 have taken so much of your time. Pardon me, if I say that your lesson in wisdom is fully as helpful as your lesson in words. I must go now. 24. There is yet plenty of time. But if you must go, I shall expect you again to-morrow. Can you not come in the evening, about six o'clock? Come, and take supper with me. 25. Thank you. I should enjoy your hospitality ex- ceedingly. Good bye ! 26. Good bye! Say, O Yone ! our guest is about to leave. Bring his coat and hat. Take care of yourself. II. PROVERB FOR ( RO. Though beaten in argument, victorious in principle. 1. Mr. E. : Good evening. I am afraid I am late. My kurumaya was very slow. '222 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 2. $ 3,^-,: ? 5. 6. I* fr^ tff ^o 3. >i-a &/,75 tf^5t tf 4. ^j^t ft <6$t> 5t. Jt tt tt ^5 5r^3tf ^Lo 2r t>^ tft ^T^L^to -*'^ ^^ 6 X f *, CONVEKSATION SECOND :-() RO. '223 2. Mr. M. : You are not late. It is only ten minutes past six. Is your man ill ? 3. He is not really ill, but last night he drank too much sake. To-day he is not to be depended upon. He is a good servant, but every now and then he will get drunk. 4. That is a common fault with jinrikisha-men. But, as you know, they become very tired at their work. Then, they easily fall into the habit of drinking too much. My own kuruinaya says, that it is sometimes a case of " Can't be helped 1 " with himself. Please sit there. You see I have treated you just like one of my own family. I have only Japanese food for you. 5. I feel honored that you make no difference in your supper on my account. I like good Japanese food. C. Please help yourself. Will you have some beer, or sake ? 7. Thank you, I will not take either. I prefer tea. 224 SECTION til. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. * b ft ^-^^ I: * * * * * 9. 5 it it I: 7 ^ 9 t^*p^ ^t. it fo y ^ 9 ^ ^> .$ it a t yxtx ; /> it J: t^ ^5> r&j ^i^fe^ it ^ **, T^j ^l^fc^ ti ?>o^r^^ CONVERSATION SECOND : ( ) R 0. 225 8. Won't you have something more? Yone! take away these things and bring a tobacco box. Well, what do you think of our " Ro " proverb ? 9. It is a good comment on what happens every day all over the world. Everybody knows that skill in argument is no proof of truth. Some of the best lessons which American school children learn are, in fact, about this pro- verb. They all know of the lives of such men as Columb- us, Galileo and Luther. Every one of these men was defeated in argument. But, really, all were victorious. 10. Yes ! Let us set the motto down as true reformers. Now we corne to the " Hd" proverb. Shall we name it the motto for bigots ? (Servant entws) : Master, a gentleman has just called. Here is his card. Ask the gentleman to come in. I am very sorry that our talk must stop now. A friend has just arrived from Kyoto. 226 SECTION in. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 11. -e &-!>* -e 12. ^>$^ 1-<- < t 2r6 it Wt w: CONVERSATION SECOND: () RO. 227 He has important business with me. To-morrow I shall not be at home. Can you come the day after to-morrow ? 11. Any time will suit me. My pleasure must not in- convenience you. You are always very kind. What hour shall you be at leisure ? 12. Just after breakfast will be the best time. Come about nine o'clock. Then we can have a long talk. 13. Present my compliments to Mrs. Mikata. Do not trouble yourself to go to the door with me. 14:- It is no trouble at all. And I shall welcome my friend. Have you a lantern ? The night is very dark. 228 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. i6.-&- fc i< e/i/tX I: 6 *to - #1^0 16. : 1. 3. fc tt t CONVERSATION THIKD : (|I) HA. 229 15. I know the path very well. Good night. '*- J ..... 1G. The same to you. III. PROVERB FOR (ft) HA. Peeps at the slty, through a needle's eye. 1. Mr. R. : It is some time since we have seen each other. Did you receive my letter ? 2. Mr. M. : Yes ! I hope you are feeling quite well, now. What was the matter ? 3. I caught a bad cold. The day after I was here last, I went out to Takao-san. The walk up the mountain made me very warm. I perspired freely. When I reached the temple, a cold wind was blowing. I sat down for a few moments to rest and was chilled through and through. 230 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. *ft tt o. -e it 9. -e $^T tt Sr& -e n ^ 2>o^^ -e CONVERSATION THIRD :-( |t) HA. 231 4. That was not very prudent. Did you take an over- coat with you ? 5. Yes ! but I left it in my kuruma at the tea-house at the foot of the mountain. The sun was quite warm there. G. These fall days are dangerous. Mid-day is often warm in the valleys. But on the hill tops the winds are cold. 7. I had a late ride back to Hachioji. The air grew very cold towards sunset. I was quite feverish that night. I have been in the house for almost a week. 8. You are all right now, I am pleased to see ? (Mrs. Mikala comes into-tlie room). 9. Mr. R : Good day. It is sometime since we have met. This is the first time I have had the pleasure of seeing you for a month or more. 232 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 10. (s_*_# &{& It fc-I** ^ tL-C) 7 tt 12. 13.-$ L 14. -e #5/5. $5 tft 11. -^5 is. $x r CONVERSATION THIRD : (|j) HA. 233 10. Mrs. M. (bowing) : My husband has often spoken of you. Are you not cold here ? I will put some more charcoal on the fire. Please have some tea. Will you taste these cakes ? I hear that you are beginning to speak Japanese beautifully. 11. Mr. E: How can you say so? I am a very poor speaker. 12. Mrs. M : Your pronunciation is excellent. 13. Mr. R: If it is good at all, I am indebted for my improvement to your generous husband. 14. Mrs. M: My husband says that you are making wonderful progress. He enjoys your visits. I am glad that you come to see him so often. Kindly excuse me now ; I must attend to some matters in the kitchen. 15. Mr. M: Well, what do you think of our proverb for Ha ?" I suppose that you had no desire to peep at the 234 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. fi fit >tri? fit ^ I: 0*^5 E wt :&t& w: 16. $5 -et u $ ^0^>^ fe7^$5 e 18.- 52P ^5 ttU U fit fi Z&K fit CONVEESATION THIRD : (|t) HA. 235 sky through a needle's eye, when you were on the top of Takao-san. 16. No, not there or any where else. I like a broad outlook for everything. The maker of that proverb must have known some people of very small minds. You well called it " the motto for bigots." "What a fool man is, when he can see a splendid thing like the sky, to use the hole of needle as his telescope ! 17. But that is the way with some people. They see their friends, their business, their country, everything, only through little peep-holes. Of course, such persons are almost always as small in character, as they are in their eye-sight. 18. Please speak more slowly. My ear is not quick enough for your words. I understand Mrs. Mikata much 23G SECTION III. PRACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. 19. 21. it ^ *^* -e ^-^^$^^ v 15^ -e it < t ^ r x -r f-'j ?> < It dt $ It #^X ^?//>V> fit t^^-5 < it lit **, -e- CONVERSATION THIKD :-(|t) HA. 237 better than I do you. Why is it that the ladies as a rule speak your language better than you men ? 19. They have more leisure, I suppose. I mean this. This is the era of Meiji for Japan. Our country's leaders determined thirty years ago, to make Japan as progressive and as enlightened as any nation in the world. But there are some people who even to-day wish that our ancient feudalism could be restored. They are of the kind who look at the sky, through the eye of a needle. 20. That is so ! I sincerely wish a grand triumph for New Japan. 21. Of course, there is an immense work to do yet, But I think that as a nation we are moving steadily for- ward. Do you understand me ? 238 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. tt efc^ 431 Ax * v * v> fc 23. ^ft- 1? ft ^0 ft L 31 fc IT Le CONVERSATION FOURTH: (|i) NI. 23!) 22. Tes, I think I do, clearly. But, if we are going to talk much more over this subject, I am sure that it will have to become a lecture on your part. I ain not able to contribute enough to the talk to make it a conversation. 23. Well then, let us drop our text. This proverb is plain enough, I imagine, with what we have already said. Now let us see what " Ni " has to teach us. IV. PROVERB FOR (it) NI. Man's life is but fifty years. 1. Mr. R: I suppose this is to remind us of the shortness of human life. But why did the wise man say fifty years ? Our wise men were more generous. 240 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 2.- 5 LT -ef **Q 3. fca* < it -e ft 5. Kt rt -e CONVERSATION FOURTH: ((I) NI. 241 2. Mr. M, How is that? 3. We say that " the days of our years are three score years and ten," that is, seventy years. Are the Japanese a short lived people ? 4. I think not. Our statistics show a great many centenarians living, at least in modern times. In ancient times, perhaps the average of life was not so long. But then, this is not a question of exact measure. Both pro- verbs, I suppose, are meant only to remind men that life is short. 5. Possibly it means that after fifty years a man should give up all his work, and become " an honorably retired one." This was a national custom once, was it not ? 6. You are joking. But then, what you say is good practice in language. I do not see that we can argue much over this proverb. 242 SECTION III. PKACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL *? it oi^T li *>$/> it tt 8. 9.^ 5 10. 5jft Wt -e it 6X 2&e> -e it, ^* t^// I: fci^LX ^t> I: tt CONVERSATION FOURTH: (H) NI. 243 7. If we tried to, I am sure I should be defeated. I could not resist your army of words. But I do not see why a Buddhistic people should lament over the shortness of life. A Buddhist ought to be glad at the prospect of getting out of existence. Existence is the greatest of all evils. 8. But all Japanese are not Buddhists. Then, again, Japanese are no more real Buddhists, than you Americans are real Christians. 9. "What do you mean ? 10. I mean that Christ's great doctrines of self-denial and sacrifice are opposed to your American self-love and struggle for success. The Japanese are fond of life, and they are a very happy people. 244 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 11- it ct^T It it ^O it r 2. it CONVERSATION FIFTH :([*) HO. 245 11. Possibly, you tire right. But you know you have the advantage of me. If I could only talk, I would tell you much that I think about this question. What do you make of the next piece of your coined -wisdom, the " Ho " proverb ? V. PROVERB FOR (S) HO. No blame is better than praise. ' 1. Mr. M: There is no question about the truth of this saying. 2. Mr. R : Is it so ? Do you believe that absence of blame is better than praise of a man ? We all like to know that the good in us is i-ecognized. 246 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. It tt 5. 4. ^5 -e it ^T^L^^o ^>^ rt -e ?>6 CD tf/Wn^ ti it t^T ti U < it 7^v>t'3 lr<*> it TLZ> tt it ti J;-CD-/S:^ CD CONVERSATION FIFTH : (|i) HO. 247 3. Yes, but this is a fault-finding world. What better praise can you have than the fact that no one blames you ? If one can say, " I find no fault in him," the most that can be said in praise of a man, is said. 4. If you put that meaning into the proverb, you are right. But, if you think a man is a good man, why not say so ? 5. Praise too easily becomes flatter}'. Then, again, a man should not be hungry for praise. Praise tends to make one vain. Every one should do his duty for the sake of the duty only. 6. I admit that. But you are taking rather high ground for weak human nature. If there were no rewards for virtue, there would be very little goodness in the world. 248 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 7 < 8. -fr' CONVERSATION FIFTH: (|i) HO. 249 7. You are probably right. But I suppose that the maker of this proverb meant to speak rather of men as they should be. He knew men as they are. He was trying to lift them to the highest moral level. 8. If we think of goodness as a height to climb, I shall not question the wisdom of the proverb. But it is a hard test of weak human nature. You ai'e an excellent teacher. You are a skillful preacher, too. Evidently you are not guilty of the fault tbat is shown up in our next proverb. 250 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ^ t, -et i T < lT 1? 2. P tf-v y v- ft -ef o L CONVERSATION SIXTH :-(-O HE. 251 VI. PROVERB FOR (^ HE. An awkward priest for lotiy wrmons. 1. Mr. M : You are breaking our last commandment. Yet, I confess, praise is pleasant. Brevity is the soul of wisdom, as well as of wit. 2. Mr. 11 : This proverb reminds me of a story told of a famous preacher in America, Dr. Lyman Beecher. One morning he preached an unusually long sermon. He was very noisy, too, in preaching. One of his grandchildren said to him afterwards. " Grandpa why did you ' holler ' i shout) so loud this morning ? " " My dear," he answered " when I have nothing to say, I always " holler." You see, he had not prepared his sermon as usual. 252 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it 12 M^0% J ^o 7. T^^X^ ^^*Ax it # ^ tfL *>' -e-< ^ w: ^^ it I: b CONVERSATION SENENTH: () TO. 257 proverb ? Oh, yes ! you are thinking about the Miyanoshita beetles. 5. I shall not soon forget our first dinner at the Naraya Hotel. Did you ever see such a swarm of buzzing, tumb- ling, crawling things as we had in that room ? You amused me very much, when you handed back your plate of soup to the servant, and told her, yon did not like beetle soup in summer. 6. She did not understand my joke. But, was not that dinner a torture ? The room was too hot to keep the windows closed. The attack of the beetles was almost like a shower of bullets. 7. I do not understand why insects almost always fly straight for a light at night. When I was in New York, I went to Staten Island and spent a night at the house of a friend. The mosquitoes there were a terror. All the windows in my room were guarded by wire-screens. I slept comfortably. The next morning I got up early and 258 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. e it 8. tt tft -e 5^ i-^tlL ^^ it t,A,& ** -e it it o t *t , <^t> -e I: it r 9 a- A- ^, 6cx Jb$ it CONVERSATION SEVENTH: () TO. 259 went out for a walk. At the door-way of the house I saw a servant sweeping up into a pile thousands of dead in- sects. They covered the floor under the porch-lamp. The lamp had been burning all night. Mosquitoes, gnats, flies, and moths of various kinds, thousands of them, had flung their foolish little bodies against that light, and been killed. 8. You have just called the insects " foolish." The present proverb must have been one of the easiest of all to make. From the most ancient times, the miserable little summer creatures must have seemed to men like little fools. Near Lake Superior, I have been beside a camp-fire into which insects poured at night almost like a stream. '260 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. . ** it %-9T trL ^ 6K-lf 9. it IT 6 ?> b t**&o It/^trf/i, it < ^- TO. 261 9. Really! Of course it is perfectly natural for a mor- alist to apply this fact to human life. Very often, men are not a bit \\iser than the moths. They see something that fascinates them. They dash straight at it. They plunge into it. They are ruined. Money, fame, passion may all be fires that work ruin. They often do destroy men. Life is full of thoughtless fools. Sometimes they are only singed. They manage to crawl away. More often, their flight into the flame is their death. 10. There is nothing for us to do then, I judge, but to take care that this moral does not apply to ourselves. (Looking at his watch.} But I am taking altogether too much of your time. I think I must be going now. I have no doubt you are very 262 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 11. ^Ax# it ^ S, fc^ t it # 13. a: ^ * 6 sr -e t < it CONVERSATION SEVENTH: (S) TO. 263 11. Please do not hurry away. It is not yet eleven o'clock. There is plenty of time for a little more moraliz- ing. Let me see ! How does our next text read ? Oh, yes ! It is about dust becoming a mountain. 12. You are very kind; but I think I would better not stay any longer to-da} r . I shall come again, at your con- venience. 13. I will not keep you, if you really must go. When shall we take up the proverbs. again? If the weather is pleasant to-morrow afternoon, will you not join me in a walk out along the Akabane Creek ? We can take a look at some chrysanthemums in a garden near Shibuya. I am told that there are some rare flowers there. And we can have a talk on the way. I shall meet you at your house. 264 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 14. L5t> 15. \> OfcOT -e 2. P b- y y -/ - L : J: < &$ ^^^> tt ^u-^to fe^ -$/^ I: *>-? -e -e CONVERSATION EIGHTH: (&) CHI. 265 14. Very good ! As the afternoons are rather short, suppose we start at about half past two. 15. All right ! If the weather is pleasant I shall be on hand at that time. VIII. PROVERB FOR (t,) CHI. filed up dust becomes a mountain. 1. Mr. M: What a beautiful view of Mt. Fuji you have here ! 2. Mr. R : There is no other place in Tokyo with a better view, I think. I see Fuji every day, when it is visible at all. In the early morning it is glorious. During this clear autumn weather, at sunrise the snow-covered top is a splendor. The whole mountain pink-white above and purple-blue below, is magnificent beyond description. I send it my greetings every morning. 266 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 3. 4. 4i 3^5$ ^> 6 (i *?^< t -$/ix 5: 6. M ^ X , b' ~ 7. CONVERSATION EIGHTH : ( ) CHI. '267 3. It may be, you worship it. 4. I could easily make a religion out of rny view. There are worse kinds of religion than my Fuji worship would be. o. Have you ever been up the mountain ? 6. I can't climb mountains now-a-days. When I can go up Fuji as I went up Pike's Peak, two thousand feet higher, on a railway, I shall go. 7. Just as well to see it from a distance. I don't think it would pay you to make the climb. There is nothing to see there but lava- dust and rocks. The landscape below is all flattened, that is, when you can see it at all. I would rather see Fuji from a place like O-Tome-toge, than see O-Tome-toge from the top of Fuji. 2G8 SECTION III. PKACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. U 8. >0 ^-5 it 6 E tt ^us- ^3: -et 4a ^^-y-tr/xx ^ ^>e> ^^ it it g ^ P y >N- ^ fi r >* V ^ -^ ^^ -/ it 10. CONVERSATION EIGHTH : ( r, ) CHI. 269 8. A wonderful mountain it is, standing so alone ! It is not strange that the ancient Japanese made so much of it in their traditions. The first thing I had of Japan was a fan covered with a picture of the mountain. In Europe and in America every one who knows of Japan at all, knows of this " Peerless Mountain." It was made in one night, was n't it? 9. So, the story goes. When Fuji came up, the land where Lake Biwa is went down. The gods made an even thing of it for the country N Don't you think we would better be going ? 10. Yes, it is almost three o'clock. I wish I could talk this terrible language of yours. 270 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. e> :&-< fc & it #/)725 Vf t> L t 63t t - t ^^L c5 t L *^* t< Tt$t L ti CONVERSATION NINTH : ( *J ) RI. 271 11. Don't worry ! You surprise nie by the knowledge of it you have gained. Only three years ago, when we first met, we spoke altogether in English. Now, you talk Jap- anese like a Japanese. 12. Is that so? I think I shall set myself up as a teacher, and send pupils to you as my endorser. Let us go out by the back gate. It is the short way to the creek. IX. PROVERB FOll ( /> ) RI. Adjust not your cap under a plutn tree. 1. Mr. M: This is one of my favorite outings. I enjoy the country more than the city. 272 SECTION III. PEACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. /; foflfc V> ft 5 $<*>(/> HC 2. P h--/ y y-t : fr^fc < t It f" S> $ $ t ^' ; ^ <3 It *> it it J:ir 5t (t ^t/^/L- K. t it ^ t % *72 t,^^^& $ fit 7^f,^^ ^ 7X^ ^ it 4. tt Ot^^ fit fit 'ttt^ fit CONVERSATION NINTH : ( *J ) RI. 2. Mr. R : So do I. I often come out over this road. I like especially the fields beyond the railway. There is so much freedom in the country in Japan. I sometimes wander for hours among the fields. No one ever disturbs me there. And I never seem to trouble the farmers. It is very different at home. Everywhere fences are put up there, and one is always in danger of being a trespasser. 3. Yes, our open country makes rambling in it very pleasant. But we, also, have laws and customs against trespass. 4. No doubt. But you*r fields, are very small. The paths in every direction are many. One must deliberately try to go out of his way, to be a trespasser. 274 SECTION III. PKACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. b it K ^O -e ixo ^L b$^ it b fit ita:^^ 3: ^ i^^ t I: I 7^<5. it Kt ii t *^* t?2. ^^07^ t?- it t. it tt, t^\. t>^ tt 1" <* T 5 1 it ft ^ 6 CONVERSATION NINTH : ( *J ) R I. 5. Our next text, curiously enough grew out of this feature of the country which is so pleasant to you. Our fields are unfencecl, and often our fruit trees stand out in the open. The wise wit of the ancients, when they wanted it to show that a man ought to avoid even the ap- pearance of evil, produced the saying, " Don't stoop to tie your sandal when walking by a melon patch." 6. He might slip a melon into his kimono sleeve ; did they think that ? 7. Yes ! So, also, they said, " Don't fasten your cap under a plum tree ! " A plum or two, you see, could easily get into a man's fingers while he was adjusting his hat at such a place. 8. A wise saying it is, too. Few men, however, are 276 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. L ti 2. 3. a e CONVERSATION TENTH: () NU. 277 careful enough about applying it to themselves. X PROVERB FOR (JQ) NU. He maJfett ft rope Jtfiviny seen the thief. 1. Mr. R : But after all, everybody is not suspicious, even when he sees others doing suspicious things. Four years ago I lived in that white house on the hill, that house with the tower. I had confidence in every one about me. As for robbery, I never imagined that a thief would think of entering my house. You know what happened. 2. Mr. M: Did you ever hear anything of your watch? 3. No.i and I suppose I never shall hear of it. Yet, before that night, it would have taken the strongest kind of proof to set me on my guard. I did not suspect that any one in Japan would care to trouble me. But my confidence is gone now. Locks and bars are on my doors and windows. And a revolver lies at mv bed-side. 278 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. t tt -*'/ fit. fc>7^< L I: * *> > 5 rt ^ $ t> ^t -e ^^ 5t> fit 41 7^<$/i' e^^^to 7 ii ei> *L *^' ^-v fit 6 fit ^- ^ < 5. fit ^(t T- 3l/l/ 7^^ ^t. fit fit CONVERSATION TENTH: () NU. 279 4. The same things happen in Japan as elsewhere. There are plenty of rascals among our people. That year, I believe, rice was very high. There were burglaries by the score every day in Tokyo. You were one of the un- fortunates. How much did you lose ? 5. Altogether about 450 y/>n worth. But it will be dear business for any one who tries that game again. The improvement of the creek banks goes on very fast. How much this place has been changed in the last two years ! 6. Oh! in time Tokyo will be all made over. How 280 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. As lie 3^5 -e ft -et & i it tt $? C.^% r ^> I: -e a CONVERSATION TENTH: () NU. 281 warm it is ! The sky looks as though we might have bad weather. In that house Mr. Mumei lives. He had a world-wide reputation once. Do you know him ? 7. Yes, I have met him twice. In America, many years ago, I made his acquaintance. He was with the first embassy from Japan to the United States. He was a mere boy then. Not long ago we met again. I spent a pleasant hour with him on the hill there, back of the house. The years have changed us both considerably. He did not remember me. I should not have known him, had we met on the street. 8. Over there, under that big pine, lives one of our most famous generals. He is celebrated too, as a diplom- atic officer. He was active in bringing about the revisions of Japan's treaties with the Western nations. 282 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it ^ ^ 12. it i: 10. fc** < r ^^ tt ^t ^ U/xtf LX ? ?> 5 E ^ r> ^ to 11. ?dv>--^e: 5 5 a a* /a^> it it CONVERSATION TENTH :() NU. 283 9. These are great days for Japan. The story of this country, for the last thirty years, sounds like a romance. I am intensely interested in seeing how it is to go on. 10. I trust in the wisdom of our leaders, and the loyalty of our people to carry us forward safely. 11. Great success will be really the severest test of the power of the nation. Many dangers are to be pre- pared for. 12. So far the government has apparently had much wise forethought. 281 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 1. p b-v y y-L.: 5 -etc fcft < t w: < t t t^ e> I t -e -e^ ** -et -e CONVERSATION ELEVENTH :() RU. 285 XI. PROVERB FOR () RU. More hazardous even than a pile 1. Mr. R : Yes, I agree with you. Yet, at times, it seems as though Japan's progress has been almost too rapid. I am not a prophet, of course. I am also so good a friend of Japan, that I wish only success for the empire in its new age. But I see one thing piled upon another, to a dangerous height. The forces and agencies of the civilization which it took Europe hundreds of years to secure, are here, all at once, thrust upon the people. It will be a marvel if they can accept them all, and use them safely. It would not be an inexplicable wonder, if under some great stress, the whole pile should tumble down. I do not expect to see ruin. Yet I am anxious about your future. 28G SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 7^> fit ^i & /> -&t < 3. . t ^ fit fit ^%t>3t1 fit ^ fit CONVERSATION ELEVENTH : ( * ) R U. 287 2. Mr M: I have no fear about it. Our people have the most surprising ways for getting along with dangerous things. The Meiji era may seem to be unstable. I don't think, however, that the pile will tumble and end in an everlasting smash. 3. That all depends. Eternal vigilance is the price of any liberty. By the way, have you ever been at Yutenji? One can go to it by this road, I believe. I am sorry I did not visit it before it was burned. 4. It was an impressive place. The cryptomerias there were magnificent. The cemetery is surrounded and over- 288 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. -e -N -e$t tr5 It K. ^ tt- t ^:x?^ ** r >i * T -/ ^ j -e c- ^ ^ $ f o CONVEKSATION ELEVENTH : ( ) RU. 289 shadowed by those majestic trees. The temple was grand in its solitude. The temple grounds, the walks, and shrub- bery were lovely. I have often been there. There was no place near the city so solemn and restful. 5. Which is the way? Its ruins may still be grand. 6. I am afraid that the glory is gone. From here you must cross that bridge to the left. After going under the railway viaduct, you pass through the village of Naka Meguro. Near the end of the village street the road divides. The left hand road leads out towards the plain of Meguro. As you go over the hill into the plain, you will see a large grove of cryptomerias ahead, and a little to the left. There is no other group of trees like it out there. In that grove is Yutenji. 290 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. fe-^H- KZ\^$ to 2. P b--/ y -/-L: 3. -e >63tU-C, 6t rt $7^ -e esvs-To ^^ i: CONVERSATION TWELFTH : (^.) WO (O). 291 XII. PROVERB FOR () IFO(O). ^1 bystander sees eight moves in the game. 1. Mr. M : This is our florist's garden. There must be a good many visitors to-day. I say! Kurumaya,move out of the way. Be careful! The steps are bad. 2. Mr.R: What splendid flowers! I never suspected the existence of such a place as this, here. I have passed it many times, and have not known what it is. It is quite hidden from the road. 3. Twice in the year it is well worth a visit. In the spring, the peonies are superb. In the autumn, the chrys- anthemums are a wonder. See that single stalk! How many flowers do you think it bears ? More than four hun- dred. It takes great skill to bring a plant to this high development. 292 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. 55 -e -#5 jto ^ % 6. -^l^ ^ ? L/lt fit 7.-- T5 WC& ^ % fit tt-e^P -e < ^-> fit Ji fc7^< L ? t> ^ r > 9 ^ P try y -/- 8. i^Y_s/-L : tit^X fe- fit L tt --YS/ $^L$ fit CONVERSATION TWELFTH :(>) WO (O). 293 4. I should think it would. Almost every culor, too, is shown. By the way, I wonder whether a blue chrysan- themum could be developed. I have heard of a man who has offered 5,000 yen, gold, for a chrysanthemum of that color. 5. He will keep his money, I think. Do you see even a suggestion of blue in this collection ? G. I have learned not to say " impossible." Yes, there are tinges of blue in that group. Some shrewd fellow may be yet entitled to ask for the money, if it is to be had. 7. What exquisite roses, too ! And those maples ! Are they not gorgeous ? Ah, here is Mr. Hayashi. * * * It is some time since I have seen you. Mr. Hayashi, this is my friend, Mr. llobinson, of America. 8. Mr. H: The first time I have been honored with meeting you. My name is Hayashi. I beg your kind acquaintance. 294 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 9. p b--/ y -/-U: fc/2< L 13 P tf -x y -/ 11. 1-2. ^ W. $_*_*- 1,: Z\r> t5 1? It 13. ^> ^^, ^.^^^ *f -e's, >$t t^ 66^-^^ ^ ^^^ rt tt CONVERSATION TWELFTH : (^,) WO (O). 295 Mr. R: My name is Robinson. I hope that you will honor me with your friendship. 10. Mr. M: Charming weather, is n't it ? The gardener has made his place well worth a visit this year. 11. Mr. H: Let us sit down for a moment. Nesan, bring some tea. 12. Mr. M : It is getting to be quite chilly. The sun has almost set. Mr. Robinson, is it not about time for us to go ? * * * I quite agree with what you say, Mr. Haya- shi. I shall think over the matter. Please remember me to your family. 13. Mr. E : Let us walk back over the hill. See ! there is the new moon. How exquisite the clouds are ! By the way, do you think Mr. Hayashi really wishes to join you in building the hospital ? 296 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. J4. #if ~eto 15. fc;fc ^ -e 21. p try y -/-L : ~ ^* t it fotb * * * * CONVERSATION TWELFTH: (^) WO (O). 297 14. What do you mean ? 15. It seemed to me that he has precious little interest in Dr. Hatsumei's work. I don't think he was anything like us cordial as you seemed to believe. 16. Perhaps he was not. But then his help is of no special importance. It is a matter of indifference to me whether he takes hold or does not. * * * 17. Mr. R : Will you not come in and warm yourself? 18. Mr. M: No, thanks ! I have had a most entertain ing walk. We shall try it again some time. 19. Please wait a moment. Here is the book I spoke of the other day. 20. Many thanks. Beautiful night ! Good night ! 21. Mr.E: (To servant at the door). Did any one call while I was away ? 298 SECTION III. I'ilACTIOE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 2-2 _, ^ L dc. ^ 2. ^ br-/ y y CONVERSATION THIRTEENTH :(>) WA. 299 22. Yes, sir. An old gentleman left this letter for you. He will be at the Imperial Hotel until to-morrow evening. He had a guide with him. He is going to Kobe by the night train to-morrow. XIII. PROVERB FOR (fc) WA. Even adversity becomes a bridye to pros, perity. (At Mr. Mikata's house.} 1. Mr. M : What brings vou out in this storm ? 2. Mr. R : I got tired of staying in the house all day. The Club is too far away for this weather. I concluded to come over and see you for a little while. 3. You are always welcome. Fom: / Come here ! Make a lire in the foreign room. 300 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. 7. L- (ft >i/>7 r> ^yc it %>& CONVEKSATION THIRTEENTH: (fr) WA. 301 4. Don't go to that trouble, please. 5. It is no trouble. Indeed, the day is so dark and cold that I thought of going there, myself. Let us go up stairs. 6. I should think you would spend a good deal of your time here. This view of the Shinagawa bay would settle the question for me. And then, you have this fine library. 7. I intended to make this my work-room, when I built it. I built the house, you know, just after my last trip to England. But gradually I got to liking the little room down stairs. It suits most of my visitoi-s better. Sit down. An open-grate fire is good company, isn't it ? 302 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. a* 9. 10. 11. ^^ S: 12. (i ft< -e 5 /*,-** U* K. -e ?> 6 $ t rt * $ to $^ L- CONVERSATION THIRTEENTH :-(>) WA. 303 8. Delightful! I have three of them going to-day. On a stormy, dark day like this, a blazing fire does much to cheer up a room. How the wind blows ! The rain has a fierce sound. But, do you know, I don't much care to-day whether it storms or not ? 9. Why ? 10. I received good news last night. I have been waiting eight years for it. 11. I congratulate you. What have you heard ? 12. About eight years ago, I invested nearly all the money I owned in a company organized to manufacture a new machine for cotton mills. I took the best advice I could get. Within two years the company failed. Its building and machines were turned over to me. They had been pledged as security for my investment. But I could do nothing with them for a long time. I could not sell them. At last, I managed to exchange them for some real estate. Then the real-estate market collapsed. For five years that property has been nothing but a burden on me. It has made a stead}' drain on my income. Last 304 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ? 13. ^n ti X/^ L $ 6 -e, ?: ^tT $ < CON VEKSA.TION THIRTEENTH :-(fc>) WA. 305 night I heard that one of those pieces of land had been sold. A new city improvement has brought the property into the market. The prospect now is that I shall get back all I thought lost, aud much more. 13. You are fortunate. But it often happens so. Everything comes to him who waits. 306 SECTION III. PRACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. 14 * ft tt % <* > r tit # 6 $ L 2. P b y y v- tt CONVERSATION FOURTEENTH :(?) KA. 307 14. That is comforting. Yet, prosperity through mis- fortune does not fascinate me. The idea may be a tonic. I prefer prosperity, without having misfortune a bridge to it. XIV. PEG VERB FOR (*:) KA. T/ioiif/h the head he hidden the tail is seen. 1. Mr. M : Shall I have the lamp lighted ? It is grow- ing dark. The days are so short that it is almost night at five o'clock. 2. Mr. R : If you don't care, I would rather talk by the fire-light. You have excellent coal in Japan. 3. Yes, in the far north and in the south there are immense coal deposits. I will put some more coal on the fire. 308 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it v> -e L < Jt t* -e t^ if* V 5 1. it $ ^> )f 6 >6 ^%r>Jto -^t ^', ci li ii^ ^$L> ^ ^c^ -e li fit te^ox ^^ ^> 5-^ fit x v>< ^^ -e ^ 6. $5 -et ^^ ^> CONVERSATION FOURTEENTH : (tr) KA. 309 4. What a cheerful blaze ! This proverb about animals hiding their heads is drawn from a queer habit among animals. We have the same thing in our popular sayings. When I was a child, I read that the ostrich often hides his head in the sand. He seems to think he is all hidden when he does that. 5. I am told that one of our mountain birds is just as stupid. If a man wishes to hide he must be careful to cover up everything that would expose him. For example, don't rob a man's house, and leave your visiting card on the floor. 6. Yes, and don't do what I knew a foolish young fellow do last winter. He wrote a scurrilous anonymous letter to a friend of mine, whose secretary was familiar with his handwriting 1 . 310 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. < t < 7. *?^* o t ^1^^^ ii -e ^> CONVERSATION FIFTEENTH : ( J. ) YO. 311 7. I know a better moral even than that. Don't do at all what would make you try to hide yourself. The hiding man almost always leaves something exposed, that betrays him. XV. PROVERB FOR () YO. A bride will become a motlw-in-law. 1. MK. R : Now let us take up the rnother : in-law pro- vei'b. Is this a joke, or is it a warning ? 2. Mr. M : Both, I suppose. Let us call it a warning to grandmothers. I see in it, too, a warning to all who are in authority. The subject may become a ruler some time. 312 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it 6 *T **o 3. ^* v ^t/v t>> tt ti \^%&\r/(, -e ^5 CONVERSATION FIFTEENTH : ( I ) R I. 313 3. The position of woman is quite different in Japan from what it is with us. 4. So it is. Time is making great changes, however. In the old days, a young wife became entirely subject to the will of her husband's parents. In fact, in ancient times marriage transferred a woman wholly from her own family to that of the man she married. 5. Is it much different now? 6. Yes. I have friends whose daughters are about as much members of their own families after marriage as they were before. 7. But still, a mother-in-law has great power over her son's wife ? 8. Undoubtedly. That is part of our custom. Any change in that relation would be exceedingly slow in coming. 314 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 9. 10. -e try y y-U :- -ef 3 ^o CONVERSATION SIXTEENTH: (f;) TA. 315 9. The proverb yet holds good, -then? If a woman wishes to have her grandchildren kindly treated, she should treat her daughter-in-law kindly. 10. That is probably what it means. Our customs are different from yours. But our family life, you know, does not make our women unhappy. It is not the custom, but the way in which the custom is used, that is important XVI. PROVERB FOR ;fc) TA. A jewel unpolished will not glitter. 1. Mr. R: What a cozy place this isl You have an excellent library. Have you bought many new booka lately ? 316 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. -e % Lft t&As fit Jdt tt - / - -y , 7 - 7C y - x, y- ^x. y $ -e 3. i^^ **^63tLT 210 fe ^^ tt ' CONVERSATION SIXTEENTH: (/:) TA. 317 2. Mr. M: I am ashamed to confess I have not. I brought good resolutions with me when I came home from abroad. I became intensely interested in English history when I was a young man. Excuse me! I will light the lamp. Here, you see, I have Hume, Macaulay and Green. Here is a full set of the British Essayists. I have even the best English poetry, Shakespere, Wordsworth, Tennysou ; and here is a volume of Browning. 3. I have always liked this room. It is more like a home room than any I have seen in other Japanese houses. These books and pictures, and these busts give it quite a scholarly air. Why don't you use it more ? 4. To tell the truth, it was too much up-hill work to keep on as I started. I am sometimes sorry that I have failed. But the fact is, many things have kept me from 318 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. "IS * ^5 fit 6. 5 fit %/> fit &3>6 t>$^$^t^ ^^ (ft i" ^o^t^ >t 9 ti i^^Lt^/x tft tt -e 5. (ft 5: ^< fit 7^0 -f>^ (ft ^T>it - i: L ^ Ht^X ^-^> fit t^/^ fit rt ?>^7^ e> t fit * ~tt fit Wt 6 $ $^< i?w- *>a t -e ^v fit CONVERSATION SIXTEENTH: (f;) TA. 319 doing as I thought I should do. I gradually became en- grossed with home affairs. My memories of England and of your country, of course, I shall never lose. It would be the same with you, should our places be changed, I think. 5. That might be. But I often wonder, when I see this unused room, why you do not make it serve you better. And, do you know? Ithiuk you are gradually losing your command of the English language. When I first mot you, you spoke English fluently, and with almost no accent Now, I can scarcely ever get you to talk with me in English. 6. You are right. I believe I am fast forgetting what I knew. There are good reasons why I do not use my library much. It is true that even talking English is getting to be difficult. Yet, you know I have very little inducement to keep up the old studies. Japan and Europe are far apart in more ways than one. 320 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 7. ^ L i K. ^ 9 - -/ 8. ^>f r* $ t> $ t o >- X V t> ^ te 5 $21^ fit t 1. P tf y y -/-L: ^)g>U Wt tt L ir fel>-Lito ^7^I 7^V^ 4. P tr y y / - $ 5. to 6. 7. tt J: 7^X ( ** i^ craf^jto ^^ t-^$ -e e * CONVERSATION SEVENTEENTH : (ft) RE. 323 2. Mr. M ; I will close the blinds. There 1 This is better. You will stay to dinner won't you ? TUat is right ! It is about time now for dinner. (Clapping his hands. O Yone San appears.) Is dinner ready ? 3. O Tone : Very soon, sir. 4. Mr. M : Mr. Robinson will take dinner with me. 5. Yone : All right sir. Dinner will be ready in a few minutes. Shall I serve it here, sir. 6. Mr. R : (interposing') Oh no ! let us have it down stairs. 7. Mr. M: Very good I Call us as soon as things are ready. 8. Mr. M : Please sit there. It is much colder here, than up stairs. Bring another hibachi. Don't you want to put on your overcoat ? 324 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. >, TJb/2< t- x *U Jr tr y y y frj 10. 11. U^lx -^^ tt 3-^ J: 12. 4-*, Jb7^< I/ rt 13. 6 n CONVERSATION SEVENTEENTH : (ft) RE. 325 9. No indeed ! I am perfectly comfortable. (Mrs. Mikatafrom an adjoining room says to Yone, " fetch me the brown rug." The rug is brought, she wraps it about Mr. Robinson's shoeless feet, saying with a laugh, " We keep our feet warm by sitting on them." Mr. Robinson protests, but accepts, and adds.) I am very rude to trouble you so. 10. Mr. M : Let me give you some hot sake. It will take the chill off the room. 11. But the room is not chilly, I assure you. Please do not trouble yourself any more on my account. There ! I have pushed my foot against you. I am very awkward. 12. No 1 it was I who was rude. Don't move. Here is an omelet that you may like. And some fried tish. 13. Thank you! You are always very kind. When I 326 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. tt ^7^ ^-t7^^ Jr t>T>^5 l^T^t e < -e, r^n wt r^*t t^ 7^L$L^ t*J JtX fc/^ ^^^ ft K *$ 5^ it -3$ ii #6 ^ 5 it tf 5 ** 6 4:6 2:6 fctt it 5:5 t> it fel>-t^, ^A.( ^-^r o^ *.&$ it it it OE< it ^$lr i ir ^tr^ it fe^cxL ^ o^ rt it 21- ?: $ u^r v>i>x, ?>^^t, it ^^/>to ^^* it i^-et *^, *$5^r rt it T-^ o t^5 it it, ^$ (i r-e it CONVERSATION EIGHTE l-.NTH : ( * ) -SO. 331 ousy. He gradually became cruel to her. He finally ac- cused her of unfaithfulness. She denied everything, but would explain nothing. The next night she went out into the garden. He followed her infuriated, with sword un- sheathed. She was not to be seen. With lantern then he sought her. He found her at last. She was dead ; killed by her own hand ; the victim of his insane suspicion. 2. Mr. E : Thank you for the song. But what a tragic story ! 332 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL 3. ? ar jr- : fr- 5 t> i . /2 5/i- ' ^ V,- /; -e, t ^ -^ S, K. -e *> 6 ?> % tr 7. ff CONVERSATION EIGHTEENTH : ( % ) SO. 333 3. Mr. M: Most of our best music as you know is sad. It tells chiefly of heroism, or of love, and suffering, and death. 4. But have you no comic songs? 5. Plenty of them. They are not, as a rule however, fit for polite ears. You do not hear them in our homes. There is much need for improvement in that direction. 6. Ah ! it is nine o'clock. I ought to return. The servants do not know where I am. This is one of the severest storms of the year. I should not be surprised to hear of floods. 7. If you 'mast go, we shall not ask you to stay longer. Let me get you a lantern. 8. Many thanks! I will take one to-night. 334 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL < ''-' & T 3L L ( s * ^-U P tf- -/ y -/ - U 2. it t S. -C-to ^/2 CONVEUSATION NINETEENTH :(o) TSU. 335 XIX. PROVERB FOR Intending fo mend the horn, he kills the ox. 1. (In Mr. Robinson's house. Mr. Mikala knocking af a door. He says,) May I come in ? 2. Mr. R : Oh! is that you? How stupid the servants are ! 3. I rang the bell, but no one came. It is very warm outside. What are you doing with a fire ? Hummer seems to have come back. 4. The fire was made before I got up. This room is always chilly in the morning. It is too warm for j-ou, per- haps. You have been walking. We will go into the Japanese room. Why, it is warm ! I have been writing a letter for a home-paper, and I wanted to get it done to- day. So I have been keeping close to my desk. 336 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL t< ^- 7.- en- 8. $5 -eto to #3- ^ y y fc -e, It t- e 3^1^ It to L^>< c.^ r t*>- fr -e ; CONVERSATION NINETEENTH: (o) TSU. 337 5. There is no hurry. The steamer will not be here until to-morrow. In coming over I stepped into the post- office. A notice there says, that the mail will not close until to-morrow evening at seven. But I must not inter- rupt you. 6. Don't go please ! I want to talk with you. I have not seen you for several days. 7. Shall it be the proverbs again? Let me think. We have read as far as " Tftll," I believe. 8. Yes. Come out into the garden. I wish you could have seen Mt. Fuji this morning. Its color Avas indescrib- ably beautiful. It seemed so near and unusually lofty. The nearer mountains, too, have snow on them. That is part of the work of the storm the other day. Let us sit here for a while. Really, the sun is hot ! Well, what have you to say of our " Tftu" proverb? 338 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 9. (i < 11% L I: (i ^^- i: > LX -5 t < Ir < -e to it fc-5 1. P fa- -/ y -/-U: - X CONVERSATION TWENTIETH : (ft) NE. 333 9. It means tbat we should let well enough alone, I suppose. Did you ever hear of " the perfect picture ? " I read a story once, of an artist who resolved to paint such a picture. The picture never appeared. He made many lovely paintings, but in trying to improve them he in- variably did them harm. However, there are very few of us who need the lesson of this wisdom. Some people always overdo in trying to perfect their work. But there are not man}' of that kind. Let us take up the next text. XX. PROVERB FOR (jfc) NJS. The rat-catc/iiiiy cat hides her clairft. 1. Mr. R:~ This is a lesson in cunning, I judge. Don't 310 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 3. -eto fe7^< L^ Ji tr^^L fc^' < it -t? CONVERSATION TWENTIETH : (ft) NE. 341 show your weapons until you are sure of your victim. Isn't that the meaning? 2. Mr. M: Yes, but it does not seem to be very well put. Any rat will run at the mere sight of a cat. There is no need for the cat to hide her claws. The idea would be better put in this way ; A rat-cutching cat will hide near the rat-hole. 3. It seems to me that the Japanese are especially skil- ful in hiding their real purposes. I once heard a man say, that a person in this country who has determined to in- jure another, will hold his revenge for years. He knew of two men who when they met, seemed to be of the warmest kind of friends. But one day a great misfortune happened to one of these men. It was learned at last that the appar- ent friend was back of the wrong done. 4. Yes ! I know. Revenge is part of our old code of honor. But you will admit, that, if revenge be a law, then of course any means to make revenge successful goes 342 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. & t-e lie. ft&bo tic fri. fi . -e CONVERSATION TWENTY-FIRST: (ft) NA. 343 under the shadow of the law. I do not defend the old code. You would uot defend the Italian lago, I know. He smiled, and smiled, and yet he was a villain. 5. Of course not ! Treachery, however, has no allowable place any longer. If men must be enemies, let them be enemies to the face. Let them fight out their quarrels honestly at least, if they will quarrel. What is the pro- verb you have for the next syllable ? XXI. PROVERB FOB (#) NA. Bees stint/ a weeping face. 1. Mr. M: Only a quaint, old saying, that tells of the queer fact that misfortunes never come singly. 344 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL -e (i ^ L -e CONVERSATION TWENTY-FIRST :(/*) NA. 345 2. Mr. R : Is it true that Japanese bees will sting a man who is crying? 3. How do I know ? At any rate, that is what the " wise saw " said. But even if it is not true, the thing it aims at is true. Don't you find it so? 4. Certainly ! The experiences of life seem to come in groups, sometimes good and sometimes bad. We say in our country, " It never rains but it pours." But the pro- verb teaches this lesson, does'nt it ? If one carries around a cheerful face the bees will let him alone. I knew a remarkably successful business man, a few years ago. He said, 'that when he was a boy, his mother told him to keep up a brave face under all circumstances. She urged him, when he started out to find work, never to complain if he did not find work at once. If he had to wait a long time, and even if he grew hungry waiting, she commanded him always to wear his best clothes, and never to tell of a hun- gry stomach. He succeeded because he always seemed to be successful, he said. 346 SECTION HI. PKACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. Kl, 1~<* fit **t #? ^^ ^ #, 1*5 # it ** fc -t?f i: T^tH- ti t- b^- U tt CONVERSATION TWENTY-SECOND :-( f>) RA. 347 5. Yes, many men are like wolves. They would soon- er kill their sick and wounded than help them. Kindness to those who are unfortunate and weak belongs to a high civilization. XXII. PROVERB FOR ( ,) A fallen flower returns not to it* branch. 1. Mr. R: What a rare day! It makes me want to lie off on a hill-side somewhere and simply enjoy the world. 348 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL ft V- * ' > #** 5: (it 2? $ t> 3t to 3. ^ tt ^^c tt lit ^c:-^ -e ^t-^-t fe^ jt -e, it. CONVERSATION TWENTY-SECOND :-( f> ) RA. 349 2. Mr. M: I don't know whether I like autumn more than spring, or not. But certainly there could be nothing more delicious than this soft air. 3. About ten clays ago it was simply perfect here. That was just before the big storm. Across the valley the coloring of the trees was superb. That tree near the cryptomeria was fairly n blaze of scarlet. That icJto was a mass of gold. All around the garden, purple, brown and green foliage covered everything. Even the roses were blooming, as though summer had not passed. But now look at it! All the trees except the evergreens have lost their leaves. The storm tore them away. The sun fairly roasts us through the bare branches. 350 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. L It 7 y -> :&-lr1? fit tt ftt/^/l. fit ^ s. (ft -/ y - -e e^ tl t^-<*fc^ IT*. t s -y -e- -e c. ^Lt 6. CONVERSATION TWENTY-SECOND : ( f, ) RA. 351 4. Have you been at Oji this year? The maples there are unusually rich. At least the}* were before the storm, a friend told me. 5. I have not gone out there this year. But I intended to go to ]Sikko last week. I should have gone, but for the rain. The road up to Chuzenji is glorious, if you take it just at the right time. Last year I was at Miyanoshita at the end of October. The walk to Kiga is bordered by gorgeous color. But the show is over everywhere, now. I have had the leaves here all swept up and burned. 0. It is about time for me to go down town. Mr. Haya- shi has done better than you thought he would. We are about to build an experimental hospital for Dr. Hatsumei. Mr. Haynshi has subscribed 500 yn towards it. 352 SECTION III. PKACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 7. #*{*:> 3 n. #^5 -et t >, ^ L X *> /) J t * jfi H $ ^ ^ fit J> 6 &K. 5 ^^ t- it tt it -t? t> i o ^ ft ^ l>? L * tft ^" C. 5f fc ^ (i r- -t? $^^ it L ti 01^ te> *t>?zf f- -y -/ x? ~ CONVERSATION TWENTY-SECOND :(,) RA. 353 7. Indeed! Then I congratulate you. Let me pay for a bed in it. I can not do much, but every little will help. 8. Thank you, sincerely. I shall expect to see you over at my house soon. Do you know we have talked through about half of our texts ? And just now, as I think of it, all the proverbs we have had so far, suit the scene around us perfectly. 9. So they do ! Who invented the verse for I-ro-lMt ? Rather melancholy poetry, is it not ? It was only the other day I read the rendering which Prof. Chamberlain gives of it in his book on "Things Japanese." Have you seen it? 10. No ! How does he srive the verse ? 11. He says, it is of Buddhist origin, founded on one of the Sulra*. He transcribes it according to modern pronunciation. As far as we have talked he renders the 354 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. v*t $-e it li 12. -et *f, ft T>^ TA.J ^ X ?r/)tto L^t te> ^^^ rt -e *> -efo 3: -e ^<, tLt-fc^5 ^ tz -e Ji CONVERSATION TWENTY-SECOND : ( f, ) RA. 355 initial syllables of our proverbs in this manner ; " Iro iva nioedo, Chirinuru wo Waga yo tare zo Tsune naran ? " His rendering runs ; " Though their hues are gay, the blossoms flutter down, and so in this world of ours who mav continue forever ? " 12. Excellently done ! It is difficult however to render the old idea perfectly. He comes very near it. But, the last syllable, we have not had yet. That is .Mi/. He makes it N. The two, however, are practically one and the same. MJll is the ancient form of JV. I have selected a proverb in Dfu for your benefit. I do not mean for your moral, but for your intellectual, good. This is it. 356 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. -C-LX, X 1. P try y -/-L: fcft< L t 6 ti (it X (^ t * /u ^ ^> < t> CONVERSATION TWENTY-THIRD : (f) MU. 357 XXIII. PROVERB FOR (tr) MU. Reason slu'in-kti brrck ivlicn 1. Mr R : I understand the meaning of these words thoroughly, I think. I saw an illustration of them at the Shimbashi station, a short time ago. I was about to get into a train for Yokohama. I heard angry cries. Just then two men came tumbling out of a third-class carriage. Both fell upon the pavement. One of the men suddenl}' released himself from the other's clinch. He jumped up and kicked the other man full in the face. The other was knocked senseless. But this did not stop the one who kicked him. He furiously tore off one of his own ycta, (clogs) and began to hammer the senseless man on the head with it. I think he would have killed the fellow, if some of the station guards had not grabbed him and put a stop to the tight. He seemed to have gone crazy with fury. How it all ended, I do not know. The train just then pulled out of the station. The man had lost control of himself. 358 SECTION III. PIIA.C I'ICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. fc-^-e 5. 7>, l^ O 5 < t 2. ^ ^ -t : ^-^^o K*> b fi t^^rt^Cl^ ^^ 1? -e 3. >>r, fe^< L ^t^$^ ^ ^ ^ ^>5 ^f ^^^T lr/)Jto ^^< t ' li CONVERSATION TWENTY-THIRD : (f) MU. 359 2. Mr. M : Yes, reason and passion will not go togeth- er. But I must return now. Your gardener has trim- med jour shrubbery excellently. What fine camellias ! You will have a mass of them in bloom before long. The old plum tree too seems to be getting ready to show what it can do. The pine in your Shochikiibai is becoming rather big for the bamboo and the plum. 3. Yes, I am thinking of having a smaller one planted. How do you like my gold fish ? 4. They are beauties. Well, good bye! Come over soon. 5. By the way, I almost forgot to thank you for the delicious persimmons you sent me the day before yesterday. 360 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL UX I: 6 * 6. -rr- o L -e 3. t 4. i (1, 1 1 6. ^n -C- rt ft ^ *9^< L lit ^OT 6. ."5 CONVERSATION TWENTY-FOURTH : ( -J ) U. 361 6. Pray, don't mention it. XXIV. PROVERB FOR (*j) U. An c(/(/ -jdai it does not (/row from a melon seed. 1. (Mr. Robinson, to servant at Mr. Mikata's house.) Is your master at home ? 2. He is absent just now. 3. Will be be back soon ? 4. I will go and inquire Madame says, that master will return before long. She invites you to come in. 5. Please present my compliments to madame, and say that I shall come back in an hour or two. Yet, wait a moment. I will go in now. I suppose your master will not be long gone. 6. This way, please sir. 3:12 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 7. 5 * g- L < it e % ^^ /> ^ it 10. tt * < it CONVERSATION TWENTY-FOURTH : ( } ) U. 363 7. Mrs. Mtlcata : Ah ! Mr. Robinson, you are very wel- come. Pray, be seated. Mr. Mikata went to his brother's office about an hour ago. I am expecting his return at any moment. What have you been doing lately? 8. I went to TJeno yesterday, and spent most of the day there. I was particularly interested in the Fine Art Exhibitions. The pictures in European style I studied for some time. They are much to be commended. It seems to me, however, that their coloring is rather heavy. They promise well. But, do 3 r ou know ? I think the hand of artistic Japan shows itself in almost all of them. It will be a long time before the influence of the centuries here can be removed from art. The styles of art in Europe and in Japan are quite unlike. 9. Mr. Mikata docs not approve the attempts which some of our painters are making. Ho is in favor of most things foreign, but the new art he does not like. 10. Well, for my part, I prefer in Japan the old style. I was charmed beyond telling, with some of the purely 364 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it t>t:^5 (It ^A,^-< i^ft US 11. I: ^7^ it. tt *97^$ 13. -7-^ 1. -L: 5 < to 2. P b-y y V-L: 5 -e ^07^ CONVERSATION TWENTY-FIFTH : (* (W)I. 3G7 12. Have you been waiting long ? 13. Not long. Mrs. Mikata has been making the time pass vei-y agreeabl}'. How goes it with you ? XXV. PROVERB FOR (&) (IF) 1. Tlic /'roy in T CONVERSATION TWENTY-FIFTH :<*>) (W)J. 369 4. Ignorant prejudice is one of the difficulties hard- est of all to overcome. Once, when I was a boy, I went on an errand to a tailor's shop. When I got to the shop I was frightened by dreadful noises from up stairs. I found out afterwards that the proprietor was having a fist-fight with some of his workmen. They had broken into pieces a sewing machine, which he had put into his work-shop. The men imagined that the machine would soon throw them all out of work. 5. Is that so ? I did not know that such things ever happened in the United States. 6. Oh ! they happen everywhere. The most absurd things are told about the first railways in America, about the first reaping machines, the first shoe-making machines, the first power printing presses ; in fact, about the first everything that means progress and greater prosperity. There are so many men who can not see beyond their noses. 370 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. It tt $ > t> ** *P^> 5 it 7^< S-x^x > -eto 7. $5 -et ^*- y ~e <*? s/x it ! CD r>^ it ^ ?>^-5 %!>$ to -et ^ 2. P br-/ y -/-L: .> tfc^ ^^> it it t/v ^ ** 6-5 it ^ ^ -5 J: {J^* it CONVERSATION TWENTY-SIXTH :((?)) NO. 371 7. Yes, we have had plenty of illustrations of that short- sightedness during the last thirty years in Japan, too. Yet, people soon forget how foolish they were, when they are enjoying the good things which they once tried to prevent. The truth that is shut up in one of the proverbs I selected for your benefit applies to multitudes of people. 8. Which proverb is that XXVI. PROVERB FOR (>) NO. If a tJniif/ be swallowed its heat in forgotten. 1. Mr. M : The one that tells of how we forget the heat as soon as we have swallowed the mouthful. 2. Mr. R: To a certain degree, doubtless that proverb tells a pleasant truth. But its application is not so broad as that of many others of the wise sayings. Only this morning I was compelled to accept an unpleasant ex- 372 SECTION III. PRACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. 3. rt bbtt of 1^6 e> L rt ox L tt i^f # t fc *>&& 53: K. 6 it CONYEBSATION TWENTY-SIXTH : { rt L CONVERSATION TWENTY-SIXTH : () NO. 375 swallow all his reproaches. I do not see how I can remove his conviction that I suspect him of evil. Your proverb does not hold good in a matter like this. 376 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 2. P tr-/ y -/-U: rt ii^ it ^^ ** I: :&% ^^ it ^ L CONVERSATION TWENTY-SEVENTH :(*#) O. XXVII. PROVERB FOR () O. A devil's prayer. 1. Jfr. M: You think the vounsr fellow sincere? 2. Mr. R : I have no reason for doubting him. I should rather say that he is weak-minded than that he is a hypocrite. It is just possible, too, that his sense of personal honor is so tender that it shrinks even from a touch. It may be that his affection for me is so strong that he can not bear even a question from me, while he would endure downright accusations from others. What I feel most troubled about is, that all I have done for him for the last three years has not aroused in him a confidence that would prevent him from thinking that I meant more than I said. I despise hypocrisy. And I demand in my friendships a confidence that will assume my honesty and frankness throughout everything. 378 SECTION Ilf. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. -e ti 7 fttT ito 5. ^^ ^-^^a ^tt it CONVERSATION TWENTY-SEVENTH : (fc) O. 379 3. You are rather exacting of weak human nature. Men judge others by themselves. 4. That may be. But there are traits which all honest men should show. One of these traits is confidence in their friends until compelled by clear proof to doubt them. I would rather have faith as a permanent thing in iny character, and suffer loss by having it, than a chronic suspicion by which I might gain much. 5. That is generously spoken. But it is not worldly wisdom. I mean rather, it is not the rule by which most men work. Confidence is a treasure that costs much to get. At what point a man can trust neighbors or friends fully, is one of the hardest of all questions to answer. 380 SECTION III. PRACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. a* -ea it r 6. t*L (i ^0 jf|i^ 5 lit $5 V>^, ^^3t to t*t t |r^5 it ^t^T^ $*//^5 & t>t *s ft^JUX,. a* L/t? T^>, $a*L< < LX ^ ^^7^< <'fc^ feiit K c>$ tt. it ^v> ^<$- it it tt CONVERSATION TWENTY-SEVENTH : (**) O. 381 0. Yes, I know that. On your side is such a series of facts as these, which, long ago, took place in my native town. The cashier of one of our banks was a cordial, popular citizen. His wife died, leaving him desolate. Not long afterwards, two strangers came to the town. One of them "was suffering, apparently, from consumption. The other was the invalid's brother. The well man had plenty of money. He soon became acquainted with the cashier, and at times placed large deposits of money in the bank. The cashier's wife had died of consumption. The cashier's sympathy, therefore, went out to the two strangers. An intimate friendship gradually sprang up between the cashier and the well brother. This brother at length became a frequent visitor at the cashier's house. He went freely to the house, as I come here. This intimate relation- ship grew stronger through a large part of the year. The stranger became a regular church-goer, too. He even took part in the most sacred act of Christians, the Lord's Supper. The cashier was a truly sincere religious man. "Well ! I must make a long story short. The stranger at length concluded that the climate of that place was " very good for his brother's health." He " decided to buy an estate near the town." All this was made known to his 382 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. %? ^>5 it tl/>5 it 5t> -^ it 7W> #*P It a* <^v^^ it ^ ^t. it ^ it t> J: ^I LX, ^^ tlT I: ?. it it It &< ^^^< it ^^ it > -e ?>/> ^ir -et ^*. )t v-U ^ ^t it t:/) tt CONVERSATION TWENTY-SEVENTH :(**) O. 383 many new found friends. But one night in December, a most startling thing happened. A wild wind was blowing. Snow, sleet and rain were falling. The streets were deserted. The cashier was working in his private office, in the bank. The bank was in a part of the cashier's house. The door bell rang. It was near ten o'clock. A servant went to the door. Mr. Brown, the invalid's brother, was there. He was admitted as freely as I would be admitted here. He went into the cashier's office. He said, that he had just received by express a package containing ten thousand dollars. He was afraid to keep it at the hotel. He had brought it to the bank for safe keeping. The cashier replied that he would take it for his friend, and, he added, that when the watchman came in at half past ten he would open the vault and put the package awa t y. At the same time he opened a drawer in his desk to put the package into it. In doing that, what was his horror ! A cloth was thrown over his head. He heard Brown's voice saying that he did not want to kill him, but that the vault must be opened then. The cashier struggled desperately with the hypocrite friend. The noise of the struggle was heard up stairs by the cashier's brother, and by the servants. The servants ran out shouting for help. The burglar hearing the alarm sprang away from his victim. By this time, men from the hotel next door had rushed into the back-yard of the bank. The burglar fled out by the back-door. He jumped from the door steps directly into the midst of a half-dozen men. He was 38i SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it b^5 it i it ^\, it &< e> it ti lr- t^-fe-ttA' it it I: ftW-T, os,^ I: te> E$ ^- tt it ftT>T it E it 1 1 rt ^tit*^, I: ft^'T ^-f^ J: CONVEKSATION TWENTY-SEVENTH : (fc) 0. 385 caught. He was tried and convicted of bis crime. He is now in the penitentiary. But the shock to the cashier's mind and body was so terrible that within a few years afterwards he died. 38G SECTION III. PRACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. It CONVERSATION TWENTY-SEVENTH : (if) O. 3S7 7. That is au extraordinary story. But the cashier was too ranch like the confiding man of whom you spoke. He trusted and lost. I suppose you exclude bank cashiers from your list of believers in men ? 8. Of course there is no rule ^Yithout exceptions. I am no advocate for trusting in praying devils. 388 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. < t 12 S ft it. ^ > *>^ -e % 5^:0 ** > -e 2. 3. ^ CONVERSATION TWENTY-EIGHTH :) KU. 389 XXVIII. PROVERB FOR ( < ) KU. A door can not be made for a man's mouth. 1. Mr. M : The scandal monger, too, is another offset I would propose to general confidence in men. I should think that your confidence would be somewhat weakened by this time. You have been robbed. You have misplac- ed your kindness. And you know how fiendishly some of your friends have been treated by liars. 2. Hr. B : I know ! I know ! But, see here ! Mr. Mikata, our talk is becoming too serious. I am sure that Mrs. Mikata would rather hear of something pleasant. 3. Mrs. M: Why do you gentlemen not take a lesson or two from some others of your proverbs ? How far have you talked ? 390 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. P b*y y V-t,: < - <& %507 5 5: 5o L to < t. Jt y -e $/S/ it ^^X li CONVERSATION TWENTY-EIGHTH :--( < ) KU. 301 4. J//-. E : I believe we have reached " Ku." What have you to set up as the text for that ? 5. I arn sorry our next proverb does not suggest any better trait of human nature than the one you are now trying to get rid of. This old bit of wisdom says, that " a door can not be built for a man's mouth." 0. Oh ! yes, it cau. Did you ever read "Aesop's Fables ? " One of those ancient, witty stories tells of how at least one kind of an open mouth was most effectually closed. A man who had been in foreign countries, on his return home, you may remember, was always bragging of the big things he had done in different parts of the world. In Rhodes, for instance, he said, he had made such an extraordinary leap that no man could come near doing it. There were " plenty of people who saw him," he said. He had "many witnesses to prove it." "Pos- sibly,"' said a man who heard him talk, " but if this be true, just think that where you are now is Rhodes. Show to us one of those big leaps." That man's mouth was shut up, at least about his big jumping powers. 392 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 1. 2. P b-/ y -et -et 3. fc^ /) 4. ^- 2l^^B> fit r^t' 4:/;, ^ fit 5. />^^^ -> t^^i^ tl fit CONVEKSATION THIRTIETH : { ) MA. 399 arid frail bad stood the storm. He, a great, strong tree, bad been rooted up. f Cease to wonder/ said the reed, 'you were overthrown by fighting against the storm. We are saved by bending to -the slightest breath that blows.' " 4. Cunning reeds were they not? Yet, it seems to me better sometimes to fight and be beaten, than to yield to every passing thing. 5. It is a poor rule that will not work both ways. Now I must go. I have made an unconscionably long visit. Good bye, for to-day. 400 SECTION III. PllACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. b < *> K. 2. ^ I: < t>o) ^><- ^ Ix 1? ofrKfr'Olib o < I: 6$ to 3- 5 3t tft lr> 6 X . p tf y y y t? 4. >>r ^^> i? $ :&- ,1: CONVERSATION THIRTY-FIRST : (if) KE. 401 XXXI. PROVERB FOR (tf ) .ZGE7. He blows atvay the hair only to find a ivound. (Railway station ai Shinagaica. Mr. Robinson comes down the hill in ajinrikisha; the kurumaya running fast. "Hurry up! Hurry up ! " cries Mr. Robinson, " The train is coming." Mr. Mikata standing at the station doorway.) 1. Mr. Robinson : I am so sorry to have kept you wait- ing. ( To the kurumaya) Meet me at Sbimbaslii at six- thirty. If I am not on that train, wait until I come. (To Mr. Mikata.) Have you bought the tickets ? 2. Mr. M : Yes. Come ! The guard is calling. 3. (Entering the train, Mr. Robinson asks.} Are we going second class? 4. Yes. I thought it would be all the same to you. 402 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 5. Jb?a< L -e *i tr^U 9. rt CONVERSATION THIRTY-FIRST : (lj) KE. 403 Foreigners hardly ever take this early train. 5. It is a matter of indifference to me. I thought you usually travelled first class. 6. Only when I take long trips. Between Tokyo and Yokohama the second class carriages are comfortable enough. 7. This carriage is very chilly. There was ice in the streets, I noticed. To-day is the fourteenth of December. It is time, I think, for having the heaters in the carriages. 8. But the days soon grow warm. "We shall find it warm enough, I dare say, before we get to Fujisawa. We shall reach there before ten o'clock. 9. I have not been at Enoshima for more than a year. We shall have a perfect day. The haze over the bay is already brighter. Is not that the old Yedo execution ground, over there by the sea ? In the Tokugawa days that was a ghastly place, I am told. I wish I could have travelled over the Tokaido fifty years ago. 40i SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. $5 -er 10. 11. -e T p 9 * 7&i* a. * y CONVERSATION THIRTY-FIRST: (tf) KE. 405 10. The Jays of that execution ground are gone, never to conie back. I am glad they are gone forever. I do not like to think of them. They remind me too much of what our army is now trying to destroy in Korea and in China. The horrible torture, the exposure of heads of criminals, all the cruelty of the old punishments, and so much else in the old times, were too much like what is now to be seen in China for me to want to remember them. 11. The ancient cruelties are nothing against Japan now. It is not so very long since the same things were done in Europe. The Western nations were made humane in their legislation only within the last century or two. Japan is now doing for Korea and China the same good that Europe and America have done for Japan, and that, before that time, reformers did for Europe and America. Mankind is larger now than tribe or nation. All men ought to help one another, and ought to recognize one 40G SECTION III. PBACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. < >>P- e? ft* -e ^>5>5 ft*, ft*, y ^ 9 ft*, ?>^r> ^ ft*, 12. % -\*b -trt C.ft*> it 13. tfjfttffc 21 /^dt^ -e ti ^*y ft* to * -e j-e ^ < , CONVERSATION THIRTY-FIRST: (ij) KE. 407 another's help, whether the}' are Asiatics, Europeans, Americans or human beings from anywhere. 12. Very good. But I wish Japan had led in these matters rather than followed. 13. But Japan is leading now. Remember that. And also remember that every nation that leads, once had to follow. This is true of nations from Egypt's time six thousand years ago until to-day. 408 NCgSIT III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 2. o try y v- CONVERSATION THIRTY-SECOND : UO FU. 409 XXXII. PROVERB FOR () FU. New tliitif/s are learned &// studying the old. 1. J/r. J/: We are now passing through the shell-heap which Prof. Morse discovered some years ago. See the shells scattered till along the road side. It is supposed that this bank was the sea-shore in past ages. Prof. Milne thinks that the coast is slowly rising. When the shore line was here, the old fellows who lived in this neighborhood used to eat shell-fish on the beach. They left big piles of shells, and also left many of their utensils and implements in the shell-heaps. Out of these old things a good deal of knowlege of the pre-historic times has come to light. I have some published discussions about this Omori shell-pile which I will give you. 2. Mr. E .-Thank you I Isn't this 410 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. (2 L #> > &T y y- /v tf ^ L * < -e ^^t^$U7^ a*, I: t \. 4t F -> tf>< it it K. tn-^ ^ -e, it ^^ IT * it 3. 0, ^$ ?c 0, **t^> $7^ *^ X 5r6- CONVERSATION THIRTY-SECOND: UO FU. 411 Kawasaki bridge view of Fuji superb? The mountain is perfectly white now. How desolate the rice fields ! They are beautiful in summer. I remember the first time I went to Tokyo. It was in the late autumn. The dreari- ness of the empty rice-fields made me home-sick. They are just as extremely ugly in winter as they are extremely lovely in early summer Here we are at Kana- gawa. 3. How time changes things ! When I first saw Kana- gawa I was only eight years old. My father and I were on our way to Yedo from Nagoya. The road there, along the bluff, was crowded. All sorts of norimono, kago, carts, horses and post-travelers, were going and coming. We spent the night in a tea-house over there. Yokohama then was almost nothing. Now Yokohama is everything, and this miserable place is almost nothing. 412 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. Ji 4. fe-jf^t #t^3t-*^a> y y T^O JJA' -eto y^- 2. p \fy y y-L: -e CONVERSATION THIRTY-THIRD : ( ; ) KO. 413 4. Mr. It. Wake up ! We are at Fujisawa. We are only fifteen minutes late. I thought that when we stopped at Hodogaya we were in for a long wait. Trains are very irregular these days. They war upsets the whole time table. XXXIII. PROVERB FOR () KO. Many words, little matter. 1. Mr. M : You get the kuruma, please. I wish to step over to the tea-house for a moment. 2. Mr. R: (To a kurumaya.) Here! I want two jin- rikisha. We wish to go to Enoshima, to take tiffin there, and afterwards to go on to Kamakura for the five o'clock train. How much will you take us for? 414 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. lit * -* * 7 -^ ir> < > ti ft*, lr < 3. --- M( 6 -e ^ < 5. 5% 6. 7. ^LX ^ ^^4tt> ^ V ^)^^lA (i v> /> $ t 8. >f-v I: L ^^^^ 1 1? Cr- 10. L^^^X kl*^ ^r^X li U*^ ** 11. -- M/O -^^ -tr ii (ittc?-^Ax -e It CONVERSATION THIRTY-THIRD ; ( : ) KO. 415 3. Yes sir ! Do you want two men for each jinrikislia ? 4. No ! One will do. 5. The road is very bad, sir. 6. Nonsense ! How much will you go for ? 7. It will take all day. Do you want a guide for Eno- shima ? 8. No ! I want nothing except what I am asking for. Why don't you answer my question ? 9. Well, sir, if I go on to Kamakura, I shall have to stay there all night. If I could get back home before evening, it would make a difference. But it is dark at five o'clock, sir. 10. Don't stand there chattering like that, but tell me how much your fare is ? 11. Yes sir! I shall have to ask you eighty sen. 12. Eighty sen? Ridiculous! I suppose, because I am a foreigner you think you can put on fancy prices. That 41G SECTION HI. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 5 14. ?$ / i 15. to 16. , _y 9 M />P6> ar - * 7 J-e -e ^ ^ li ;? 5 3- fo b 17. CONVERSATION THIRTY-THIRD : { ; ) KO. 417 won't do at all. I will pay you twenty sen to Enoshima, and then I will give you twenty-five sen from there to Kamakura. 13. Oh! sir, that is too cheap. I will go for sixty-five sen. That is the real price. 14. Rubbish, I tell you! If you will go for forty-five sen I will take you. If you won't go for that, I will rather walk than be imposed upon. 15. Please give a little more, sir. 16. Forty-five sen is plenty for the trip, It makes no difference to you, I know, whether you sleep in Kamakura or here. Yet, while I do not like to give it, I will say fifty sen for the trip. If you won't take that, it is easy enough to get men from Katase to Kamakura for a decent price. Here is the gentleman who is going with me. 17. All right, sir. I shall have the jinnkislia here in a moment. 418 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL L -e -eto 2. P by y y-U : 3. $5 -eto > t fe-x> ** T^OX ^>^r *t -e f- ^ -/ X ^ *i* -* vv % TL%^*> Z tt CONVERSATION THIRTY-FOURTH :-(*.) E. 419 XXXIV. PROVERB FOR (fc?) E. Conceals a sword within a smile. 1. Mr. M: You would not imagine, to look at it now, that six hundred years ago this neighborhood was one o f the most populous parts of the empire. It certainly was the most important place in Japan. 2. Mr. R : Fortunes change much in time. And was it not near here that Nichiren, who is called the Luther of Japan, had some of his wonderful experiences ? 3. Yes! Not far ahead on this road, is a temple built upon the spot where the enemies of the reformer tried to have him put out of the way. You remember the story ? 4. Yes, I saw a good picture of the scene at the Ueno Art Exhibition not long ago. It was capitally done. The 120 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 7. 6 $ L ^ a-*^ 9 e> ^ a t it 6. fe/^< t Ji fr% L7^ **, $> t (i ti $<-^3iA, _7 y / $ it ** - ^-/ -e, ^0 -> it (^07^ feij-tf^ t?u J: CONVERSATION THIRTY-FOURTH :( 1) E. 421 executioner was amazed, at finding his sword powerless on the saint's neck. A lovely light irradiated Nichiren's face. How much alike many Buddhist and Christian symbols are! 5. Nichiren died, you know, at Ikegami, not far from Omori, where we saw the shell-heap. 0. I have been at the great October festival at Ikegami. The grove is one of the finest I ever saw. Does it equal the one at Yutenji? 7. It is larger, but not so impressive. 8. Last year I was at Minobu, the Nichireu sanctuary among the mountains west of Mt. Fuji. Nichiren, you know, lived there in his later life, and taught the crowds of disciples who went into the wilderness to hear him. It is a far-off place even now, but among the many buildings there, there is one, the " Temple of the True Bones," which is worth seeing. That is the richest and finest single room by far, of all I have yet seen in Japan. I was astonished at its wealth and beaut}-. 422 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 9. 5 10. -e (fo #0 ^ p b-y y -/- /^ 5 3t ^-^ -^^ it ^^v> ^5 -ef ^LO * * ^< tt * * 12. ^7^6 tt V>L- CONVERSATION THIKTY-FOUHTH : ( ?J E. 423 (Tea house at Katase.) 9. ( Waitress}, Please come in. 10. Mr. M: We have not time now. Thank you! We may stop for a moment on our return. Xo ! we do not need any guide. Wait here for us. Come, Mr. Robinson, let us go. It is almost eleven o'clock. 11. Mr. R : Rather hard climbing over this sand-pile ! Ah ! how lovely the water is to-day ! The tide is very high. How near, Oshima seems. The volcano is having a big smoke to-day. 12. (The friends climb up the narrow, stony, main street of the village. They are greeted all the way by cries of " Welcome ! " " Please look ! " and the like, from the scores of shops that border the road. They keep on up the hill. They pass along the western face of the 424 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ^ bo #11 L t^> fit $^ 6 L ? tt ^r ^W-, ^^it^ 13. \, tf(^L4:< ^t -e wt b^^t^ ^ T * s -> U)<' ,^t> it i< it $ & CONVERSATION THIRTY-FOURTH : (J E. 425 cliff-bound promontory as far as the "Benten Cave." They do not go into the cave, however. They have seen it several times in former years. They do not waste much money on the boys who pester them to throw pennies into the water, and who dive, even in December, for such small gains. The friends have come out for the day to a place familiar to both, just for the pleasure of the air and the sea. After sitting on the rocks for a while, and enjoy- ing the dash of the waves, they climb to the top of the cliff. They go back by the central path to the east bluff, as far as the Kinkiro where they stop for tiffin. ) 13. Mr. R : This is one of the best views I know of. On the road to Atami there are spots which almost equal it. The Uo-mi at Atami is perhaps somewhat finer. Last year in the spring I spent several hours up on that balcony. I am always charmed with this exquisite com- bination of coast and sea. 426 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL 14. Wt > 15. t Ji t **, 5& tl, it O^X -e 2r< tt ^ is. CONVERSATION THIRTY-FOURTH : ( *.) E. 427 14. Mr. M: Look! how the water crawls up to the base of this cliff. I do not like it ; it seems so treacherous. It is purring like a cat ; to-morrow it may be as fierce as a tiger. 15. Evidently you are no friend of the sea. But I believe you are not a good sailor. Now, I am never sea- sick. I would rather take a voyage, than a railway trip at any time. 16. Here comes the tiffin. What shall we drink ? Let us have some Eirin Beer. 17. All right. Nesan, bring me a large cup. I shall eat my eggs in Yankee style. * * * The baked fish is delicious. This is one of the Japanese dishes I thoroughly enjoy. 18. What else do you like ? 428 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 19. ff -Y 7 V-A 5/j f^-J-^-^^J fsy- 21. 1 - t> li I: 20. tt tt 5 l^0|t% ^/) -e 22. o ?r/x^o) fe-c? 6 t? 7. ^ ^^-L: f g.1/ ? **, ^1 tt ^^ tt 8. kb Jf J: 10. ^-5 <9ft> tf X/^$ tt Ir-o^L 55 -et Ho CONVERSATION THIRTY-FIFTH : CO TE. 433 5. If that is so, let us start now. I should like to have time for just one look at " Daibutsu " this afternoon. Nesan, bring the account, please. I will be paymaster. * * * How much ? One yen forty sen f All right ! * * * 6. ( Waitress). Here, sir, is your change. 7. Mr. H : Take forty sen as a small bit of tea-money for the house. Here are twenty sen for yourself. 8. ( Waitress). Grateful thanks, sir 1 Please come again. 9. Mr. R : Beautiful road this ! It is growing a little windy. Let us walk a while. The Izu mountains are crystal clear. See the Hakone hills ! Fuji is putting on a cloud-cap. 10. The day is too warm and bright for good weather to-morrow, I am afraid. It is just as well, I think, that we did not put off our outing until Saturday. The wind is coming in from the south-east. * * * *. Here is where the messenger from Kamakura, sent to reprieve Nichiren, met the messenger from the execution grounds 434 SECTION III. PKACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. -e, c. 11. P tf -/ y v-U: it 12. fca* < it 7^x^ id: it It ;fe> it T^r^OT^ ^^ it, ^<{(t/^ tt V9?^> 5^, It ^.^ w fc * it CONVERSATION THIRTY-FIFTH: (-O TE. 435 who was going to tell the Eegent of the miracle -which had taken place in Nichiren's behalf. You remember that at the same time that Nichiren's life \vas saved by the miracle near Katase, the Kegent was warned in a dream not to kill him. The meeting of the two messen- gers has made this little stream famous. Let us ride from the top of the hill. 11. Mr. R : Who would think, to look at it, that this barren sand- waste ever had a city of a million people on it ! "Well, even a half-million ought to have left more traces behind them than can be found here. 12. Our buildings are not like those in ancient Korne. All sigus of a Japanese town soon disappear after it is deserted. But here is the Great Buddha. This has stood all the war, fire, flood and earthquake which blotted out the city. 436 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. > KV> it 13. it ^>< t tt T 7 " rapt sublimity," ^ %*, " sublime calm," 1 3&i " perfect withdrawal from this world," %* "divine absorption," #> 5 5X ^^^C *f 6-5 1? 14. J^x. ^t> t tt 5 * -e^>5 ^ ^^^C LOT ^>6 T>^ ** 65 *L t tt 15. 5 <* /> fit tt, ^^ 16. ^T^ to +? * 35: 17. r 3* y a* * j -e t> 19. (y-^y^ ^X < -5 3t L L*$^ it # >(c * * * it CONVERSATION THIRTY-FIFTH : CO TE. 439 as it is now. You know how it is with the " Daibutsu " at Nara. The statue there is so cramped by the roof and walls that the effect is anything but impressive, or even serious. The wind is growing rather cold. Let us go on to the station. 17. I thought you would change the mood you had in the sunshine up at Kinkiro. Yes, we would better be hurrying on. It is after half-past four. 18. That old pine avenue from the sea to Hachiman's temple looks quite mournful. Kamakura is not a very cheerful place. 19. Mr. R : (Getting into his kuruma at Shinagawa.) My library fire will be a welcome sight. The air is very raw and chilly. Good night ! My compliments to Mrs. Mikata. 440 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 2. P try y-/-b: ^^7^ Jt IroJ tt ^ A, -e i>* -e 3. 4. ^ya< L ti Ir/) 1? CONVERSATION THIRTY-SIXTH :(.) A. 441 XXXVI. PROVERB FOR (ft) A. Cleanse the heart rather than shave the head. (Mr. Mikata's house. Early in January.) 1. Mr. M : My congratulations at the opening of the New- Year ! 2. Mr. R : A " Happy New Year ! " to you, and " Many Returns ! " of the same. I suppose I ought to give you the Japanese salutation in answer to your greeting, but it comes easier and is more natural for me to wish you a " Happy New Year ! " 3. Thank you ! How are you spending your holidays? 4. I have been away for the week past at Atami. Have you been off too ? 442 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 6. 7. tt it . 4**, b^^ KZ i^t>it/^ LX, LX /> L it it it ^>6$ ^/^ it b tt CONVERSATION THIRTY-SIXTH : (ft) A. 443 5. No ! I have been doing my duty as a good member of society. In that basket are some hundreds of visiting cards which have been left for me. I have been going the length and breadth of the city, reminding my acquaint- ances that I have not forgotten them. 0. I found quite a number of cards at my house, which had been left while I was away. I shall take the next day or two to show my few friends that I appreciate their kindness. Have you seen the splendid kite that is flying down near Shiba Park ? I do not know how big it is, but it is so much larger than any of the others which are soaring and humming there, that I was surprised. 7. No ! I have not noticed it. 8. I like the kite-flying exceedingly. That and the battledore playing I enjoy more than any other of the New Year amusements. As I came from the station yesterday afternoon, the streets were full of girls 444 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL -e 10. $< U*< -e, Li{ X^ vt/&9 e> ^^ It feCA* J: OW-X ^t>^f it a tt r 7 F >f -/ j T It, 3bj&ii^-*0 a* 55: <^5 it 5^ it (i 53:1^ it it 14. CONVERSATION THIRTY-SIXTH : (fc) A. 447 people. I have known them to do it in freezing weather, and every night for a whole month. 12. I believe there are a good many places in Japan where religious devotees subject their bodies to rather severe treatment. Once on a very cold day, I saw a young fellow standing under the Tokko-no-tak-i at the Fudo-in in Meguro. Is there much real religious feeling along with the torture? 13. I do not know. I think, however, that there is a great deal of benefit supposed to come from the act, if not for the soul, at least for the body. 14. A kan-mairi is not necessarily, then, an " outward 448 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 15. 3t ft 1. P tfy yy-U: rglU 5^lt I: Ufc >^ -efo 2. *_ ^ t 3. rt CONVERSATION THIRTY-SEVENTH: (?) SA. 449 sign of inward grace," I suppose. 15. Not necessarily ! Yet, I have no doubt that many of these ascetics are dead in earnest. XXXVII. PROVERB FOR-() SA. Even monkeys fall from trees. 1. Mr. R: Don't you want to take a short walk? 2. Mr. M: Where do you propose to go? 3. One of my servants broke my shaving glass this morning. He is usually very careful. I don't know when he has broken anything before. Some of my friends are always complaining of smashed dishes and glassware. I have been exceptionally fortunate. I am going down to the ku-ankoba to buy a new mirror. 450 SECTION III. PllACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ye L&Jt^ -e >^T -eto -e i^$ 6. 4. ib75 >%!> t -e e> tt5 i 6 tt 7. ^-e* 8 ^ % ?> 6 Jfc-M/o 21 s. it it i CONVERSATION THIRTY-SEVENTH :() SA. 451 4. I have not been out to-day yet. Last night I was very tired. But, I suppose a short walk would do me good. (The friends go out.) 5. Mr. R: Your doorway decorations are on rather a grand scale. Mine are very modest. To-morrow I sup- pose, a general clearing away begins, and everything will settle down into its usual order. 6. Yes, the week's play is over. # * * Let us go down by the Benten temple and over Maruyama. We can walk through the Zojoji grounds. I like the by-way through the gi'ove better than the street. 7. The Koyo-kwan looks quite dull by day-light. It has been unusually lively of late. The banquet given there a few days ago by Mr. Takara to some foreign friends, I hear, was one of the most entertaining ever known in the history of the house. A number of the best actors from the Kabukiza were there, Kikugoro and others. I am 452 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ft fa a i> ? 7 -/J ? t V. tt 9. ^7^^^x w-** IT -ef ^ ?C^LT^ ^^ u KfroK & -e- CONVERSATION THIRTY-SEVENTH : ( ? ) SA. 453 told that, one of the geisha was hurt by an accidental thrust of a spear, but I think not very badlj-. There were more than fifty guests in all. 8. The pond is desolate looking now. "Why, the ice on it is quite thick ! In spring and summer it is the most charm- ing spot in this part of the city, isn't it? How exquisite the cherry blossoms are here ! And then the wistaria ! And then the lotus ! And then the maple leaves 1 From April to November, this little Benten temple is exceedingly attractive. It is a great improvement, putting those seats over there under the wistaria trellis. 9. I often come here. I like the walks around the hill, too. They are so quiet and lovely. It is a grand thing for Tokyo to have in it, two such noble parks as this and Ueno. 454 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ^>> ^>5 % 10. 2. 5*^-L: ^-v > 1 te A _U rv IT * IM irft ., 5 *^ $//ijf// ** -^ J; /> % CONVERSATION THIRTY-EIGHTH : () KI. 455 10. There is Ino Chukei's monument. He was the founder of the art of map-making in Japan. Let us sit down for a moment or two. Here is a good view of the bay. XXXVIII. PROVERB FOR () KI. Wise sayings are disagreeable. 1. Mr. R: This is a good opportunity for telling me the story of Itakura Daijen, which, you said, would explain to me our proverb about wise sayings that are unpleasant to a man's ears. The crows are making a hideous noise up there. I should think they would annoy one's hearing more than any golden saying could. 2. Mr. M: The story is this. " A slioshidai, or gover- nor, of ancient Kyoto, called Itakura Daijen, was known as 45G SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ttr ( -e a* ^TLOK -e jf>l^gy ^^ tt I: t ^>f v 2: 5 < 6 -f* -s > , it it tKb & Jr^C. ftt tt 3ti>^ it 6 l:e: it J: -e ' < it .% te> t it CONVERSATION THIRTY-EIGHTH : (} ) KI. 459 3. I should say so. Put in that way I suppose a golden saying can do disagreeable work. "Well, let us go on. It is almost noon. 460 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. < tt it 2. P try 3. tt, fit -e CONVERSATION THIKTY-NINTH:-(i9>) YU. 461 XXXIX. PROVERB FOR ($) YU. Negligence is a great enemy. 1. Mr. 31: I am glad to see that something is being done to improve these grounds. This walk down the hill, and these new waterways are a great change for the better. I thought at one time that the grove would be left to run to weeds and ruin. 1. Mr. R : The whole park looks better than it did when I first came to Japan. The grounds are better cared for. The walks are kept clean. There must have been rather a hopeless outlook for the temple grounds twenty years ago. I should like to see the splendid building that stood here then. 3. I remember it. The fire was a grand sight, bad as its work was. The big red gate there remains pretty much unchanged. But it has been shamefully neglected, along with the rest of the buildings here. Better times, however, are coming for both the buildings and grounds. So many 462 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. tt ^ L ^> 4. tt >$*>$ to t *>^ tt fe7^< U CONVERSATION THIRTY-NINTH : (<9>) YU. 463 of the Shoguns are buried here, that it would be a nation- al disgrace, if the neglect which arose out of the war of the Restoration were allowed to continue. Even though the government may withdraw its support wholly from religion, these shrines of the Tokugawa Shoguns ought to be preserved. 4. I hope that this grand old bell will soon be well housed. It has one of the richest tones, and it has the deepest tone, I ever heard. Often, in the morning at four o'clock, I hear it. The air then seems actually to throb with its profound music. 5. These rows upon rows of great bronze lanterns impress me deeply with the power of the old Shogunate. There are two hundred and twelve of them, they say. And how many of these big stone lanterns there are, I do not know. All are presents from daimyos in memory of their lords, the Shoguns, of the middle of the last century. 464 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. J ?t> ^ r s/ -v ^* v j is 6 U ^ _*_^-U rt t> 6 I: &$X P b-y y y-U tt 2r< #T tei-tx ^^r K. *OT^ wt -e ^c'/a -e, 2:0 ^>t>? CONVERSATION FORTIETH: (A) ME. 465 XL. PROVERB FOR (ft) ME. A blind man is iiot afraid of a snake. (The two friends pass through the Ni-ten-inon on to the public road. Mr. Mikala recognizes a man who is -passing. He then speaks to Mr. Robinson.) 1. Mr. M : There is a mau who h;is just gone through a most unfortunate experience. He is not one of your victims of misplaced confidence. He is ready enough to suspect the men he deals with. But he is a man who sometimes can not see, and who sometimes will not see. His last experience came out of both these troubles. 466 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 2. w: t LX, ^ * lrt> 4; * LX I: ^tt 6 K. -e ^t<^> eit * K. ^ ** ^-5V> -e, i lit it CONVERSATION FORTIETH :( A) ME. 467 2. Mr. R : How was that ? 3. He bas no children of his own. About seven years ago he adopted a young fellow. He made him the husband of his daughter. The daughter died about three years after the marriage. The young fellow had become a gambler, even while his wife was alive. That man who just passed proposed to retire from his business (become inkyo), and to put his adopted son in charge of it. His own family relatives objected. The son was even accused of his vices to the father. But, somehow, the father would be- lieve nothing wrong of the boy. He rather suspected his relatives of interested motives. In the end he found out to his sorrow that the boy was a rascal, a gambler and a thief. But he has himself to blame. There are none so blind as those who will not see. (Entering the Kivankoba.) Not many people are out buying to-day. 458 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. et 4. -5. &- 6. tt * we ^ s. ^ ^ % t> CONVERSATION FORTIETH : ( A} ME. 469 4. I suppose it is too soon after the New Year for many buyers. I was here in December. It was so crowded then that one could scarcely move along the passages. 5. Mr. M : Have you found a glass to suit you. 6. I think this one will do very well. I wish that all the Japanese merchants would adopt fixed-prices for their goods. The knowledge that here there is no change whatever from the figures marked on the articles brings hosts of purchasers. 470 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 1. t, 2. s 3. ay Ki CONVERSATION FORTY-FIRST : () MI. 471 XLI. PROVERB FOR (& Ml. The Jicfirt rather tluui the face. 1. Mr. It : Let us go back by the street. I wish to take a look at the new bridge. The city improvements are going forward steadily. I never think of the plans made for the transformation of Tokyo without wonder. Plans for one hundred and twenty years work, I am told, have been drafted. Two hundred and forty millions of yen are to be expended 011 the work, that is, two millions each year. 2. Mr. M: Yes, I believe it is proposed to make the city over so that it shall be a city of splendid avenues, good drainage, parks and lighting. Truly, a big idea ! But it is just like everything else that has sprung up during Meiji. 3. I am not surprised at the determination of your people to make up for long-lost time. I sometimes ask, however, 472 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. > ft $ V % % K $ T> % t #?, <> /, fit T> $ to 4. > ^ w: It It ~ p y fit #/>, ^^< li ^55 *i* ^ v> t ^ % t> $ t CONVEKSAT1OX FOKTY-FIEST : (#.) MI. 473 whether the real progress of the people will keep pace with these outside gains. 4. We have talked that matter over many a time. I believe, as I have often said, that the things you put so much value on will not be neglected. You complain that we take no deep interest in philosophy, or in religion. You really can't expect us to do so, under the circum- stances. We must put our home in order, first. Our re- volution was not started in the interests of religion. Trade was at the back of it, so far as America and Europe were concerned. Our phj'sical weakness has been in our way in all our intercourse with the Powers among nations. We must get rid of our physical inferiority first. The other things will more easily come when we are free and strong. 474 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 5. (ft ftt^LX r^/^ li L t* it L 1. x ^^-L: foK-fc tt ^^ fctt^ #fr ^/vL J: t 2. P b- -/ y y-t : 3. fit. 4. ^xf, tr^ fc^< t CONVERSATION FORTY-SECOND :( L) SHI. 475 5. I sympathize with you too much to argue long against you. But, after all, I go back to iny regular position. It is true of the Japanese, and of every people in the world, that by "' the soul only they shall be great and free." XLII. PROVERB FOR SHI. He who handles vermilion is stained red. 1. Mr. M : Do you know that gentleman who was in the carriage just driven by ? 2. Mr. R : I did not notice. Who was it ? 3. That was Mr. Isei. You know of him, of course. He has had more of the young and middle-aged men of the country under his influence than any other man in Tokyo. 4. Yes, of course I have heard of him. If there were 47G SECTION III. PBACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. L ~**' fit ^> ^ %, -4-Y, T>^><-fitA, % * t?> < fit it -8%- fit A, * * * * * ; t o < v * p^#tf*tidC ^ < 5 $ fit 7.- 5o . >;^ ^ to 21 ^r fit -e^X fc- U CONVERSATION FORT Y-SECOND : (L) SHI. 477 a thousand sucb as he in Japan, or even a hundred, no one need have an hour's solicitude for the country for at least three generations to conie. Ho is a model man himself, mentally, morally and physically. So far as men can be shaped by contact with others, there are thousands of men in Japan who owe most of what is best in them to Mr. Isei. 5. Come in for a few moments ! It is just tiffin time. Come in ! 6. Thank you ! Not to-day. My tiffin is awaiting me. Besides, my feet are wet. The roads are very muddy from the melted frost. I must get off my shoes and make a change of socks. My best regards to Mrs. Mikata. 7. I have some delicious Chinese oranges. I shall send you some this afternoon. 478 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 8. (dt 2. P h y y y-U: lfl?$ H K. UttX < -5 -e it CONVERSATION FORTY-THIRD :(.) E (WE). 47-) 8. You are always doing me favors. XLIII. PROVERB FOR (&) E (WE). Give food even to detestable things. (At Mr. Mikata's house,) 1. Mr. M : You find me, you see, in the room you enjoy so much. lam taking your advice, and I like it, too. How is the weather ? 2. M. E : It has stopped snowing. It is clearing off beautifully. You should see the moon sailing in and out among the clouds. The night is like fairy-land. I came over just for the sake of seeing the moon-light upon the snow and the trees. Your garden is transformed into a wizard's palace. 3. It is a sudden clear off. An hour ago the snow was falling heavily. ISO SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 4. 5 -etfto ^^ -e * 6 3t/^ *^o ^it ^ ^ % to r >5 et CONVERSATION FORTY-THIRD : (&) E (WE). 431 i. So it was! I had settled down for the evening. But I went out into my corridor a few minutes ago. My garden was almost as bright as day. All the bushes and trees, the fence, the hedge and the roofs, were covered with snow, and were glistening in the moon-light. I know that to-morrow the sun will spoil all the beanty early in the morning. I did not want to miss seeing the magic world that the snow has made, so I came out. I have had an entrancing walk. Come, look at your own garden. # * * * * * 5. Marvellous ! How it is all changed ! G. Do you see how the snow brings out the individual character of each tree ? The pine, the cryptomeria, the fir, the pomegranate, the maple, the willow, all the shrubs, how distinct they are ! And what a queer contrast those plum blossoms make with what they were yesterday, being covered with snow. Oh 1 how exquisite it all is ! 482 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 8. fcft < L it 9. i rt 10. ij/^ e> ttu -et, tt ^5 -e ^ ^5^^ It ti, i^ t^WC CONVERSATION FOKTY-THIED;: () E (WE). 483 7. This is the first real snow-fall we have had this winter. 8. I thought that the winter was over. Only the day before yesterday I was at Kameido to see the old dragon plum-trees. (Gwaryobai). I intended to go to-day to the Kamada garden near Kawasaki. I think I prefer it to the garden atKaineido. 9. Let us go in. For an hour or two in the morning we shall be in wonder-land. I shall get up early to look at it. Draw your chair to the fire and be comfortable. I have just been reading some old poems. Do you know Japanese poetry? 10. Very little. A friend once gave me a few speci- mens of it, the hokku and the tanka. It must be rather a difficult kind of verse making. To get complete sense and expression into the liokkii, or even into the tanka, must require a great deal of word-skill. 48 1 SECTION I [I. PRACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. 11. l/> \^& ^ \rfrZ> it ti *(*$ -ei* 12. ^ 7 it 13. L^t fc^ < it ^ it ft *^5 t^^ ^/^t^5 ?: it :&&< L rt it, fc>7: < L CONVERSATION FORTY-THIBD : (*.) E (WE). 485 11. Yes ! To get good sense into them does. 12. Just think ! Three lines of only five, seven, and five syllables for one complete poem ; and five lines of five, seven, five, seven, and seven syllables, for another kind of complete poem. Such writing would drive me wild. The English sonnet is bad enough. 13. But some of our writers have been very successful with this kind of writing. Many of the ladies in the ancient days devoted a good deal of time to the art. I have just been reading a tanlca written by an empress. Here it is : " Shindaraba, Yakuna, umeruna, No ni suiete, Yasetaru inu no Hara wo koyase yo. " (When I die, burn me not, bury me not. Into the wilderness cast me, that the starving dogs may fill their empty stomachs.) 48(5 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 14. fc^5f it ~eX 6$t a*, 15. 3 ** $5 t? #$#-21*^3 ft it ^ 3 IT io IL r-<^- r- it 16. < t it CONVERSATION FORTY-THIRD :(.*) E (WE.) 487 14. Skilfully done! But what a strange wish! 15. Oh no ! Such humane feeling ofteu appeared in our ancient literature, especially when Buddhism had the upper classes under its influence. The empress considered her body put to a much higher use in saving even a miserable outcast beast, than in feeding either fire or worms. Here is another tanka. It is not perfect in form, but I want to read it for the sentiment it expresses. I can not see much difference between this and some parts of the " Sermon on the Mount." " Nikumarete Nikumi kaKsa na. Nikumarei'O. Nikumi nikumare Hateshi nakereba." (If you are hated hate, for hate do not return. Receive the hatred. If you give hatred for hate, hating has no end.) 16. An admirable lesson in tolerance ! But I am sure that the " Sermon on the Mount " goes farther and higher 488 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. -e (i I: irt-^U > 5: 6t^ < -5 L 1. s ^^-t: ^^7^ Cr-^to Jl ^^t^ ^>^ -e CONVERSATION FORTY-FOURTH : (tf) H. I. 48 i5> > 3. **t tt 5K X* fr'fc< U it tt fc- L tt T 1 ^ U $: :&- Wt -e ^^C & :&- L tt ^ -yy ^ ttU ^ ^ii^t^ I: 5 -e -e, L^ (ft ^C 6 I it V>^ :&-# it 7^< L tt ar ^^ r at it W:T>*>^* it ^, ? -yy^r rtu it tii> >#>' it , it CONVERSATION FORTY-FOURTH : (CM HI. 493 3. I do not know. I read the poem, and you can make it fit your own divinations. 4. That brings to mind something I wanted to ask you. When I was at Kameido the other day, I stopped in for a moment at the temple where the wistaria garden is. I went over the semi-circular bridge there. I have been over a much larger bridge of the same kind in the temple grounds of Miyajima. I have seen several bridges like these in different parts of the country. Now, a short time ago, in going over the proverbs which we have yet to talk about, you gave one for "Hi" which says something about human life being like crossing a round-bridge. I had hard work scrambling over both the Kameido and the Miya- jima bridges. I wanted to ask you, whether the maker of the " Hi " proverb was not a man who had had a pretty hard life of it. I thought that perhaps he was a priest who had to go every day over one of these round-bridges, on the way to his temple. 494 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL tt, . fit , fit -e N* 3 -e fit ^^5 ii #ft tt % tiH it. $^^> tf, ^<^6 ^^ it 6 It ^6^^^ *^o fit. >4S ^t/i, it it * 5V>X ^V' it ^ it ^6, * < to Wt it CONVEKSATION FORTY-FIFTH : { I ) MO. 499 reading a letter. Tlie letter is from Mr. Robinson, and is dated at Atami. It says : ) 2. " I know you will think nie move of a run-away enthu- siast than ever. I could not resist the temptation to make a cherry-blossom pilgrimage this year. Do you know what I mean by that ? Every year, this you know, for about a fortnight Japan becomes Paradise. Often the powers of evil, wind and rain, destroy the celestial beauty before it can be seen in perfection. But this year, after a long, cold, wet winter, spring, with all generous wai'mth and with cloudless skies, came, and, so far, has remained without seeming to wish to leave us. Ten days ago I was over at Ueno. The sight of the tender, flushing buds of the big trees on the avenue up to the museum, made me long to see for once some of Japan's most famous cherry-flower places. The next day, without saying good bye to any one, I left by an early train for the west. I can never forget the exquisite charm of the day's trip. All along the road, the trees, as our Whittier said, were " growing misty green with leafing buds." In every village and in almost every farm-yard, plum-blossoms still were there, bidding wel- come to the new cherry-blossoms. This year the winter 500 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. ^^ it, Hi ^ -e 5t-&< ^^xj i: 6 > it % 7^1^**^ tiT^tf it $?c 5> a* ^$ J: it o *?- < L (i ti t $ X > ti'/lx H *=*"* it it ^ J 6 3t it Ji - rt J:ti -e, tr6> ^> att. it rt v&>$ ^ ^tit/^o J: < to -5-3t-^ it (1, ** b -N l5)| CONVERSATION FORTY-FIFTH :((,) MO. 501 stayed so long, and spring came so fast, that we are having a double feast of plum and cherry-flowers together. The first night I reached Nagoya. The next day I went as far as Hikone. I stayed over the night at a hotel that was once the residence of the li-Kamon-no-Kami, the first pro- gressive Prime Minister of Japan under the present order of things. A lovely house and a spacious, tasteful, charm- ing garden. But I was too soon for the cherries. The place is so high and exposed that I found even snow in the streets of the village. Before noon of the next day I was at Kyoto. I had reached there just in time. The next morning I rode out to Arashi-yama, and had several hours of enjoyment. The effect of the hundreds of trees standing out in full blossom from the dark ever-green back-ground of the mountain-side, is exquisite. But the sparkling river mirroring the base of the mountain ; the gaily decorated boats on the water ; the long lines of pic-nic booths built up on the river-bank opposite Arashi-yama ; and the care-free, merry crowds of sight seers in their best clothes, make one feel as though the world were made only for one to be happy in. The next day I was off for Yoshino. I got there an hour before sun-down. Until night came, I revelled in the luxury of color which day by day is now growing richer over that long, up-hill avenue. 502 SECIION III. PRACTICE N THE COLLOQUIAL. < I) 3- < -5 -e r ^ y -Y It a y / jr. ^ , r 7 y -Y , J: v> Ufa v-& ^2> ^ -e$T Ir- lit, ^.^ -e -e ^^ ^ir n te 5: dt >f CONVERSATION FORTY-FIFTH : ( ) MO. 503 I shall tell you all about what I saw there, when I get back. The next day I started again, and in two days more had made my way across the hills to Yamada in Ise. I saw the sights of that Mecca of loyal Japanese. I got back to the rail- way at Tsu the next day, and came on straight to this place, where I am basking in a sunshine almost like that of summer. The glory of the big grove of plum-trees here is not all gone yet. I am going up to see it this afternoon. I may be an enthusiast, but I am having a good time." 504 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. -e * z *** ^ e) ^ t. ^ -e ^ ^~ t^< Ji 7^^* rxr-^3 *kr flt ^\'^^>x, -2:^ ^ ^^ ttr J: CONVERSATION FORTY-SIXTH : (t) SE. 507 2. Jlr.lt: Last night. I expected to beat uome at about six o'clock, but the train did not reach the station until nearly eight. The railways do not seem to be at all well managed now. I am afraid that the administration is dividing responsibility too much. One first-class manager could bring order out of this chaos, I am sure. Last year, you remember, when the time tables between here and Kyoto were somewhat changed, it was more than a month before anything like regularity was restored. There was about a fortnight when no attempt was made to keep to the published schedules. 3. Yes, I recollect. I was caught on the road between hero and Osaka. There was no telling when trains would come or go. The passengers simply stayed about the stations, and waited until something was done. 4. I suppose that most of the trouble has come from dismissing capable heads of departments, and leaving the 508 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. > ft* #> ^ ^LS> I: it ft* *6 ^T'a *$JtA, ft* & t>l5?^ 4:6 rt 5^ 5. tlt*a, ^)^7^ ft* 6. 3 ft*, tt 6 ft* 9 y f -^ ti 15) < O * 9 ^ ^ tt 5 < it CONVERSATION FORTY-SIXTH :-(t) SE. 509 service at the mercy of too many under-officers. For a railway, as well as for a ship, one thoroughly competent and responsible head is far better than a dozen, even though skilful, sub -managers. 5. At any rate I am glad to see you back. I suppose you will rest awhile now at home. G. Indeed not ! I shall see the cherry-flowers through to the end, unless bad weather stops me. I am not going to Mukojima. There is too much of a crowd there, on too narrow a road, for real pleasure. But I am going to Koganei and to Hori-no-uchi. Hori-no-uchi is to me one of the most enjoyable of all the cherry-places. The flowers there are nearly all the big, double-blossomed yae-zakura. They come last. The ride out there, and to I-no-kashira through the old Hachiman temple grounds in good weather is one of the most attractive, to my liking, of all around Tokyo. 510 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. to ir 2. P b-y y -/-L: -e 3. CONVERSATION FORTY-SEVENTH :(-?) SU. 511 XLVII. PROVERB FOR (^r) SU. Famous swords are sometimes made from fire-scrapers. 1. Mr. M : I see you have taken the cover off your pond. Did you lose many fish ? 2. Mr. R : No ! Three, I think, died during the winter. There are more than two hundred in the pond. I have been quite fortunate. I had the cover taken off before I went to Kvoto. 3. You must have had a wonderful trip. No bad weather at all ? 4. Only a slight shower when I was crossing the Ise country. But I had seen tlie Toshino flowers then. The rain did not amount to a storm. 512 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. $ 5 L 9. tt, ^ L it ft$ it tJ: 4 ^>5 jr Lt 10 CONVERSATION FORTY-SEVENTH : Cf) SU. 513 * # * * * 5. I came over with a bit of good news for you. The hospital laboratory is finished. Dr. Hatsumei expects to begin work there early in May. 6. So soon ? You have been enterprising. 7. Yes ! We shall have a little celebration at the open- ing. Will you come ? It will be on the 8th of May at two o'clock, at the San yen-lei. 8. I shall be much pleased to be there. I congratutate you with all my heart. 9. Then I wish to say too, that Mr. Hayashi has become one of our most earnest supporters. He hits doubled his subscription and is determined, as far as he can bring it about, to get government assistance for Dr. Hatsumei's work. 10. Better and better! I give in. I misjudged Mr. Hayashi entirely. 514 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. it ^-yy 5 A, c-a^ LX 12. >f- 13. 55 tt ii. fc .&-> it it it /X < it t^3f it ** r/ixj -e ti ^ CONVERSATION FORTY-SEVENTH : (-f) SU. 515 11. Another thing brought me over to-day. I want to show you Kobo Daishi's I-ro-hd hymn. Do you know it? 12. I never saw it. 13. Well! Perhaps you have remembered that we are now finishing the list of the proverbs I laid out last fall for your practice-talk. We have had the proverbs in use in all shapes, and under all sorts of circumstances. They have been of great service to you. I can easily see that. Mrs. Mikata says, that you speak now with great ease, and altogether like a Japanese. In one way or another, we have had every one of the I-VO-llCl before us, and turned them around in almost every ordinary form the syllables can take. There remains the "2?" character to be sure, for which I did not propose any proverb. But *' N" can not begin any sentence. We can use it, however, in a way that will not be much out of place. We can put it on to the end of a sentence. I have a proverb for tt N 9 ' used in that place. With that proverb we can appro- priately close our I-vo-lia talks. 51G SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. -eto Lfcu *>*!> &*) -e *i^ ,5 fit u^ r^j t fc ;T *f * 6 ff ^* . t 14. - a / o y v ? '* y>. ^ to- ia.^c'K^ ko^fc >u>. < U rt tv it -^/ix^/^ -e % o<^:^ ^:*-L^ < *^ ?r CONVERSATION FORTY-EIGHTH :-(,<,) N. ?>I7 14. How ? XLVIH. PROVERB FOR (A,) N. One letter 'is worth a thousand dollars. 1. Mr. M: By accepting the wise saying that every one of the letters we have been using for our talks is worth a thousand pieces of gold. 2. Mr. R : Well done ! How rich we are ! But, all joking aside, I am exceedingly indebted to you for a thousand kindnesses ! I never could repay them even with a thousand pieces of gold. 8 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 3. 4 > * 5 -V / t -e li I: 6. $^ti L-< Mt, 5- < 41A, fc- CONVERSATION FORTY-EIGHTH : Cf ) SU. 519 3. Pray don't mention that ! We have gotten through with the I-ro-Jia, but we have not gotten through with the friendship which has carried us in our talks over the letters. That is to go on, I trust, for many years yet. 4. You do not, then, accept the pessimistic judgment which makes up the last four lines of the poem that is formed by the characters we have been studying. 5. How is that? 6. I repeated the first four lines in my garden last November ; do you recollect? 7. Oh ! yes. As you read them : Iro wa nioedo, Chirinuru tvo Waga yo tare zo Tsune naran ? 8. Then, we have had the rest of the I-ro-lia in this shape : 520 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. L 9. xj-Y, b rt . t K. t- e> -e^o L , X tt ^V X -efo CONVERSATION FORTY-EIGHTH : (? ) SU. 521 " Ui no olcu-yama Kyo Jcoetc, Asaki yume mishi, Ei mo sezu : which is, being interpreted, Professor Chamberlain says; " Having to-day crossed the mountain-fastness of exist- ence, I have seen but a fleeting dream, with which I am not intoxicated." 9. No ! I will let that sentiment go. Life, especially with home and friends in it, I am not willing to give up. We have learned the I-ro-7l(l, I say, not to hate life, but to like it and to use it. I must go now. Here is Kobo Daishi's hymn. It is very doubtful if Kobo Daishi ever saw it. But it is a good piece of writing. Each line in it begins in succession with the I-vo-liCl. You may not like the sentiment of it any more than you do that of the verses made out of the syllabics only. But, as I say, it is a good piece of composition, and you may like to keep it as memento of our I-VO-hci talks. 522 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 10. yv^^ I: fe-UJU^ K^oKb, ? fe^/xj it ^> it ^^ 21 CD it a r 6 ^ y * >- -/ |rt y t>^ it 7*2 ^> it ? CD t Ir ^, <-2i' CD I-RO-HA HYMN. 525 I-KO-HA HYMN. A few days after the last conversation took place, Mr. Mikata received from his friend Robinson a letter which, in part, read as follows : " I have been exceedingly interested in the I-TO-ha hymn which you gave me the other day as a memento of our pleasant talks during the past winter. But you are more than right in your doubt as to whether Kobo Daishi ever saw it. My secretary, who is, as you know, familiar with Japanese literature, tells me that this hymn was written by a certain Buddhist priest named Kwai Han. I am told also that the book-title of the hymn is Nori no Hatsu-Ne or ' First Note of the Law. ' Kwai Han, it is said, wrote, as Kobo Daishi composed the I-ro-lia that he might clearly teach the essential law of Buddha to the Japanese people, he would, himself, in honor of his spiritual ancestor, Kobo, take these same I-ro-llCl charac- ters and make them the crowns of the separate lines of his own hymn, and thus advance Kobo's pious object. I have been amusing myself with making, from my secretary's literal translation of the poem, a metrical paraphrase of the lines line for line. I enclose a copy of my verse to you in exchange for the original hymn you so kindly gave me. I hope that you will keep my offering, as I shall keep your gift, in memory of our winter's plea- sures." 526 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL -fc fit tt HC a^A, LT It jfit^t> t f o W- fit ^5 id: fit I-RO-HA HYMN. 527 Nori no Hatsu-Ne. In spending my days chasing things that are trifles; In sowing the seed of the six-fold migration ; I pass through the world with my life-purpose baffled. Since gaining a birth among those that are human, Just now I have learned that I may become godlike, So now I seek Buddha's help, trusting the promise. This world, after all, it is only a dream-world ; And we, after all, are vain selves with dust mingled. Our jealousies, angers and scoffing reproaches, 523 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL 2: 5 tr 3t to Jl it li'L 5^ it t 5r I-RO-HA. HYMN. 529 All evils we do, though disguised by our cunning, At last become massed like the bulk of a mountain, And we are cast down to " The River of Three Paths; " A fitting reward for our self-prompted actions, Whose ills each must bear, never blaming another. Live I a long life, 'tis like flashing of lightning. Live I but one life, lo ! 'tis lived in a dream-world. % Grow I into one life with wife and with children, The love of such one life abides but a moment. Think how to the depths has my heart been affected ! Engrossed by my bonds to a world that is fleeting, Naught led me to pray, " Namu Amida Buddha ; " As wind to a horse-ear were things of the future ; Reminded of death's blast, I answered, " When comes it?" The preacher I trusted not ; thought he spoke falsely ; And so has my time sped to this very moment. Desire I thought was for good that would follow ; Oh ! how I lament as I think of what has been. But yet in this troubled life comes consolation : Adorable Buddha enlightens the dark way ; 530 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. tt I-RO-HA HYMN. 531 Has pit}' on all those who live in these last days ; To all gives compassion and blessed redemption, "Whose depth or whose height passes ocean or mountain. To Buddha's salvation so bountiful, boundless, Thanksgiving forever ; to nie it is given. Up pointing towards heaven, down pointing 'neath heaven, The Buddha sheds light upon all who are living. Now, knowing the Law as the Law has been given, The blest triple treasure, Rite, Priesthood and Bud- dha, I lift up my song, though I sing in a dream-world. If sorrow and knowing are both the mind's flowering ; If demon or Buddha with each is attendant ; Then let all my faith upon knowing be centered. Up-striving, away from " The River of Three Paths," A glance at the Fulness Divine of all Goodness Will gladden my eyes, the reward of nay striving. Recite then the Prayer ; for by its mere virtue Your pathway will enter the " Land of the Holy." 532 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. NOTES ON THE CONVERSATIONS. CONVERSATION FIRST. , "Third," see paragraph 283, page 180. L*$b' "Chap- ter," pronounced slid, see paragraph 50, 1. For "t, read '*> ,, adverb indicating association or companion- ship, as here, " Friends together speaking." "Proverb," , accusative sign, see paragraphs 106, and 247. V*t> gerund form of the verb {, "hear," see 1C3 ; see also 97, " Proverb 1." and 98, &. t, jifa pronounced jit, see 50, 1. "Place etc." literally, " Here as for (it) ie Tokyo's Mr. Mikata's house. Mr. Mikata, being in south-fronting room, before (a) flower-garden is doing (a) writing thing." In this description, given in written rather than in colloquial style, , is substituted for g&, (295,) the ordinary term f or " Mr." jf >) = colloquial /, or *$, which are contractions of the verb ;, or ST^fJS, " to be," combined with the particle , which emphasizes merely the " being " when compounded with these verbs. } = colloquial ^* ?5- Simple positive existence, or possession, is indicated by the verb J&<5 see 273, 274. } consequently has ordinarily the meaning "there is," or " (1) have." For its peculiar forms in inflec- tion, see 167. But a negative conjugation for & Jg does not exist in speech, excepting the negative probable present, 2lj<5|Vv see 187. Instead, the adjective form jj*JV meaning " not existing," is used in its various inflections for the conjugation of &V*> see " Inflection of the Adjective, Negative Forms," 219, where j&v> i g inflected with & &<5 becomes polite when its Main Stem & U is used with for which, see 197. & <5 becomes yet more polite when, from jf> 9 it becomes ) g^-f-, usually in speech C'^fV5'f > - No real change NOTES ON CONVERSATION FIRST. 533 of meaning takes place with these changes made for the sake of courtesy. $*)$? and ST^fUH't' uave proper negative conjuga- tions. c. When the particle *Q is prefixed to J^Jg or C"^f J5 and their various forms of inflection, the meaning of the combined result is that simply of " being." The notion of " possession " disappears. is another form for the gerundial particle U"C, "being." fJ or ST<5 expresses merely "being." But, as usually spoken, * J^5, ** etc . are abbreviated into , # (daro), $>Ofe (datta), etc., and f UIIi% * ;*)& 5, t? CT^V>aLfe etc., become tri", *&?>, ** Lfe etc. see "Examples" in 241 and 243, for the use of some of these forms ; see also 192. d. There are other verbs much used in polite intercourse terminat- ing with ^^, such us V^^L-^JS' " being in a place " = "dwell," " come," " go ; " { #3 Jg " being in descent " = " condescend," ' give from above;" J&S'S' "causing to be" = "deign to do" = "please do;" tOC'>? > '5> "being under instruction" = "please to com- municate to another" = "deign to say." These verbs, like ST^f?, when, for increased courtesy's sake they are combined with &$', areas a rule written v*$OL*V>a-f, < 3V>9t-f. ^SV^i", *ZO C*V- ^^ and thus throughout their inflection forms. The imperatives in simple form of these verbs are by usage V^OL^>V>' < 23V> &3Vv and sometimes tt'OL'^V*- In niore courteous form their imperatives are those regularly formed with Q-f, e.g. V^O,J^V9t C> fi^V^SL- etc. Yet other changes in the inflection of these verbs take place, Most noticeable among these is the elision of the a in the terminal jJsJS in several other inflection forms than those already noted, e.g. the gerund of V-9^;5 is not V**3OL*O*C but V$L*C, of &33 is not &3Ot but &fC etc., etc. e. which, chiefly as an auxiliary to other verbs in their gerundial form, gives a continuative force to such verbs. This association of 5J5 with other verbs is very like in effect the association of the English verb " to be " with participial forms of other verbs, such as "is writing," " is sleeping," " am studying." 5; frequently coalesces with the gerund forms by merging its i sound into the final soiind of the gerand, e.g. ,* j&Jg "is doing" may become L*C<5; jfa*C 5555, "is sleeping," &<. 55 as J&9t't'> etc., etc. 534 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. / tt % There is but little, if any, difference in ordinary usage between ft % and J& 5. Both the words indicate " state " or " condition of being." ft% may at one time have referred by preference to living or moving beings. The inflection of ft ; is made according to the first conjugation. Its polite form is jf2 U "" In the First Conversation the student will find nearly all the speci- fications of these verbs, here given, amply illustrated. REMARK 1. NOTE. In these notes the./i^ur** in tbe middles of the pages refer to the separate remarks of the speakers in the "Conversations." The side lettcrt a, b. c, etc. refer to the successive sentences in the "remarks." The numlitrg within the text of the notes refer to the paragraphs of the book, uuless otherwise specified. = colloquial &VO*C 8*C. = "coming entering.'' gerund of liv<5- "enter," 167. &*C gerund of { <5, " come," 197. jfeV>3*2 L"C- literally " doing greeting" = "bows." &#>ZA. Main Stem of $?4>&, (168). " to stand with the face towards." The Japanese phrasing, in somewhat literal form is, " Sir. Robinson, coming into this place, makes salutation, and fronting Mr. Mikata " (says). See 9(5. c. jft-CJ^a e t c -> "Will there not be honorable obstruction?" That is, " If I come in shall I not interrupt you? " The honorific ft is used, not because the interruption is worthy of honor, but because everything connected with an honored person spoken to, should be spoken of with respect, 295. For the polite inflection of a verb with %i"f, see 189. See 218, for the form &j( , or the adjective forms preceding JJ^f $5. See 240, for this use of & See 100, for meaning of jfo as used here. ^US'f'EV* i s polite probable present negative form of the verb ;;, " be," with ^i"- " -" S* 6 189191. a. ^ -x, 233. -tS i, fc, 309. *> *2-*lt^SVSC. 193, e. jfolfr, Main Stem of jfrtf?. second conjugation ; see 145. The phrase is an abbreviation from 2 C^ S J&itt^S. " to place the loins," = " to sit." c. fc-a-S E5t-C fcfe 213 *e-f. a-S Main Stem of ^T> (166) "wait." 3t b k*C gerund of verbgt^-f 1 " speak," much used with other verbs as an auxiliary to show respect in address. J&fe, certain past of 5J " be." jj S 5i literally " place," and has the force NOTES ON CONVERSATION FIRST. 535 here of the phrase, "just the time when." The sentence is equivalent to " I have just been awaiting you." 3. Zr&*V>a-f 193. 218. , etc., " Very rude being is (it), but in this way (I) sit." jjj "but," 267. An apology for an awkward manner in taking his place upon the matting in a Japanese room. &&&/, 227. 4. a. 2j"55*> e tc- " Please at (your) honorable convenience (sit down)." IS, a polite prefix, 295. The sentence is incomplete, like many sentences heard in Japanese conversation. Here the words " sit down," are not spoken, but understood, 102. 1j. V*"^ ti etc. "As for a chair how is (it)?" & pronounced wa, see 42. For & as used here, 240. c - V"f" CD li ?> > etc. " The chair's side, cushion than, easy is." Di % , " side," is much iised in talk to specify persons, things, places. Here it specifies a chair as being much more comfortable for sitting on than a floor-cushion. JJ , gives comparative value to < , see 211. See for construction, 96, Exception. 5. a. \ x SCD &? b Ki etc, literally, " In this manner shoving out my feet even, if it is well, this way, on the contrary, is a convenience forme." ,$ ft, 229. f>, 270. % L-ttiltif conditional present verbal form of the adjective JJ55C,, "good," 219. jJ>r5*C, gerundial adverb, 231. 6. 3 S& t fc , mark of repetition of the syllable, 74. g $, exclam- ation iirging compliance with the request, 280. Another example of incomplete speech = " There ! At ease ! " (place yourself), 102. b. , 275. CD, sign of possessive case, 106 and 245. J&jjj, here, " intimacy " of friendship. " In our intimacy, ceremony enters not." c. 3 Us an exclamation sometimes used in calling a servant ; but even here an abrupt direct imperative is replaced by the politer form $rD*C ft-tot, " which in usage, but not literally, means " bring ! " 299. <* "5 9t*5 &, etc , literally, " Coarsely made tobacco, but deign to partake." The Japanese are in the habit of depreciating, but merely as a form, their gifts to others, however excellent the things may be. &, 221. ft, 267, t-*# 9 , 297. 53G SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 7. . V>2>1?&> e tc-, literally, "Indeed, a splendid garden it is, isn't it?" Ift'O'C % pronounced /cefc/co, 55 and 43. &, 221. jfc, 280. & &&> etc. lit. " As for here (this side) because (&) entirely cold -wind protected from is, although ($3) this morning outside really cold -wind blowing is, this room as for perfectly -warm being is." Q'O- fz. < , (228) from Q'OtiQ, " whole." St?V>. < 215 ) from S&> " C W &, 2G9. CO It, "really," 229. &V ;& #3, see for this #3, 239. 9 $i> #> see for this #$, 267. S5fe^>, pron. attaka, is a Tokyd abbreviation of ^jfefcj}*, " warm." etc., lit. "The midst of the cold season even, the sun's shining time during, (It) the s/io/i all being left open, (.here) one can live," 97. f>, (277) a phrase conjunction meaning " even," "although." fa, 253. 2& CD tZi "in the time of the sun's shin- ing." ih-S't' potential present form of ^ to " live," or " be,"- 2CO and 203. 1. VZ-O-^tf ft, etc. 253. f>, 270. V* 9 *& polite negative pre- sent form of v5 "want," "need." c- l&&', etc., here literally, "Very much, by the sun I can be shone upon, in degree." EKg/Og* - - < &, expressive of the great measure of the sun's shining. ) -Olt ^silS present potential of *C 9-OltS " shine upon." d. vO^i < " a sip ; " for/wfcw see 281 ; for change of & < to , { see 122, SPECIAL NOTE, jft ^g$*J ^[SVSL, polite substitute for the direct imperative, 193, e. 9. etc., somewhat literally, " Now, (g|| ft) recently the proposed (*2-l*^t Vfett &Lfe> speech- doing-put) conversations jb\rjb) although (^J) to-day (tt^> li) wishing to begin, (MtDfe5 C^V^i"). y u (*^fe t*) as y et (9t^> concerning that (^ & ft OV*C> n y g od thought (felt fr *V> Jf2 #&J5$^ $) has not been? (r^\ra^^ t:Lfi *)" Or "Now, although wishing to begin to-day our recently proposed conversations, have you as yet any good plan concerning them ? " Study this sent- ence in connection with the paragraphs 90, 97, 100 and 101. g ft, "at the time" = "now," = "well!" 20 &ZAj, " this while," = 'recently," = "the other day." jfe-li&L Vfet*C NOTES ON CONVERSATION FIRST. 537 { " speech doing put conversation " = " conversation put into speech," = " conversations we spoke of." The student has already probably noticed the redundancy of verbal forms peculiar to Japanese speech ; as here, the apparently superfluous use of 3 & Lfe. The sense intended is complete -without it. Explanatory of the use of this verbal form here, and of much else of the kind appearing in these " Conversations," we quote a note from Prof. Chamberlain's " Hand- book." He says, " The Japanese have a great fondness for rounding off their sentences by one o? the equivalents for " to be," or by kuru, oku, shimau, or yam. The plain verb, without one or other of these auxiliaries, is apt to sound bald. Where an English idiom for the most part simply states the occurrence of an action, Japanese idiom delights in describing more particularly the manner of the action's occurrence with reference to the subsidiary ideas of "coming," "finishing," etc. which the auxiliaries express. For instance, an English rnaid-servant, speaking of a piece of dirty h'nen, -will say, ' I will have it washed, Sir.' Her Japanese sister would say " Arawa- shite okimashd, lit.," ' Having catised (some one) to wash (it, I) will put (it),' " that is to say," ' I will have it washed and there it will be.' The simple verb merely states the dry fact. The addition of the auxiliary makes the action seem to pass vividly before you. The sentence becomes life-like and picturesque." # pronounced kyo (44)- Utt&/2 polite desiderative form of UtC&Jg. "begin," 193. OV*C gerund of , etc. lit. " Therefore, by some means, your manner of person, that drill (I) wish to do." 5 it $>;&> " upon that " = " there- fore." * *> # a compound of the interrogative jjj, and the adverb '*>, "how?" is equivalent to the questioning, "how shall it be done ? " and the answering, " somehow or other." , is a conjunction particle indicating that which has been thought by the speaker, see 275, b. See also 99. 53S SECTION III. PKA.CTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 10. a. LfaL, etc. lit., "But only for the sake of (jfeg 0)3} ft) speaking, (li&L- "?%), as for the thing called speaking, (&&L & "?<& V.S E> &) rather tedious thing (it) is." v.5 CD see 128, 130 ; but also note that the particle g) here stands as an equivalent for jf "thing," or "act." The expression vi5 is one of the com- monest idioms of Japanese speech. It is tised to distinguish, or to specify definitely, something named; as KOJ$/0 2* V.5 < IZ, " The country called Japan," = "Japan." &; V S/0&. "The woman called Haru," = " Haru." & v.5 &0, " The thing named writing-brush," = "pen." & i>fe { L & etc.. rather freely, " As for me, (if) somehow yon, my country's words, freely way of using, acquire, good, that I think." fc-OjhV* &3 > = " use J " *he verbal form 'O'fatA, is made polite by the addition of &&. Mr. Imbrie in his "Hand-book of Japanese Etymology " says, " when the person addressed or referred to is the agent in the action, the verb assumes the stem " (Main Stem) " form (excepting those verbs made up of a noun and sum in which the sum becomes nasani) and is followed by nasmu or ni wmi.'' Here it is the main stem of "Ofa!* with &3J5' & &(> conditional present of j&S, "be," "become." c- & L- >5 JlL J65 e * c -> " 1^ that you had done, your in Japan living fact, even now than, a great deal interesting become may be." $ ,, here an adverbial form meaning " if," " perchance," " in case that," etc. "3 ti&>, certain past conditional of ;, "do," "be able." f'&tA- Main Stem of the verb ^StS*. use( i substantively, = ' period of living," = life, 147. V5 * 9, 26 5, with 211. jr^f\ra-&5 P>b- able present, or future, of polite verb JT^fSS "be;" itself in polite form with jfc-f . d. t) v>&. etc > " I n what manner, if chosen is good, that, in various ways thinking (I) have looked, but." j ^ V5' = " what ?" Ut 5 tii5>- is another spelling of tJt*SUtJ& pronounced hoho, " method," "mode of doing." &{. present conditional present of JJ^, " select " or " choose." jjj gives an interrogative form to the preced- ing clause. V5/ s ig n f repetition, 74; plural form for V-3> 104. c. jf , a subordinating conjunction, indicating that which had just been said, 275, 6. j4>/Oj5i^*C 3*9t L fe, " thinking have looked," = " have thought and tried." When gi<5 is combined with a gerund it has the meaning of " trying," " seeking." The Japanese sentence is carried NOTES ON CONVEKSATION FIRST. 539 forward to the next sentence in the English text by the particle jj$ " but," or " however." e - &&& J5S e * c - This sentence can hardly be reproduced intel- ligibly with any nearer approach to literalness than is given in its equi%-alent on the opposite page. &$ >) , jJ>Vfe U > are alternative forms (137) of $ and jjj < "read," and "write," and should be rendered ' rending and writing." For euphonic changes of $?, see 165; of jj< see 163. $% = " to do." When g is added to the present of a verb it gives the verb somewhat the character of the "infinitive" in English. jfe-&$Z& fcSOfe g CD *>;, " learned-time proverbs," = " proverbs of the time when you learned the Hiragana," etc. &&L, L,t & V>2>tfS *& b > "speech making as for, how is (it) ? " = " how would you like to talk," etc ? 11. a - "ibtifa li etc., " As for you, because to me service doing con- descending, physician that same is, anything in your way of com- mand, (I) shall do." ;$} ,* < 2j5. " service doing condescend- ing," = "condescending to do service." |2-VL^ S9t ~& &D ? " physician that same is," = " the same as being a physician tome." tt-Lr3 "11: *J It, "byway of command;" dori for tori, see 1 22, SPECIAL NOTE ; pronounced tori, see 45. -firjb, " help," k*C from -^^ (196) " do ; " therefore ftjb L"C " assisting," " befriending." i #3 S. " condescend; " abbreviation of old potential form of < ^-f 1 i.e. ^ j3jiz,J, " to let down," now used as polite expression for " con- descension," " receiving as from a superior," 297. See also, " SPECIAL EXPLICATION," p. 533, d. )t2-V L<^ S E a double honorific for v L $?, " physician," 295. $&> (7) "your," 124. ^- plurality for 2jh/ by adding , 104, b. and 123. jfc^f 5 $, " proverbs' interior," s= " in the proverbs. For possessive form, see 106 and 245. Vl> 510 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. " what called," = " what kind of." 3j6SL*C 3*-^ *>> "way of looking" = "finding out;" compare Kemark 10, d. 3t-Jfc " mode of looking for anything " " to find out." C^ contraction of the associated postpositions and & ; \fc serving to give emphasis to . c. > It., etc , " As for a proverb being ( j 9 Jfc k*O turned into things like dollars, being current in the world, riches of people it becomes, (that become thing isj." \f)]/ " dollar," = generic name for " coin " among the Japanese. ; 9 L*C> = " being," has here con- junctive force like #J " but," in the same position. Again observe the use of CD as equivalent to " thing." For ^ again see 275, b. d- t CD ! etc. " These proverbs, Japan's old precious things a portion are." &<5{| " old," see 219. ? ifc/ J5S etc. " This, those proverbs are." JJJ, 239. / jfofe^L' li, etc. " I, I-ro-/i order in, arranging have put." For use of auxiliary ;fj , / " have put," see Remark 9, sentence b. '.l- Sit &> etc. "'This, conversations' themes for making, how will ( it) be ? " {Z k*C I*, 256. 13. - ^ Jr^Vr*^^ 5, " Good probably win be ! " = " AU light ! " ^- Li> L. etc. " But you, interpreter doing condescending, if it be not. becomes not." = " It will not do if you do not kindly become in- terpreter." In Japanese speech the notion of necessity to do some- thing is conveyed by the use of a double negative, as here, $jlt &{ & U X-&/V- " if it is not won't do," = " the thing won't do if you are not (interpreter)," = " you must be the interpreter." $J If jfoyj, present conditional of J&3><5, (& { and <<) " n t is," = " is not." 14. CD, etc., " As for j r our part, by you, sufficiently you can do." , "by," 250. b. g*C etc. " So then, hereupon the v> proverb is." g*t, a word often used either at resuming a conversation or commencing a new subject. c. /bite < L ldt> etc., " Sometimes, (^g } ) this proverb, really your affair well touches, that I think." 73j", 74, and 101. c. ; '> " that I think," = "I think that," of English speech. , etc. Of course, that (the proverb) "ten hearing one knows " " that (so; made if it were, even a little with you connection is not," = English equivalent on opposite page. NOTES ON CONVERSATION FIRST. 541 15. tc. "Honorable salutation thankful wish is." = " Thanks for the compliment ! " T honorific. & 2 CD CD "5> etc. " Hereafter, at praising wishing to receive time, banquet for I will arise." c. * jjj, etc. " It is, but, (the) in America called Ireland-man's riddle, that like thing if it were, need is not." Or, " Yes, but I do not need anything like what is called in America an Irishman's puzzle." *"" )5S pronounced desu nga ; ordinarily the u in desii is silent ; see 5, 1). For "fff a better word would probably be <*CO It' " ailusion," " insinuation." 17. & L- * fe^*C> etc. " By foot, me, house's outside to, kicking cast out, (in order that) that house's master, (with) me as guest, not pleased, that thing to let me know, that fact is." ^>O*C much used as emphatic compound postposition = " by means of." /\. 246. CDH&> "not pleased with," certain present negative of CDt?> " like," " pleased with," 187. For VS. ^ V(> JJ> b ViX> = " that," and " this," as demonstrative pronominal forms, see 128. CS'&i causative form of fc,J = "know," 206. 18. &&ft CD, etc. "Your speaking way, as for, this proverb in strange relation usage (use thing) is." The first use of CD is as sign of genitive, 245 ; the second and third uses of CD are as equivalents for " fact," or " thing," here used after verbal forms ; but see also 261. & #2 J5i> etc. " But jon with that different thing said by reason of, this proverb's meaning clear became," or, " But by reason of your saying a different thing with it, the meaning of this proverb became clear." / }5J, more familiar form of *? J5J, = " It is so, but," Re- mark 15, c. "StfJOfe, certain past of -^gJA, "differ," 168. jfeO,JOfe, certain past of polite verb ftOkJfrS, "speak," 167. fej tt " for the sake of," = " on account of." ^g ft, adverbial form of " clear," 229. c. ,55V> f>CD. etc. "Because (jj) also white thing black thing at the side of put, that more white visible way is" CD "beside," 255. &(&, "still more." ^,5< adverbial form, simple adjective form of L3, " white." 3iJ|)^ = Sil^S, potential form of 315, 205. 542 SECTION III. PKACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. 19 & I* 9 $ b, probable present of $ ^^55, " apply to," = " true of." V2>#3 t?-& b > = " How ma 7 it; be ? " 20. a. { 3A/0 k*C, " Nationally, (as a nation), if seen, fool being (we are) not." L*C " that doing " gives an adverbial quality to the word to which it is annexed. 3* ft , conditional present of gl J , " see." > = " we,'' 104 c. t? tt: here & gives force to the postposition . negative present of S<5 = "be." b. V>"5 K> etc -> "Only (fcj6 *J ) one part heard being, conclusion guess at, rather acute (we) are." {|;J69 "only," 227. S'O'f'JS, " guess at," pronounced sassrmi, 55. f- i>55S 5 < f"S= "most popular." ^5' *^ *?!* 3t2 9 S'f'' " m ade of enigmas ; " this phrase does not render well the words, " suggestive fancies " given in the English text. d- Ztl K Sfe' = "Now again." gf^^ WtD "argu- ment's beginning," = " beginning of an argument," with accusative sign . fe^*5 U, "immediately." 3 lt*55/0. = " that argu- ment's conclusion." ?& ^) { , '"flying go." 2&t from "fly," 165. V>& Z&J^/O, " that censure." fr&t " often receive." /fcO!/ 230. jj> ^ ^95"^". polite reference to Japan's critics. " We are often blamed," as politely expressed in Japanese, is " We often receive from our superiors this censure." 21. - $&& CD tt-ilZ CD &, " Your honorable country's people," is Japanese polite periphrasis for " your people." tCJjJ" = " for the most part," = " very." b. *>fe< L CD 5 "5 CD &L O^>84 f)CD*a, "My house's call and message bear things," is considered a rather refined form of expression for tho simple English " my servants." Note the plural sign with f)CD. 104, 6. jfejf *^{f , = " for example." $, = " even." T3<*9 ^[2> = "badly." J^V>^S *. "commands," to inferiore. Dib"*) V^feLS'f*' " consenting do " = " respectfully listen to." c - Lt L& , " often," 230. ftjf-5 < 2^, "astonish thing," = "astonishment," 112. C'^f*)9t'^' polite certain present of the polite verb 2T?J5 " be." Hitherto this verb has appeared in these con versa- NOTES ON CONVERSATION FIRST. 543 tions as ST^fV9t"i > '. ^"hich is the usual form for C^f<5 when com- pounded with 3t^; the r being then dropped. The same peculiarity is true of the verbs \*i'OL&<5< "go," "come," "be," {^S^, "condescend;" J&3J5 "deign to do," and jftOt^JfcJS. "deign to say." See SPECIAL EXPLICATION, p. 533. d. Tfc&li ffi, " that," with emphatic particle, = " Indeed ! " vWt *> pronounced iicC> = future of V>5- V& 2f jftf>O*C 2&<5 S , = " that which I thought to say." >& ^ "^ {?, = " before hearing.'' 5*5 U with negative of a verb. = "before." ftt)O*CS = |Jf)O*C J& ;g, see SPECIAL EXPLICATION, p. 533, e. ,*>"$ C,fe, = " acknowledg- ment has done," = "have understood." g pronounced tfo, "ten." Tnnt Wft y is." = "Yes, that is so." >> etc. " I also, we Japanese people too quick under- standing carried to excess, that think." &j ^J*C/0, "quick under- standing," see 119. & ^SfSS. "do exceed" = "carry to excess." *^F'5> expresses " excess " for an action or thing. c - :>&/ etc. "Our minds are quick of perception, (OS/0 1 &.5) but, on account of that mental quickness some times not known thing even knowing is, that (we) think." ,*5*C 5& S. illustration of a common combination of a gerund with the auxiliary J&;, or jftJ, "be," forming compound progressive or continuous tenses cor- responding to such English expressions as " I am giving," " I was doing etc." " Sometimes we think that we are knowing even not known things." See page 533, e. d. f>O$, etc., "Properly, there are times, four if hearing we should know six, convenient would be." DtfJ.J* CD V>> " good of condition." = " convenient," 224. e - Sfcfe- e t c -> " Again, hearing seven and even know three (things) is a splendid thing, but, one (thing) hearing ten know, that thinking, when (jf g ft) that scarcely heard one thing even was not known, really a not convenient thing (it) will be." )f2$O*C 55fe ; 5&fe is certain past of J&Jg. LS&Jh'^fe. certain past negative of ,:, "know." J&3, conditional present of J&Jg. &O&&, pronounced futsugo, = " inconvenient ; " &, negative prefix. / S b L"C &&(& etc. " Thus, this proverb clever men praising, rightly good thing is, but everybody at once, this his own thing is, that thinking is not good." S ^ L*C <%l;ill> "so doing if seen," = 544 ^SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. " thus." fzji < f>, 131. fejft, polite form for ftfr. ^, " is," con- traction of and ;, p. 533, c. 23. a. b. *%$?*)', etc. "Long-sitting-doing, excuse is not." ^ ?> i* jklft, same as ii-icake, " excuse," or " explanation." JJ J> ,, polite prefix for verbs instead of vZ&- c- t^'O&lV* fa S ?> etc. " Rude manner of speech is it, but, your wisdom-concerning-instruction myself for the sake of, becomes your word-concerning-instruction, not an inferior thing." $|, " body," or " self." jf2 jf J5, " to be inferior in excellence." d- T)fo t li. etc. "That being, honorable leave say," = "Well then, I must go." Polite idiom used in taking one's departure from another. 24. VE StJfeN etc-. "As yet plenty of space of time is, but though that, if honorable returning is, again to-morrow (I) await, (you)." b. $&>&, etc. " Evening six o'clock time at, coming thing is (it) not able ? " fa-V*^ &3 J 2 > polite expression for " coming." jfa-V*^ J&3 S> is ^ n honorific phrase verb constantly in use meaning not only " to come," but, according to its context, also " to go," " to dwell in," and " to be." c. J-VO L K, etc. " Together, evening meal we will eat." It, 255. {& ftL "evening boiled-rice," = "supper." probable present or future of fe/^S. " eat." ^ U Jiife ^ > etc., here very polite use of b. fJ-S 5 5 ^f k> etc. " Your intention deeply admire (or appre- ciate)." The use of the honorific jft or is, as a rule, a good substitute for " the second person," grammatically speaking, in the impersonal Japanese language, 295. &> { , adverbial form of the adjective 219. t**<*>& V>feLai% Polite form of ,* t, < jfc& > " admire," " praise." - S^* b "&&> the usual equivalent for the English, " farewell ! " or " good bye ! " lit., " If that be so," leaving certain words to be under- stood, as, probably, " we shall meet again " ; the Japanese " anf toieder- sehen," or " au reooir." 26. a. b. 3 is, etc. " The honorable visitor honorable returning is." Here the honorifics are used o/ the person not to him. The NOTES ON CONVERSATION SECOND. 545 servant must put up the with superior $> (de ant) instead of the polite Zr^f*)9t"^ which would be used in an address to the guest. c - *6L i- etc., "Hat and outside things being." g, "and," 275. & ft 8 > etc -, "Mind deign to apply," = " Ee attentive !" = " Take care of yourself ! " jfj- Olft &cl V>$ C> polite imperative form of "O It 5 "apply," 193, c. CONVERSATION SECOND. REMARK 1. a. 2&{/l< ti, "As for this evening," (it is "cool," "warm," "pleasant," etc.,) 102; a salutation, = " Good evening." & WC* B, "exceedingly," 229. tr?A, (fr** fr-2) fC, " lazy," 232. OZH, etc., " alas, slow became." 2. fl - Stlfii etc., "Yet so much late is not." & Jfr / > contraction of j ^ j^> < , = " bardly," " scarcely," 74. tO-4i/?>, pronounced jippun, 55. c - i)5V>i "bad," here = "ill." 3. a. QCJ^ t) , pronoun ^yofct. J5J, = "but." g < K/0 " l' ist evening." Sit, = "rice-wine." CD&i'Sakite, certain past of CDai'-fif 5> "to over-drink." J5> < (Z fe V./0 CD, " to duty does not stand up one," = "is not useful," = "not to be depended upon." j{ , " duty." ft V- /{> C9, for Jfe VJiSl , " n t stand up one." Jfe Vfe, is negative present of ftW U, = " As a servant." 5 CD *> " customary thing." , " those persons " = " their ; " not a polite form of express- 54G SECTION III. PRACTICE IX THE COLLOQUIAL. ion; 123 and 104. ,&&, " work." fafa $#>> = "more really than one would suppose." C3kjjai)5S tt$L&'&, "bone is broken ;" idiom for " hard worked." Jjjl^, " because.' 1 OZ/l> expression showing " regret," " disappointment," and the like. { J5J O { , " habit sticks to," = " to foi-m a habit." c - fatt & CD b *5 CD' " m T house's " = "my own." $, "also." *?>$> L<6>fe J5J &V> " Even, how doing side is not," = "Eeally! there is no other way." = "Can't be helped." j- ty $, 280. ,$>/, etc., a phrase constantly heard in Japan telling of " helplessnes," or " inevitable submission." VO*C, etc., 275, b., " that saying is," = " that he says." d. j* 1) 5* S *$ % s\, etc., " Please, hither mending or adjusting, deign to do," = "Please take your seat there." s^, 261. &13;>), from &t<5' " be mended," " translated," " cured," etc., 187. e. 2T^/0 $W (?) ^11:9. " See, reception's way," = "See, ho\v I receive you." ([J: fa CD, abbreviation for t/0j O, "real." 2>&V t*2f , = "person of the home," = "member of family." j'5^> " same way." /. " Japan cookery's different (things), anything is not ; = " Nothing other than Japanese food." foil $ ZTfV > &/l'> 131. 5. a. jbfe < C. fe C2, " For my sake." $>&-& *2 tfe < , "supper's preparation." JJ>/\*C E>3& &5 "altering do not condescend side," = " do not change." Jto*\O*C, etc., "on the con- trary thankfulness is." Jto/\*C gerund of jij/\<, "change," or "alter." ^^\O*C, adverb, " on the contrary," from &s\%, "return." Z>. MfO 1Z *> , much used in conversation for the English " fine," " delicious," " splendid," etc. 6. <* JT CV>5 K " without constraint," "freely." 6. &, here as interrogation between tfT-;V and Sit. ^> indi- cates an alternative. &&$?*) St'?' 3>> polite form of request con- cerning one's eating or drinking, 297. 7. <* V/fc ST 8 St'ft/O' present negative of V>fe ST { > "put on the head," = " to receive respectfully ; " is a polite verb in use for f> & " re- ceive." & 3 ?> , " niore." &IZ $, "anything;" here, with negative verb = " nothing,'' 131. & 2 V U &; f>0> "at here being things," = " these things." 3t3?*C, from SljfJS, " lower clown," = " to carry away;" gerundial form. c- V&2> inteiTOgative adverb, " what ?" as, here, " what thought ? " = " what do yoxi think ? " 9. -ftJtoV* ?>," the whole world." jf2 ; g, " arise thing," = " that which happens." "CQ-fA^ ?> > " fit comment." & 2T-L*5'5, etc., here - "It is acknowledged." fe<3il & g; Jfc < 3*, " skiU," combined with &;, " become," = fe < 3* & 2 , = skilful. L/09, "truth." For kJfr, read LJC^S, "proof." c. , here " at " or " in;" so, " children of schools in America." J*f J;V>> "extremely good," = "the best." ,/\ #) V>*^^>> "part of lessons," = "some lessons." S^fei. "wholly." 20 2;b? 5 "5 K " within this proverb." d. For the use of J here, see 276. gfcfe Ut> is equivalent here to " and also." Jjj as adversative conjunction, " but." jfcg t" " histoiy," " chronicles." ,O*C 9 S'f'' = " knowing is," = " knows ;" fi'om 1,% "know," with auxiliary ft 3 "be." W^-OSi plural of = "men," 104, c. Vi^ifc ) "who even," = -'every one." U li S ItStC^fe. "argument in yielded," = "was defeated." atfe polite form of aitfe, 188. C"D3V 0, "reaUy." ij-5 9 & k/, " the victory took," = " were victorious." 10. a. 5 |&9 tl'-f", " That way is," = " It is that," = "Yes!" & Jb *) tZ, = " for the time being." JJ CD. " of the world," = " world's." )6V2 i t,f&, " reform persons," = " reformers." This ,J^ as used in compound words, = " thing," or " man ; " as #J ^ -,J^, " learning-man " or ' scholar," etc. JJC 5 > " fitting to," " appropriate to." c. Sjfl Jj>$, "after this," = "now." fr'O'C HfoZb ^ *2- i)ZAE'f'. " that saying (it) will be well, that I think," = I think it will be well to say that (the Ha proverb is appropriate to bigots, etc.). d. UFtJl. " sen-ant girl." V)93ft3> compound verb, from " enter," and gfeS. " come." 548 SECTION III. PEACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. / ^5 CD fa- fate. CD, "that honorable side of," = "the gentle- man's." &V L, = " a visiting card." 0v use( li n compound words to convey special honor, as " celebrated," " illustrious," etc. ; shows great respect on the part of the servant. fj. 2*5*3 'V = "Hither honorable guiding say," = "Ask the gentleman, etc. &, a contraction of &jfl, = an affirmative imper- ative, with the main stem of the verb. '* SCD^'i > h't., " poison of spirit," is the common expression of " sorrow for," or " sympathy with," others. V 9^, "until here," = " at this place." ttfr&\frtll& &*)!&&, "if not put aside will not do " = " must stop," Conv. 1, 13, 6. i. " Really now from Kyoto a friend having come," etc. tt\rQ'O &, " important." !*&*> *> Z& 9, 104, a. 3- jfo;5i;b3l3C'& *> = "may I ask," from &S& "to ask." The negative stem of &$>& is jfaj5Jjfc>, 169. From the negative stem is formed the passive or potential form jfoj5J;fo&J> (200) whose polite form is toMivilQ-f, of which the future as #&& , = " may I ask, or " expect," or, in this connection, with jj = " can you come ? " 11. a. V"O*fy, " when whatever, = "at any time," or " always." 6. " For () my pleasure." (jK-C^S, etc.,) " obstruction doing be- comes not," = " must not become an inconvenience." o. VV3 $, "always." ^ IfC, " receiving." fev>*CV> fato C " about what hour time ? " t&St> " leisure." 12. "(.* CD ,- = "immediately after." ^, contraction of = "if-" V>-5 fob *V = "best," 213. & *2-V-C* fo&l, = "if you come." V^feSftia-ft^. potential future of Vfe^, " can be done." t bJRAs, " fully." 13. a - tt i S & from tt," back part of the house," with the honorific suffix S9t " lady of the house;" it having been customary for a lady in ancient Japan to stay in rooms remote from the front of a house. &> etc., " As far as the porch it is unrest," = " I shall be very much disturbed if you go with me to the door." The phrase is a polite protest. 14. > e ^ c -> " No, there is no reason at all for being disturbed." It, "besides." tfjh'N It '&*$' Jh3> "because to meet- ing go out," = " because I go to meet." *St < ^, from *CJ5, " go out." c- **>*!>&> pron. chochin, etc., "Lantern honorable possession is ? " = " Have you a lantern ? " 15. " 3ff%> etc., " Way well knowing is," = " I know the path well." l>- jt2-J$ >1 f'3A &3V> "Honorable rest deign to do," = "Good night ! " CONVERSATION THIRD. The accusative sign g should be inserted in the "Proverb" before 5* { REMARK 1. et c -> a customary form of apology, " For some time honorable negligence have done." ,{13 {, "some time," long or short. ET-iKSfe' " remissness," from jS /jj, " communication," J&, ne- gative prefix, and 2T, honorific prefix for the sake of the person ad- dressed. '' ST^/O U tey&Lft. fr, = "Have you seen?" ST3&, "august look," used only in polite address to another, 297. 2. . 4, exclamatory acknowledgment. It may mean "Yes!" or "I hear you," 233 and 2SO. l>. $& { i>V>> = " complete restoration to health." %?&> t> , a tfiwil- iar verb form from and ; *> ; J^^ being the probable present of 25 J5, " be." The two words here = I suppose," or "I hope." VO- /SV> literally, "one person," but used here adverbially, = " really" ; thus, " Really what haviij g deigned to do thing is it ? " = " What happened?" 3. JJvff S> etc., " Wind having drawn, cruel affair met," = "Hav- ing caught cold I had a severe experience." 550 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIA.L. b, &? t 9C, etc., " Recently here to came (time), the day after affair it is." c. d. T)Lt, "and." &J5V*C *^9EC,fe t*, "walking went up thing, by means of." ZAD^ b K &O < &O*C S 5 C^fe, " ex- ceedingly hot became," (becoming came). ji g jj> { , " perspire." feV3 ^, = "freely." e. ~Z% 75 J, = "So then." *, "temple." } {, "in time" = "when." 5V*C c3cL*C = "was blowing," see 98. &; see also p. 543, 22, r. U < &ZA/2, "period of short time," = " a little while/' g7J< Vfe L*C J^U^i" , " rest doing, that being," = "to rest." In the sentence, OZA 3* < 7 g &< ^Ot 5259- E ^?2. tne words 5* i 7# St? i i express the chill and cold feeling of " catching cold;" J&r3*C 5S&OEL?2. " becoming came." = "be- came." 4. (t- > b D/^ from J; ^ DA/) "caution," or "prudence," and ^>, negative prefix, ^a, 280. b. ^>*5 g 1 ^Ji>Ofe, " possession being without," = " not having." ^5 from ^>O, " to hold " or "possess." &jJ>Ofe " was not," or " had not ; " certain past of ft[jiS, (& i and ^5), " is not," or " have not." See 219, negative verbal forms of adjective. Also above, Con- versation 1. " SPECIAL EXPLICATION," p. 32, a. 5. a. f>*5*C etc., " As for having it was, but," etc. >$& CD & " mountain foot's side," = " at the foot of the mountain. " & Jj , " side." Conversation 1. Remark 4, sentence c. b. ftV'C 8te> "placing came," = "put," or "left." gerund of jfj { , "to put," 163. 6. a. 02T 5, "lately." $g * ), " fine fall-days." " danger." b- &l?9t> "valley-spaces." V3feVS * s use ^ nere literally as " the top of the head," or " summit " of the mountains. The figura- tive use of V3te Sf i when one "receives respectfully " from another has been noticed. See also 297, for note of its figurative use. 7. a - 12^5 < &O*C jj>3, = "After becoming late." "Kara only has the sense of "after," when suffixed to the gerund in te, and in a few NOTES ON CONVERSATION THIRD. 551 special locutions, as, itte kara, " after going," mlmashite kara, " after seeing," /core kara " after this," sore kara " after that." The past itta kara means " because he has gone," etc., Chamberlain's " Hand book," paragraph 100. ZACDijtljSife, " sun's going down side at," = " towards sunset." tt&f > " gradually." & /V>K&> "large part," "considerable," = "quite." /*>? " in the end," or " as the result." v*"5 L- b -fa& l&fa 9 . " on e week only," = "aboTit a week." tAO2&* J^OSt^fe' "withdrawing have been," = "confined." fe { IZ, "to the house." 165. 8. a. f>, abbreviation of f)liJ, "already." J'O&U " clearly good," = " all right." b. ^JJ& &D/0; &D&> is "a noble's wife;" here, "Mikata lady," = " Mrs. Jlikata." 9. a. 2&U"5 l, " As for the day, etc.," = ordinary salutation for " Good day." b. c. A g etc., " More than a month honorable eyes have not hung upon has been, but to-day after a long time it is," (that I see you.) These sentences contain the form of salutation common when friends in Japan meet socially, = " For some time I have been very rude to you." " It is a long while since I have hung upon your honorable eyes " i.e. " been seen by you." 10. a. jf2-tiJE> = a salute made by bowing. &,* gerund of "&"?, " cause to be," = " make." b. Jfe { , ' a house," but here used humbly to indicate the master of the house, Le. the speaker's " husband." ft- ^ tl S , " talk about another," = " what niy husband has said of you." c. d. e.f. jft-tt&L &3 3 b 'Z'f- In tnis clause the phrase " I hear that," of the English equivalent on the opposite page is rend- ered by the suffix 35, = " looks like," "it is said that." With g and a verbal phrase such as, fa-fatl L, J&J* <5> 0>, '' is thing," = "is." 552 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. b. Read, jfcfe < , not jfcfe < ,. O It, "really." pleasant to hear," or " taste." 13. "fZ, L, * f>, etc. "If even a little.it is good," etc. 3 & CD, " the master's, = " husband's." jfi-JtoOs " shade," " power," " help." 11. a - tUP^ "5 lIlS") = " must be astonished at quantity," = so great (a progress) that it is wonderful." /^, see below, Rein. 21, o. a suffix which gives an adjectival quality to verbs and the meaning of " can," " should," or " possibility," and " necessity." Notice the polite J ty L"C fa U 9fc"i% as an equivalent for " says." b. jfc-2 i* U &5 . = "honorable crossing over become things," = " your visits." fe0L2At2 L*C, = " causing pleasure." Jj>l5, "on account of this." ,*>*>> etc., = " always coming." 3^2 ~&. It [fr'OlZ ff, etc., " Really it is splendid ! " c. d. i>O*Cf>^, "convenience department," = "kitchen." 3,1- *) &&&> = " must go around overlooking; " from , "oversee," "superintend." a. 1). $%&> < , contraction of ft^^i & = " I am afraid that," I suppose." H?O'*>Jfc5> Pronounced zetcho, = " mountain summit." ., " that kind of thought." t&aOfe, 197. a - S !> "^"f" ^ f>' = " That is even so." b. &7) U V*C ^, etc. " Being there or being any where, that kind of thought does not arise." For $ repeated in a negative sent- ence, see 272. c- tilt ZTg It f>, " in everything." e>3lEi% from SCDfc. " to enjoy." d. VOfe ZAj?, "said person," = "person who said," or "made (that proverb)." C { S V % -ft^V* d. = "persons of very small heart." ,O*C )ft"9$Z> = "knew," from t'^, and jfJJS; here with ^ ^ > the verb-phrase = " probably knew." * 2T ^O^^), " honorably right," i.e. "You were right (in calling it, etc.) " / *fiS5'S> "the sky," 115. 9O&, "magnificent." D^>A/ *, "by himself," = "by means of his own sight." 3,1 ; S^f }5J NOTES ON CONVERSATION THIRD. 553 = "can see." 0)5J&, "far eye glass," = " telescope." Jfjjj ft [&fu, " foolish man," = " fool." $ 9t-& i>- " is he not ? " 17. * etc., " Yes, but, in the world, so doing people also there are." /$, 277. &. 3 *> \r& 5M, "that kind of people." jfc, 276. a> &#> " besides these," "moreover." V>5/ JS?fj55S' " a ^ kinds of cir- cumstances." $ ;gft, = "peep-holes," 120. c. 2 J$^ ft, " this kind of," = " such." C&.KO f>, " character also." 18. #-&& C- &)5SV9t > t', "(more slowly) honorable speaking I request." '< *>fe< L K ti, - "forme." 5^^ Jz &$ <, = so quickly." S^~Sf-3 = " hearing seize fact," = "understanding." tg- S-fe/C " <> J5J), com- mon for speaking (lij^^ IZ O^sh/V*^ the Japanese language (-* v-gr ), than men's ( ^2 *fe * ) ), clever one (CJfr^ 19. . "Because (#) probably (fe4?/J>) the ladies (&D& speak M'ithout hurry," (JJ><5 / l^J^'i*). This rendering is not a good equivalent for " they have more leisure," given in the English text on the opposite page. '* "ft "*> etc., " There, my probable saying that thinking is, besides, is not," = " Well, what I am thinking I may say is nothing but this," = " I mean this." c- LnV, "age," "era." frfr < It <&&&W "our country's leaders of the past." V9t J&>*3 - VJ'ff/O tZ> " from now about thirty years ago." Vi'ff/O Kt "previously." ^>)5$ if.^, "Our Japan." ii"0 < tt I? f) ?S^Ji& 1&& IZ, " whatever country it may be, to that degree not inferior." &&&'- tZ ^OC *I/0V> K "f V.S etc., " To day even still the old feudal system, wish to restore ( { jbV*^ i LfeV)> that thinking persons there are. 554 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. Here, the thoughts expressed in four sentences of the English text are involved by the Japanese speaker in only one sentence. This is a peculiarity with which the student early in his study should become familiar. " One of the most essential characteristics of the Japanese language," says Professor Chamberlain, " is the extreme degree to which it pushes the synthetic tendency in the structure of sentences. Japanese always tries to incorporate the whole of a statement, however complex it may be and however numerous its parts, within the limits of a single sentence, whose members are all mutually interdependent. In fact the normal Japanese sentence is a paragraph, or (so to say) an organism." See 96, 97, 98. d. i> V^5 Wz / 7J " such people ; " 2 7J is a particle, placing especial emphasis upon the word or phrase it follows. V*Wt$>'5> "as aforesaid," an exceptional verbal form of V><&> an d = " the so-called," "the abovementioned." CD 5* t &&*>?>> "exercise themselves in peeping." 20. t- > &&CO, (t2 understood), = "sincerely." # V> L- J b 9> " ^rent victory." 21. w - f> D> "From the beginning," = " Of course! " $$ /^ , 2T> tc., "Must be done work extraordinarily enough yet is, but." Mr. W. G. Aston says of /, " It is used in many different shades of meaning such as to express probability, possibility, moral obligation, necessity, futurity etc., and may be rendered according to circum- stances by "probably," "may," "ought," "must," "should," "will" etc." fe/Vf*, "unceasing," negative gerund of fe/\ 2, " to end," "fail." ^/OJ$, "progress." ,OV, a combination of ,, main stem of ^55, " do," and , a verbal suffix showing simultaneity of time of action, = " at the same time with," or " that ; " here, " I think that as a nation at the same time we are unceasing (ly) doing pro- gress." 22. a. i>. LfrL 20 $/V = "But beyond this." ft ECr"iS " ii: we had continued the talk." SS t?, = "wholly." fe CD a>^t*< ft, "in your exposition." fo, merely aids the expression of the idea involved in . from 7J' >k '5> " to add," as a smaller thing to a greater 22. a much less abrupt form of speech thau the English "Let us stop ! " = " Let us make an end." b. c. L-t^t 3*f&5, "knowing see," = "look for." ,$ $ \) - && in, an idiomatic expression by which the Japanese avoid the English imperative "Let us." It ends the sentence with u request instead of a command. CONVERSATION FOURTH. REMARK 1. 3lDi>V> C = "shortness," 111. LS-& Jfc5> " so as to cause to know," = " to let us know," 20fi. J^?>, indicates "manner," " mode," " in order to." V CD here CD> as observed before, appears as one of the most common idioms of Japanese speech : it is an equivalent for jf or $CD> "fact," or "thing." In speech this CD often loses its vowel sound and becomes a mere interposed n between the words adjoining. b. C,i>L- "nevertheless," "but." t*)JL- concedes the previous statement, but adds an elucidating statement or inquiry. jJiC^SV* ZA, "a wise man/' jfotfS 7* .* 9 # CD. " Our American " (wise man). The historical error of confusing the Hebrew Psalmist who is referred to in the English text with the " American wise man " spoken of in the Japanese text does not harm the verbal form of these Japanese words. ;fo>5J holds in it the notion of " own," as " my," " his," or " our own." 3. a. Z&jjf CD > " generation of man," = " days of our years." jf JJJfc, " aud also." > f p &li'*>> here " consequently," " that is to say." & 5 b L^i"f, " that say," = " say ; " 275 b., from polite verb >J t> -f. 4. S b t? J^ii^ b . " ' wil1 not be so >' that I think." b- i*>litV^a> JfeStiff ZZ tt *^Lii% "According to our -country's physicians' reports." {^ ^ &l(i, " according to." ^ & { ^^>, "although few," = "not extensive." &j5J V, = "long-life ones," = "centenarians." t^Jfij ^21 -5 CD Z&2t'= t^fe ZA a? , " did per- sons," = " the long-lived people " spoken of. The words j 2 *5 CD> 556 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. are here superfluous ; but, as Prof. Chamberlain says of these words, they are often used by the upper classes in relative phrases as a sort of substitute for the relative pronouns " who," " which," and " that." They " add nothing to the sense and only encumber the construction." fttt'fe V L b > " many." c. f>O-$, "however." V9t C'> " present amount." '\V8/l' D$>3*>>$5> " average of life." &jJ)Ofe "&b> "was probably not." 2iit2"C ^>. = "even if this," = "however this may be." &&> tZ, etc., " Exactly to be measured thing is not," = "something not to be measured absolutely." d. , = " also the things spoken of in either proverb." #Jit> here, "only." #13 ^ , gives the force of " supposition " to the remark. n. '^'Ofa \) , " wholly," " without reserve." CD*S> " after " (he has be- come fifty). >{?&, pronounced kagyo, " business." ^ < -V& = one who has retired from business to enjoy leisure in old age. & J5 b C- b > " habit," " propensity." 6. 2T-D ^ ^/0> etc. Very polite form of reply. '> "exceedingly," "too much;" it becomes" not much," " not very," when used with a negative verb, as here. 7. "f"siL(S "If we did discussion," = "if we argued." fa b , " my side," = " 1." b. ^5*^4* 21 2? > " resist f act," = " resistance," 111. c. jKOlt *> Jf >a> = "Buddhist persons." plural sign, which, in printing here, should have been joined to the word ,KOlt5>2. &lf < It "^ V<5 i>lt *^-ft ^ ." lamentation as for, what reason may there be?" 2 i CD ftV* < jfcO, "living of this world," = "this life." #&: jf, - "escape." J:52tf*l^ ^Sfe " ought to be glad." ,%&/'&, "to be glad," said of others. a word indicating " obligation," or " duty." It is much used as an auxiliary in speech to show what " ought," or " should " be done. d- 4>ffc/5 ft *)", "with regard to these." &"&-# < %b O*f> %tl&'&1&%> f)CD. "greatest thing." here used as superlative sign. 8. , "Buddhist believers." NOTES ON CONVERSATION FIFTH. 557 b. 3*1 ft &/ = "then again." &V " (are) not." g*-Jfr*> ft, " in the same way." g* -J$ should be printed as one word. The sentence reads, somewhat literally; "Then again, in the same way that the American people are not real Christians, Japanese people again also real Buddhists are not." 10. Silltf = 3 %>tll&, "if it be so," = " well then." ftfth , etc., " self casting away." Z&2 feft ft &&, "for man's sake to live." flfc&fe ?> L'V " real doctrine." & v L*C, " loving self." 2) *S3 , = "straggle for victory." &&feV C,*C, = "contrary," "opposing." 6. fe0L&t:* 8 9 a ft = "enjoy." 11. a - feSTLV>, = "right," "correct." The "probability," or "possi- bility," expressed in the sentence lies in both &,K/0> the first, and the last, words. K5:*), = "as you know." r-Oj5J.5 *V>, = "know well how to use the language," = " have the advantage." c. S'N. tl'Sfe &&>> - "if there were ability (to talk)." 20 S?f ft OV*C "concerning this matter." V">2A/2V>, "wish to say." ^, " am thinking." g^ K';!', " wisdom's gold dollar," = " coined wisdom." ; etc., " that is to say, in relation to the llo proverb what honorable thought is there ? " or " have you ? " CONVERSATION FIFTH. REMARK 1. , " golden saying," = "maxim." /^O ft, "separately." 9t"^9tV* " argument also will probably not be." 2. & CSSjIl !65 ^5, "praise is," = " having praise." 7J C U It 5' "not being of praise side," = "absence of praise." Jj- , " honorable opinion is it ? " = "do you believe ? " c. *>fe CD Wi "the world's \vitliin's people," = "the human world." CD $J)8 -- *- Jjj, = " Because this world's people are seeking only (CD2D fault." /& $ " Whoever blame has not, the thing in proportion to, there is no splendid praise." & f>^ i>> " In case that." V>*5*C/0 CD W&&," one spot's fault," here with &v> = "no fault." g V*5fe &> "that if it be said." V>Wtiil<5 J&tt 1&.& (; = "as much praise as possible." 2fc) "praise-words," 120. v> 1&& <5 > passive, or potential of " say," = " can be said," 199, and 203. 4. a. ft-jf &? CD ^^. = " If you take (this proverb with that meaning)." TJjfc ** b #J, " it is right, but." that way," = "so," asiu " why not say so?" r/ - ^U J&~f"ZA i>CD "becomes easily tbing," " easily becomes," b. Tjfa Kt, V!lt3k'&&> " Then, again, a man engaging in a strug- gling after praise, really it won't go." c. #& A It, "gradually." ^>^S/0, "haughtiness." d. gfc, "duty." r5 < -f, " to do the utmost." ^Iftstlii" ^OS- "ftX;, expresses the "obligation" intended by the speaker, = " should." 6. L*ti b fc& VifeC^SL'f'j = " to do acknowledgment," = "admit." k Ift/O&V*. "opinion." r5 ^ jftV CD **>V> K^ff/?; U 9*C "With regard to common weak humanity." &jto ^f9t'^> "too high." c. ^ < IZ feVi'f'^. "fronting virtue," = "for virtue." # ^\r ^^ l^ ^IS 3 ft, = "no time of reward." "good-deeds." ZAC* 5 K "f" < ^ < > = " extremely few." , 7. S ^ )6> i) L^LS-er^. An idiom indicating "probability." Literally " Is it so? even can not be known," (but it probably is so). O < Ofe 2A^f, " man who made the proverb." )J- f> CD, = "as should be," literally, " must be manner." ^. " from the side of." #$;> for $>;&, " side-row." g ^ VOfe , "so probably said." fcOSV* CD ^9S5' "actual condi- NOTES ON NORI NO HATSU-NE. 559 tion." & >) 3 Jfc, from main stem of $ Jg "be," and g "form," or "condition." &O*C 55fe CD *& J5J, = "probably knew, but." j ^ jf < -C^5' = " morally," from ${, "morality" andtJJ> "above," i.e. " morally high." -Sv> K, " to the grade," or "level." 8. *> ($S ^S SOiJJfc^ " a summ i* i that must be scram- bled up to." jjjjfi Cft ,&&, "that or this, say not," = "I shall not say anything one way or another about it." 6- fei" &>, " trying thing," =" test." ZAg:, " severe proverb." "at any rate." &5V fy, "unequalled," pronounced sekkyo-k^, "preacher." This jjj is an affix of "occupation," e.f/. liftL-Jj*) "story teller." d. litOLt, "never" 231. Ogf 2i*>^ U, "in the next proverb." 5&&Lt &S fA^C/0, "visible fault," = "fault shown tip-" ^lit^JSV. It ^9 E't'SVv " to be the subject of is pro- bably not," = " are not guilty (of the fault)." Nor I no Hatsu-iie, (pp. 526-531). V line. 55A J6>3;fo. literally " to pile up the days," i.e. to spend or waste the time for any purpose. % > S "C&> literally, " flowing and rolling : transmigration of the soul into angel, man, brute, etc., according to the merits of its deeds." Hi lii& i " without success," " evanescent." JU The writer of this hymn belonged to a Buddhist sect which believes it possible for all mankind to attain to perfect Buddhahood. 53: lt> or " Buddhas, are men, who have toiled upward through successive stages of existence to the calm of perfect holiness." *5 5S9A- 3. "floating," "drifting." 3i, "body," " con- crete self ." 53*' is " uncertain " or "changeable life," = " vain selves." & .. SA/^tfJli. "River of Three Paths"; a river flowing in the underworld according to the Buddhist mythology, over which the souls of the dead go ; at which a road divides into tbree paths leading respectively to the worlds of " Demons," of " Brutes," and of the " Hungry Ones." 560 SECTION III. PRACTICE IN THE COLLOQUIAL. jh, line. jft/L/*J> "union by growing together." Two branches of a tree becoming one branch are thought of as a symbol of happiness. The Japanese refer to it as a figure of the dearest human relation, that of husband and wife. fa &t? refers tp the sacred phrase " NAMU AMIDA BUDDHA," peculiar to some of the Buddhist sects, e.g. Jodo and Shinshiu. The believers in AMIDA BUDDHA, gain salvation simply by their faith in AMIDA. " Salvation " is " the attainment of Nirvana, which means eternal happiness." " From the time of putting faith in the saving power of Buddha, we do not need any power of self-help, but need only keep his mercy in heart and invoke his name." Unheeded advice is likened to the blowing of the east- wind into a horse's ears. $S .. &D-$ > *> C9 <&*ak or &, "not-constant" wind, = "Death wind." "He was carried away" by this wind, = "he is dead." V (<&) tine- V5 CD V9t 9t*> " till now of now," " till the present of the present," = " at this very moment." This line properly should commence with JJ not v>> but the writer of the hymn apparently had not at command a fit word beginning with & *C line. When the Buddha was born he sank from his mother's side upon a blue lotus-flower, and, says the legend, from his body radiated a brilliant light that illuminated the universe Soon afterwards the child descended from the lotus, pointed with his right hand to heaven, with his left to the earth, and ex- claimed with the voice of a lion ; " I alone of all beings in heaven above and under the heavens am worthy of honor." 3 ,. 3& 42 5 tQe Sambo, are the three precious things of Buddhism, namely, the Buddhist ritual and body of doctrine, or the "Law"; the priesthood, or the "Church," and salvation into Nirvana, or " Buddhahood." 3* The Jodo Buddhists believe that salvation is merited by one's simply repeating the invocation to Amida, " NAMU AMIDA BUDDHA," ' I adore thee, Eternal Buddha." GENERAL INDEX. The numerals refer to paragraphs, unless othenvise specified. A. Abbreviation, how shown, 72. Ablative case, equivalent for, 248. Abstract nouns, 110. Accent 75-80 ; not prominent, 75; where placed, 76-79. Accusative sign, 247. Adjectival adverb, 228. Adjectival phrases, 220-225. Adjectival verb forms, 139; ger- und, or participle, or subordin- ative form, 139, a ; desiderative form, or desiderative adjective, 139, b. Adjectival inflection, 219. Adjectives, 208-225 ; comparison, 210-213; comparative degree, 211 ; superlative, 21 3 ; inflection of, 219; adverbial form, 217, 218 ; verbs and nouns as, 221, 223 ; phrase adjectives. 2'24 ; nouns with no or wi, 221 ; with rashii, 222 ; adjectival adverbs, 228 ; verb forms, 139 ; in succes- sion how affected, 98, 6 ; as attribute, or predicate, 215; classical termination of, 21G ; in ku, have predicative force, 217 ; desiderative form as, 225. Adverbial adjectives, how formed, 217 ; euphonic change in, 218. Adverbs, 226-233 ; adjectival, 228 ; ni as sign of, 229; nouns as, 229 ; reduplicated words as, 230 ; gerunds as, 231 ; onomato- poetic words, 232 ; responsives 233. Alternative, or Frequentative verbal form, 137. Amari with negative verb, p. 556, Q,b. Arrangement of words in speech, 96-102. Article, none in Japanese, 103. Aru p. 532 ; how made polite, p. 532, b; peculiar inflection forms, 167. Aston, W. G. 41 ; 95 ; 96 ; 554. A u how usually pronounced, 40. Augmentative nouns, 115. Aiixiliaries to numerals, 281-282 _ Auxiliary verbs, peculiar use of some, p. 537. B. Bases of inflection, 141. Beki, p. 552, 14, . Bu, negative prefix, p. 549, 1, a. Buddhism, effect of upon litera- ture, p. 4. c. Cardinal numerals, 83-86. Case signs, 237-248 ; ga and tea, 239-244 ; nominative, 239 ; gen- itive, 245; dative, 246; accus- ative, 247; vocative, 248, ab- lative, 248 ; declension of noun, 106. Causative voice, 206 ; of kuru and sum, 207. Certain past tense, 136. Certain present tense, 136. Certain present, the, 142. Certain present stem, its forms of inflection, 181-183, 143, 151- 155 ; its office in verbal inflec- tion, 151 ; gives a verb its name, 153; in connection with the 562 GENERAL INDEX. main stem determines form of conjugation, 154; is at times noun, or adjective, 155. Chamberlain, Prof. B. H. 97 ; 122 ; 201; 3 10; 320; pp. 353; 551; 554; 556. Chinese ideographs, use of, p. 5 ; probable future of, p. 16. Chinese numerals, 8490. Coalescent sounds, 50. Colloquial, Exercise in, pp. 208- 531 ; separation from Written Language, p. 8 ; modern influ- ences dignifying, p. 13 ; future relation to Written Language, p. 14. Colloquial, Tokyo, probable future of, pp. 1, 14. Comma, mark for, 63. Comparative degree, how formed, 211. Comparison of adjectives, 210- 213. Compound nouns, 117-122. Concessive mode, 138. Concrete nouns, 113. Conditional mode, 138. Conditional base, the, 142. Conditional stem, 143, 156 ; its offices in verbal inflection forms, 184-186. Conjugations, how grouped, 159- 17 J; first, how marked, 160; euphonic changes in first, 162- 169; second conjugation, how marked, 170 ; in second con- jugation, two series of inflec- tions, 171. Conjunctions, 266-278; 38, , and p. 541, 18, a ; as ', p. 555, 1, a. Nominative sign, 239. Nori no liat.iu-ne, p. 527. Nouns, 104-122; number, 104; gender, 105 ; case, 10(5 ; classes of, 107-122 ; simple, 1<8; deriv- ative, 109-116; compound, 117- 1-2; abstract, 1 10; concrete, 113 ; diminutive, 114; augmentative, 115; verbal. 116; law of the nlgori in compound nouns, 122; declension of, 106 ; as adjectives, 221, 223; as adverbs, 229; as coordinated, how affected, 98, a ; how made honorific, 295 ; as verbs with sum, 19u. Number, questions concerning, 286. Numerals, 82-90; abbreviations of, 89 ; cardinal, 83-86 ; modern combinations of, 87; ordinal 283-285 ; Japanese and Chinese, when used, 90 ; special uses of yo, nana and kyrt, 289. Numeral auxiliaries, 281-282. o. with nouns, 115. ide nnsnru, p. 544, 24, b. Oku, as auxiliary word, p. 537. Omission of words in speech, 102. Onomatopoetic words, as adverbs, 232. Ordinal numerals, 283-285. Oru, auxiliary verb, p. 534, b. P. Paradigms of the first and second conjugations, 187, 188. Parenthesis, 73, Participle, 139. Particles, 94; 234-280; groups of, 236. Passive voice, how formed, 199- 2UI. Past tense, 136. Period, mark of, 61. Personal pronouns, 123 ; com- paratively little use of, 123. Phrase adjectives, 224. Phrase verbs, 198. Phrase conjunctions, 277. Plural signs, 104, b. and c. Polite forms the rule in speech, 300 ; polite verbal inflection, 189-195; imperative mode for, 193, e ; concerning some special polite verbs, p. 533. Possessive pronouns, 124. Postpositions (prepositions), 249- 265 ; de, 250 ; fcara, 251 ; made, 252; ni, 253-256; no, 260-262; to, -J63 ; ye, 364 ; yori, 265 ; ni in 566 GENERAL INDEX. combination, 254 ; 255 ; no in combination, 224 ; 255. Potential verbal forms honorific, 298. Potential voice, 203 ; second potential forms, 204, '205. Practice in the Colloquial, pp. 208-531. Prepositions, see postpositions, 249-265. Present tense, 136. Price, interrogatives of, 288. Primary verbal stems, 141 ; or- dinary names of, 142. Probable past tense, 136. Probable present tense, 136. Progressive tense, p. 543, 22, c. Pronouns, 123-131 ; personal 123; possessive, 124 ; demonstrative, 125 ; interrogative, 12 ( J ; relative, 130; indefinite, 131. Punctuation marks, 58-66. Q. Quantity, questions concerning, 287. Quotation, how made in speech, 99; marks of, 71. R. R syllables, peculiarities of, 19. Rapid and silenced sounds, 51 -'-,!. Rashii, as adjectival sign, 22 .', Reduplicated words, as adverbs, 230; as plural nouns, Hit, c. Relative pronouns, 130. Renri, p. 560. Repetition, marks of, 74. Responsives, '233. River of Three Paths, p. 559. Root of the verb, 140, 142. s. S syllabics. peculiarities of, 0-8. Sa, in formation of abstract nouns, 110. Sambo, p. 560. Sate, p. 540, 14, b. Second conjugation, how marked, 170; paradigm of, 188. Second person, practical equival- ent for, p. 544, '25, b. Sentence, order of words in, 96 ; fundamental law of arrange- ment, 97. Simple nouns, 108. Sha, p. 5 47, 10, 7>. Shi, as conjunction, 274. Shik'ishi, p. 55\ 1, b. Shifoita, p. 54fi, 4, c. Shiwrtt, as auxiliary word, p. 537. #0, cont. of sono yd, p. 539, 12, a. So, with a verbal phrase, p. 551, 10,/. Special Explication, p. 532. Spirant syllabics, 13; how pro- nounced in association, 42 ; 45 ; 46-48. Stem, the, 142. Stems of inflection, 143. Stem signs, table of, 172. Stem of the adjective, 214. Subjunctive mode, 138. Subordinative form, 139. Subsections, and subdivisions, marks of, 69-70. Suggestion for use of this manual, p. 18. Swvj dynasty, literature of, p. 9. Superlative degree, how express- ed, 213. Suppressed sounds, 51-57. 6'wru, inflection of, 197 ; 2t)7. Syllabary, Katnkana 24; Hlra- gana, U2 ; 324. Syllables, how affected by juxta- position, 23-57. Syllables, how coupled, 68. GENERAL INDEX. 567 Syllables, vowel, 2 ; consonant, 2. Sugiru, p. 543, b. T. T syllables, peculiarities of, 9-10. Tare for dare, p. 544, 22; 6. Teniwoha, 94 ; 234-280. Tenses, 136, 137; properly only four in Japanese, 136. Time and place, how related in speech, 101. Transliteration, marks for, 81. Transitive verbs, 132-133. To, (conj.) 275 ; p. 537, d. To shite, p. 542, 20, a. Tokyo Colloquial, its probable future, pp. 1, 14. To i, p. 538, 10, a. Tsu, as phonetic sign, 55 ; peculi- arities of pronunciation, 53, 55. Tsui, p. 546, 4, b. Tsutsu, p. 554, 21, a. Tsure-zure-yusa, p. 11. Tokugawa era and literature, pp. 8-11. u. U sound, peculiarities of pronun- ciation, 52 ; 54 ; 57. Uchi ni, with negative of a verb, p. 543, d. Uninflected words, 95. V. V sound, equivalent for, 22, e. Verbs, 132-207; classes of, 132; dis- tinction of person, how made, 135 ; of number 135, 6 ; tenses 136, 137; mode, 138; adjectival verb forms, 139 ; inflection of, 140-207 ; as adjectives, 221, "223 ; honorific and hxinible, 297 ; voice, 199-206. Verbs in succession, how affected, 98, &. Verbal nouns, 116. Vocative case, equivalent for, 248. Voice of verbs, 199-207. Vowel preceding consonant syl- lables, how affected, 42. Vowel syllables, A, I, U, E, O, 2 ; not true vowels, but independ- ent words, p. 26 ; changes in, 35-41. Vowel sounds, variations of, 24- 34; "Continental," 2. w. W syllables, peculiarities of 22. Wu, as index to predicate, 240; sign of contrast, 241; of isola- tion, 213. Wo, accusative sign, 247 ; as particle how pronounced, 22, d. Words, two groups of in Jap- anese, 94. Writing, beginnings of Japanese, p. 3; earliest remains of Jap- anese, p. 4. Written Language of Japan, pp. 11-15; separation from Collo- quial, p. 8 ; the standard, how marked, p. 11 ; in age of Meiji, p. 12. Y. Yarn, as auxiliary word, p. 537. Ye, as dative sign, 246. Year, how designated, 87 ; charac- ter for, 88. Yo, as vocative sign, 248. Yori, as ablative sign, 248 ; as postposition, 265. ERRATA. PAGE 18, 25, line 4, for 12, " Tokyo," read " Tokyo," also on pages 28, 167, 169, 170, 173. i " syllable," read " syllables." 57, 18, " shu," read " shit." 59, 12, " syblable," read " syllable." 17, " *r*K7." read " #f 5K7" 64, 3, " the," is omitted at end of of line. 67, 3, " designates," read " designate." 71, 10, supply a comma after " part." 7(5, 16, " \^ 7 "read" YJ" 85, 8, " coalesent," read " coalescent." 98, 3, omit both commas. 100, 17, " fal" read " i>^." 101, 2, " orignally," read " originally." 115, ' 20, " lose," read " lost." 116, 19, " Disiderative," read " Desiderative." 118, 8, put a comma instead of period after " Stem." 125, 11, " Z&OS/U" read SAO &" 134, 1, " does," read " did." last line, " rom," read " from." 151, 8, " 220," read " 200." 153, 11, ,, " syllablis," read " syllables." 162, ,, 16, " verb," read " verbs." 165, ,, 16, before " }5J," insert " this." 166, 169, 8, 21, " disagreable," read " disagreeable." " Omori," read " Omori." 174, 18, " houses," read " house." 175, last line, supply " ^," before " /\." 198, 10, " three," read " two." ERKATA. 569 PAGE 208, line 2, for " 2>k," read " g-$ ,." 225, 11, insert " of,' 1 before "reformers." 228, ,, 6, after " &," insert " ." 257, ,, 1. " SENENTH," read " SEVENTH." 270, 20, .. " U ft," read" 9ft-" 276. 5, " 3l *f " " 3to*^ " v* w> CL w- "They," "The." 439, 12, " Shinaga\va," read " Shimbashi, 519, I 521, j 1, " (-J-) su," read " (^/) N." THE END. JS u- -t- ii an T i- T iff ffi -*-* TtJ n BT * 2 ra T ix A 4 5 - * f l/ x>* H ff ft x 18 S2S'!L!GigN. UBRABY FAQUT A 000 043 751 7